AMERICA: OR An exact Description OF THE WEST-INDIES: More especially of those Provinces which are under the Dominion of the King of Spain. Faithfully represented by N N. Gent. London, printed by Ric. Hodgkinson for Edw. Dod, and are to be sold at the Gun in Ivy-lane. 1655 TO The worthily Honoured Mr. JOHN ROBINSON, of London Merchant, the Author wisheth all happiness in this and a better Life. Honoured Sir, THere be two Reasons, why this Stranger presumeth to address himself to you. The one is to take Sanctuary under the Patronage of your honoured name. For, though he be no Grand Delinquent, nor guilty of any such offence, that he should much fear or fly the Sentence of Justice: yet for many small faults & imperfections in his b●ok (which the over hasty casting together of his observations could not well avoid) he will be found perhaps not a little obnoxious to Molestation and Censure. The other is to pay a Tribute of Due Acknowledgement to your Virtue and Nobleness; of which, all that know you are good witnesses. And who doth not know you, either in your Person or Fame, in this great and flourishing City? Who doth not speak you for a Mirror of much Generosity and Goodness in yourself; and also a Favourer and Cherisher of all good and honest endeavours in others? For this reason Sir (it being the Author's ambition, not to seem altogether ignorant of a thing so generally known) he presumeth upon this bold Address: being only unhappy, that he cannot (for some necessary reasons that hinder him) Immortalize his own name, as he hopeth to do his book, by an inscription of such eminent Merit and Worth. Permit it, noblest Sir, for this once to be thus. Hereafter (if it please God) I may have some better liberty to profess myself your Servant, and to let the World know how much I honour Virtue and Goodness in you. So resteth, Sir, with his best wishes for your health and the increase of all prosperity to you, Your most humble Servant N N. THE Publishers Advertisement to the Reader. THou hast here, courteous Reader, presented to thee a general view of those remote, but rich and goodly parts of the World, to which the Hand of Divine Providence seemeth at this time to be leading the English Nation, for the execution of those things, which his Divine Justice and Wisdom hath decreed to be done by them. It might seem perhaps not altogether unfitting, to have perfixed something in this place, concerning the Reason of the State's Resolution, and the Great and Transcendent Cause which hath been given, why the English Forces should move that way in the manner they do, as well to satisfy the Nation in the Justice of that Design, wherein they are likely to be so much engaged, as to stop the Mouths of some exasperated Englishmen, who are ready to asperse the Action with the imputation of Piracy, and other unseemly characters of their Disaffection. And truly the Author once intended so much. But being a man otherwise (as he freely professeth) and saving the respects & duty which he oweth to his Native Country, no way disaffected to the Good and Honour of Spain; and seeing there hath been such Honourable Application made from that Crown to his Highness and the State of England, as, 'tis yet supposed, may accommodate things in difference, and prevent War, he thinks it more reasonable at present to be silent, and expect, as with his best wishes he doth, the certain issue of that Negotiation, and (if it may so please God) an establishment of Peace betwixt the Nations. Not being able otherwise but to fear, and almost to ominate, affliction and ill success to that part, which shall persist to deny Justice, and give cause of the war. Of which in brief having thus premonished thee, Reader, I bid thee hearty farewell in our Lord. June 14. 1655. A. B. The Contents of the first Part. Chap. 1. OF the Globe of the Earth in general, and of the general parts which it containeth. Chap. 2. Of America in particular, and of its first discovery by Christopher Columbus, Americus Vesputius, and others. Chap. 3. Of the voyage to America; or the ordinary course of Navigation, which the Spaniards hold, to and from the West-Indies. Chap. 4. Of some particular Adventures made by the English into the parts of America; especially those of Sir Francis Drake, Sir Thomas Cavendish, the Lord Admiral Clifford, and others, which are briefly related. Chap. 5. Of the situation and most probable extent of the New-World, the temperature and disposition of the Air there, the quality of the Soil, and Nature of its several Climates. Chap. 6. Of the principal Commodities of America, both Natural and Mercantile; and first of Maiz, of Cassavi, Jucca, and other Roots there, of which they make bread. Chap. 7. Of some choice and excellent Fruits and Fruit-bearing Trees at the West-Indies. Chap. 8. Of Cacao, and the famous drink called Chocolatte, of Atolle, and other drinks used at the West-Indies. Chap. 9 Of the abundance of at the West-Indies; and of several sorts of Beasts and other Creatures, both of Land and Water, proper to the New-World. Chap. 10. Of Sugarcanes, cotton-wool, Mulberry-Trees, and Silkworms, at the West-Indies. Chap. 11. Of the abundance and excellency of the Metals at the West-Indies; especially of Gold and Silver. Chap. 12. Of the famous Silver Mines of Potozi; and of the Pearls and Pearl-fishing at the West-Indies. The Contents of the second Part. Chap. 1. OF the general division of the New-World into Continent and Islands; and of the two parts of the Continent, viz the Northern and the Southern. Chap. 2. Of Estotiland, and the several Provinces which it containeth. Chap. 3. Of Canada, and the Countries belonging to it. Chap. 4. Of Virginia, and the Countries thereto belonging. Chap. 5. Of Florida. Chap. 6. Of Califormia. Chap. 7. Of New-Gallicia. Chap. 8. Of New-Spain, and its Provinces. Chap. 9 Of Guatimala. Chap. 10. Of Peruana, or the Southern part of America. Chap. 11. Of Castilia Aurea. Chap. 12. Of New-Granada. Chap. 13. Of the Kingdom of Peru. Chap. 14. Of the Province of Chile. Chap. 15. Of Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata. Chap. 16. Of Brasil●. Chap. 17. Of Guiana. Chap. 18. Of Paria, or New-Andalusia. Chap. 19 Of the American Islands, viz. The Caribee Islands, Port-rico, Hispaniola, Cuba, Jamaica. map of Americas AMERICAE DESCRIP. Miliaria Germanica CHAPTER I. Of the Globe of the Earth in general, and of the general parts which it containeth. 2. This therefore being a demonstration for the stability and unmovable fixedness of the Earth in the middle of the World, of such evident, obvious, and unrevincible experience as it is; Me thinks it cannot be sufficiently wondered at, why the World should seem so generally and so seriously to be taken with the Eccentrick and injudicious fancies of Copernicus and Galilaeus, concerning the perpetual motion which they imagine to be in the Earth, and that the Heavens or celestial Bodies stand still and move not at all. Fancies, not only contrary to common sense (so fare as sense may be judge of the motion, rest, distance, and situation of Bodies, which certainly it may and aught to be in many cases, and such as do particularly pertain to this question) contrary to the more general and unanimous judgement of both ancient and modern Philosophers, contrary to the evidence of so many thousand demonstrations Mathematical and Astronomical, which have been founded and held good in all ages, upon the contrary supposition, viz. That the Earth is the Centre of the Universe; and that, secundum se totam, it never moveth; but contrary also unto Scripture, which refutes the opinion in a hundred places, reckoning the perpetual motion of the Heavens, and the unmovable rest and stability of the Earth, among the Magnalia Dei, or the chief works of Divine Providence and Wisdom. The places are so obvious and frequent, that it seems scarce necessary to allege them; yet the reader, if he please, may see Psal. 19.5, 6. and 104.19, 20. Jos. 10.12, 13. 2 Kings 20.9, 10, 11. Psal. 104.5. and 119.90. Eccles. 1.5. which last is the testimony of Solomon himself, not only a great King, but as the Scriptures likewise testify of him 1 Kings 4.29, 30, 31, 32, 33. a great Philosopher, and one that understood the nature and constitution of the World better than any mere Philosopher before him, or since; which I suppose no man will be so immodest as to deny. And though we acknowledge the Scriptures were not given principally to teach us a body of Natural Philosophy, as they frequently tell us; yet doubtless they were given to teach us truth, in whatsoever they teach us, and how to judge of the works of God, especially in those great and more general parts of the Creation, which, by their obviousness and visibility, were to be the subject of every man's pious meditation and wonder: Neither can we but presume, with some confidence, that the Author of Scripture understood the frame and constitution of his own handiwork somewhat better than Copernicus or Des Cartes; and would, without all doubt, have made another manner of report of it, if the truth had been otherwise, or that it had been his divine pleasure, that we should have otherwise judged of it. Admit therefore, that the Scripture sometimes doth not speak so exactly of the Natures of things, but more hominum, as they say, and by way of accommodation, or fitting itself to the common judgement and apprehension of men, and consequently that it ought not to be alleged in questions purely philosophical, contrary to the evidence of natural reason and demonstration; yet certainly, where the testimony of Scripture is so frequent and emphatically assertive, as it is in many respects here, and when the stile thereof is not contrary unto, but consonant to the general properties and principles of Nature (by which even philosophically we are to judge, and in other cases perpetually do judge of Natural things) if then we vouchsafe not both to speak and think according to the language of Scripture, we seem to bear but little respect to Scripture; and though the sense and stile of a writing be not always the one and same thing, yet in such case it must not be every plausible imagination or phantasm that may possibly come in our minds, but very necessary, cogent, and undeniable demonstration indeed, that should induce us to dogmatise in any thing contrary to the authority of the sacred stile. But who ever saw any thing alleged by the Cartesians of this nature? What necessary, clear, and evident demonstrations do they propound, either against the motion of the Heavens, or for the motion of the Earth? what objections do they make, but learned men of the contrary opinion, do as easily demonstrate to be fallacious and sophistical, and more easily answer than they seem to make them? Nay, for my part, 'tis more than I can yet observe, that they do much pretend unto any such matter, viz. as to demonstrate either the necessity of their own system of the World, or the impossibility and inconsistency of the Ptolemaick or common System, with the principles of Nature and Reason▪ All that they labour about is rather to show the possibility of their own devise, and to reconcile the Phoenomena or apparences of Heaven, and make them consistent with the motion of the Earth: which though they were better able to do, than I suppose they are, yet would it not follow, but that the other is likewise as possible and consistent; and having the advantage of divine testimony and attestation beside, consequently it would but little justify some of them to dogmatise so freely in the point as they do, contrary to the stile of sacred Scripture, and likewise to the judgement of some Ecclesiastical authority, that ought not to be slighted, before which Galilaeus himself was twice convinced of his error, and twice recanted his opinion. See Spondan. ad ann. Dom. 1633. sect. 6. 3. I confess the opinion of some Englishmen, viz. Carpenter in his Geography, which sustaineth only the circular and diurnal motion of the Earth upon its own Axis and Centre, is much less absurd than that of Copernicus and his gang: for it supposeth only one uniform motion in that body; and if it could salve the Phoenomena abovesaid & there could be any sufficient reason or cause assigned of such motion superior and prevalent, as it must be, unto that natural resistance which is in the body of the Earth, unto such motion, as hath been said, I should readily enough assent to it; but am very confident, neither the one nor the other can be affirmed with truth. Whereas the opinion of Copernicus, That the Sun is the Centre of the Universe; that it standeth always still; and that the Earth, like a Planet, moveth about him circularly betwixt the orbs, or Planetary circles of Mars and Venus, is liable to infinite absurdities, contrary not only to the authority of sacred Scripture, but of common sense, common reason, and the natural condition and propensity of the Earth itself. For first it maketh that Body, which of itself is most unwieldy, as I may say, and unapt for motion, and most naturally disposed to rest, the subject of the most rapid and accelerated motion, which they will acknowledge in the whole Universe, and this without assigning any proportionate and reasonable cause thereof. It is very well known, that one of the chiefest reasons (I know not well whither I may not say the only reason) which they pretend against the motion of the Heavens is this, That the revolution of the superior Orbs, especially of the primum mobile, must necessarily be more swift than can be supposed in any natural Body; which, though it seems a very childish and weak conceit, considering the nature of those Bodies, and their aptitude to move; and likewise what power it is that first gave them, and still continues the impression to it: yet against themselves it concludes very well, viz. that they ought not to assign the same motion (I mean in proportion the same) unto another Body in no proportion capable of it, at least not without assigning a more necessary and evident cause of it than that of the Winds. But men are come to a great height of confidence in their assertions, it seems now adays, and may well be pardoned such a petty oversight as this, when they blush not to sustain, deliberately and soberly as a man would think, that the least weight whatsoever, is able to overpoise the Earth, and that if but a Fly out of the air lights upon it, the whole Machine or Body of it shuggs, as it were: I mean, that it is really moved therewith, and that some real alteration is made in the site and position thereof, as to the other parts of the World. They that have the confidence to publish such Theorems as these to the World, I confess, may be permitted to say, the Winds, or any thing else lighter than the wind, are a sufficient cause, that the Earth circulates or turneth round once every day. Secondly, Because it makes one and the same continuate Body subject to so many different and contrary motions, at the same time: As first a diurnal motion upon its own Axis. Secondly, an annual motion, whereby it describes and correspondeth to the Signs of the Zodiac. And lastly a motion, which they call, of Declination, quite contrary to that upon the Centre, or the motion of the Universe, and whereby the whole Axis or Diameter of the Earth is made to be movable, and not fixed. Absurdities, which in the motion of the Heavens, they know well enough, are easily salved by the supposition of Epicycles or lesser Orbs moving within the compass of the greater: which being, as is supposed, discontinuate from the greater Orb, under which they move, though carried about with it by force of the diurnal revolution, yet may well be conceived to retain some peculiar motion of their own, different from that of the greater Orb; just as a Fly or a Snail upon a wheel, may be supposed to be whirled about with the wheel from East to West; and yet, at the same time, by a peculiar motion of its own, creep slowly on, quite contrary to the motion of the wheel, viz. from West to East, or otherwise obliquely and traverse the wheel, viz. from North to South. And being also neither concentrical with the superior orb, under which they move, nor with the Earth, but eccentrical and moving upon a different Axis and Centre from them, it must needs follow, that the Planets or other Stars assigned to such Orbs, and carried about by and with those Orbs in a motion retrograde and different from that of the superior, should at different times, that is, at different periods or points of their revolution, appear diversely posited, in respect of the Earth, and of us that live upon it; I mean sometimes more distant and remote, sometimes nearer at hand; sometimes more vertical, and sometimes more declining; according, I say, as the Planet or Star is carried either to his Augis or highest point of exaltation in the Epicycle; or contrariwise to his Absis, or depression: and likewise according as either the condition of the Climate or the several seasons of the year, or some other provident intent of the wise Author of Nature doth require. For which purpose see the excellent and remarkable discourse, which Dr. Brown hath lib. 6. cap. 5. of his Pseudodox Epidem. edit. 2. upon the site and motion of the Sun in the Heavens. And though the Cartesians reject these Epicycles never so much, as fictitiou and imaginary things, yet can it not be denied, but that they are possible, and their supposition not contrary, but agreeable enough unto Nature and the quality of the Heavens. I say they are possible; which is more than can be said of many of their suppositions. And whosoever shall seriously consider, in other parts of the Universe, how much it pleaseth the Divine Wisdom, by the contrariety and inequality that is in particulars, to balance, as it were, and bear up the general Harmony, Equality, and Concord of the whole, may in time perhaps, come to think them neither so improbable. 4. Others (as the Author of the Dialogues de Mundo) give I know not what progressive motion to the Earth, no more reconcileable with reason and the natural property of the Earth, than the other; but rather seeming to add something to the former absurdity. I say, not reconcileable to the natural property of the Earth, which, by wh●t hath been said in the beginning and many other sensible demonstrations, doth necessarily place and settle it in the Centre and middle space of the World. For, (not to repeat any thing that hath been spoken already) what other reason can be given, why a man, standing in any part of the Horizon, six of the Signs of the Zodiac will be seen of him, and the other six always hid, but that the Earth is exactly, and at all times, in the midst of the World, or of the circumference of the Heavens? what reason can be given, why the Stars appear always of the same magnitude (if the air be clear and equally disposed at the times of observation) whether in the vertical point or at East, West, or in whatsoever part of the Heavens they be observed, but that the parts of the Earth at all times keep the same distance from Heaven? what reason can be given, why that whensoever the two great Lights, viz. the Sun and Moon, are diametrally opposed one to another in the Heavens, that is, the one full North, the other full South, or the one full East, the other full West, there always happens an Eclipse of the Moon? and why the Moon never happens to be eclipsed, but when she is so opposite to the Sun, but only because the Earth is perpetually in the midst of the World, and by consequence in such opposition necessarily prohibits and hinders the reflection of the Suns-light upon the Moon? I have no intention to enter a controversy with any man, much less to pretend an exact refutation of their opinion, how erroneous soever. What I have spoken hitherto hath been only obiter, and by way of preamble to the discourse that followeth; wherein, being to treat of such a considerable and rich part of the World as America is, unknown to former ages, and to make report of some part of the great wealth and riches which divine Providence had, as it were, treasured and laid up therein, to be dispensed unto other parts of the World in his appointed time; I thought it not improper nor much amiss, by way of Introduction, to take notice of a dispute so nearly concerning the principal subject of my discourse, which is the Earth, or habitable World, and to speak my mind freely therein. How necessary is it, and how much could I wish, for the respects I bear to some Persons in the world, that men professing Religion and due reverence to the sacred Writ, would oftentimes remember one excellent document and advise therein, recorded by the Pen of that great Apostle and Doctor of the Gentiles St. Paul, which is sapere ad sobrietatem, to use our Learning and all acquired Endowments soberly and with due respect unto the dictates of Religion; knowing this, that the mind of man is otherwise, of itself, an abyss of inordinate and irregular cogitations, to which, if we ourselves set not bounds many times, by religious and voluntary acquiescence in such verities as divine Authority any way commends unto us, but follow the swing of natural curiosity, and our fine pleasing speculations to the utmost, we may in time come to dispute ourselves out of the right way, and be more apt to believe any thing, than what is good and true. 5. That which compleateth the Globe, and maketh the body of the Earth more entirely round, is the Element of Waters; which is a Substance compounded, as it were, and consisting of Earth and Aire mixed together, yet in such a proportion, as that the Substance of the Earth doth much predominate in the composition. From hence it followeth, that the element of Water must retain the natural property of the Earth, which is, to move downward in a direct line toward the Centre of the World, as we see perpetually that it doth in every little drop of water, which divides the Air, and makes itself a direct passage through it towards the Earth and Centre of the World; and likewise it must retain (though in a weaker and lesser degree) the property of the Air, which is to be diffufive and perpetually spreading itself, and unapt to be kept together but by some boundary or body that contains it. From the first of these, viz. the predominancy and property of the Earth in the Element of Water, it follows that the Water must naturally cleave to the Earth, be naturally united with it, and hardly, that is, not otherwise than by force separated from it. So that there is no fear that the waters of the lower Hermi-sphere, or of the Antipodes, should fall back into the concave of the Heavens, as, upon our first thoughts of it, we are commonly apt to imagine; nor yet that any of the People or other living Creatures in that part of the World, should have the like mischance. For, upon whatsoever part of the Superficies or Surface of the Earth they live and move, they are fastened and glued, as I may say, to it by this natural & inbred property of the Earth, which is predominant in their constitution, viz. to move downward, and incline to the Centre, and which we see perpetually takes place in them, whensoever their animal and voluntary motions cease. From the second, viz. it's natural fluxilitie and diffusiveness it follows, that the water must be apt to insinuate and lodge itself in all such cavities and receptacles, whether upon the Surface or more within the bowels of the Earth, as the divine Providence hath prepared for it: and also that wheresoever it findeth a free passage, or channel, and that it is not stopped or kept in with banks or bounds, it should be naturally and continually flowing or in motion, as the Air is: And from both it appears, how apt the water of itself is to embrace the Earth on all parts, and to constitute one common Globe or round Body with it. The Cartesians, men of such discerning and searching capacities as they are, me thinks, if they would, might more easily find some probable reason from hence, of that notable effect in Nature, which hath so long exercised their Speculations, viz. of the ebbing and flowing of the Sea, without being driven to a necessity of unsettling and shaking the foundation of all things, which the wisdom of God hath so clearly laid in and upon the Earth; and without perverting the glorious and never sufficiently to be admired System and Frame of the World, with such presumption as they do. Without doubt the influence of the celestial Bodies do much concur to this effect, by their attenuating and rarefying the substance of that Element; and likewise the Winds, especially those which are natural and constant to the respective Climates of the World: Nor do I think it an effect, that can be attributed unto any particular, uniform, or single cause whatsoever; so as they that stretch their wits, and labour to attribute it to any such cause, I fear labour in vain. But yet, under favour, and with submission to better judgement, I suppose the principal and more general cause, which disposeth the element of the Waters to such an effect, may be that very thing or quality which we are now discoursing upon, viz. it's natural fluxility and aptness to be perpetually running and in motion, where it hath a convenient channel wherein to flow, and whereby to empty itself into another place. For, as we said, naturally it is inconsistent in or with itself alone; nor is there any other cause required to make it move or flow, but only a way open and plain: So that if it were certain (as I think most Cosmographers hold it for very probable) that there were a channel at the North for the waters of Mare deal Zur, or the western Ocean, to pass into the Atlantic, as there is at the South for the waters of the Atlantic to pass into Mare deal Zur, I should think without any more ado, that what we call the Tide, that is, the excrescency of the waters in narrow Seas, Creeks and Rivers nigh the Sea (for in the main Ocean 'tis commonly said there is little or no Tide observed) were nothing else but an effect of that great and general flood, by which the waters of one Hemisphere do continually flow into the other, according to the course and motion of the superior World, from which, beside their natural proclivity and aptness unto motion they do constantly receive an accessary influence and impression to move; and which general flood, or course of the Waters out of one Hemisphere into another, as it passeth along the several coasts of the World, necessarily putteth in abundance of waters into all narrow Seas, Creeks, and other receptacles lying conveniently to receive it: and that the Ebb is nothing else but the recess of the same Waters, retiring and withdrawing themselves (as they must necessarily do) to follow the general flood, when it is gone by. But because this passage or intercourse of the Waters of the upper and lower Hemisphere, by the North, is not to me so evident, I leave the whole matter as a Problem, and Subject of further meditation to those that are willing to think upon and study the great works of divine Providence with modesty and religious sobriety: not doubting, but that sufficient reason may be found otherwise of this admirable effect, from the natural property and inclination of the Water (as hath been said) to be always moving and flowing one way or other; from its aptitude likewise to receive impulsion, or an impression to move from all other things; from the natural site and position of the parts of the Earth, in the several quarters of the World, by which it floweth; and from divers other causes, that possibly might be observed, if we did apply ourselves to take notice of them as we ought. 6. The general Globe, or whole body of the Earth's circumference, is divided by the Equinoctial line, into two great and equal Hemispheres, or half parts, which they call the upper and lower Hemisphere; and sometimes the Northern and Southern, because they lie upon the North and South side of the line that runneth betwixt them and divides them one from another: And by the Meridian (commonly called the Meridian of the World) into two other, which they call the Eastern and the Western for the same reason. It containeth four general quarters, or known habitable parts, which are Europe, Asia, Africa, and America; the three first whereof, viz. Europe, Asia, and Africa possess and take up the Eastern Hemisphere, or that half part of the Earth which lieth Eastward of the Meridian line. In the Western Hemisphere there is not yet much discovered, but only the land of America and the Islands thereto belonging, of which we are now to speak. CHAP. II. Of America in particular, and of its first discovery by Christopher Columbus, Americus Vespucius, and others. 1. I Shall not detain the Reader with any long dispute, whether this great part of the World, which we call America, were known to the Ancients, or not; seeing the ancient Geographers, as Ptolemy, Strabo, and others, make no mention of it in their Books: This is certain, that if ever there were any knowledge of it, as some suppose there might be, and that particularly in the days of King Solomon, yet through an absolute discontinuance of Traffic and Commerce betwixt those Parts and such other Nations of the world▪ as have left us any reports, or history of former times, that knowledge was long since so utterly extinct and forgotten, as if it had never been. As for the Text of Scripture, 2 Chron. 3 6. which is sometimes alleged, where the Gold, which King Solomon used about the Temple, is said to be Gold of Parvaim, and which the favourers of the affirmative opinion, interpret of the Country of Peru in America: though some learned men insist upon it, yet to others it seems rather a plausible conjecture, than a good argument; and whosoever considers how unlikely it is, that a Country once famously known and sought after upon such an occasion, should ever come to be unknown, and, as it were, lost in the world: or that Commerce and Traffic, once held and settled between Nations, upon a commodity so much esteemed and desired by all men, as gold is, should ever come to be totally discontinued with all Nations, and to suffer a lapse beyond all memory of men and ages; I say, whosoever considers this, I think in reason he should acknowledge, that the negative opinion is more probable; and that we do but right to the memory of Columbus, and those other brave men, his followers, still to account them the first discoverers of this new World, as 'tis commonly called; and in that quality to speak a few words of them, before we proceed any further. 2. Christopher Columbus was by Nation an Italian, born, as it is said, at Nervi in the territory of the Commonwealth of Genoa; who having by his education and long practice at Sea, attained to a great skill in the Art of Navigation, and in all Maritime affairs, was at this time become famous and well accepted, by reason of his good abilities, to most of the Princes of Christendom; being well known in the Courts of England, Spain, Portugal, and others; and being also a good Mathematician, by observing the daily course of the Sun, came at last to a resolution with himself, that there must needs be yet some other World, unknown to us, to whom that glorious Planet dispensed the benefit of his rays, during his absence from our Hemisphere: being likewise surprised with an intense desire of discovering that presumed World, and of searching out where it lay, and what kind of People it had. The French are not willing that the glory of this enterprise should be so entirely attributed to Columbus; Thuanus, a grave & good Author positively affirming, that Mounsieur Betoncourt, a Frenchman, who first discovered the Azores or Tercerae Islands, as they call them, and afterwards sold them to the Spaniards, gave him some information of the Country, and did little less than put him upon the design. Others speak of a certain Pilot, who had been wracked upon some of the very Coasts of America, with whom Columbus had the good fortune to be acquainted, and to learn much from him: That Martin Vincent, his Brother in Law by the marriage of his Wife's Sister (being himself also a man much used to the Sea) had assured him, that he was once by a storm, carried more than 450 degrees westward of the Cape of St. Vincent upon the Coast of afric, and that he there met with certain great logs or pieces of Timber floating upon the Sea, such as he could not but believe were driven thither from some western Country or Islands, lying further into the Main. That the Inhabitants of the Azores or Tercerae Islands, had told him, that upon the Coasts of Gracyosa, Fayal, and Flores Islands, there had been lately cast certain Pine trees of India, and certain dead men, of countenance and stature much differing from the proportion of any other known Nations; and likewise certain weather-driven Canoes or little Boats, which they knew were used by none but Indians, or by some other unknown remote Nations, which must lie westward of them. All which, whether it were true or false, matters not much: For whatsoever the first inducements and encouragements were, which Columbus had towards the enterprise, 'tis certain, he was the first that propounded it to the Christian World, and prosecuted his proposition with such a constancy and magnanimous resolution, notwithstanding the many difficulties and oppositions which for a long time he met with, as may easily argue something more than the hand or counsel of man in the business, both supporting and conducting him in it. 3. For not being able out of his private fortunes to furnish himself out upon such a design, he was forced to have recourse to certain Christian Princes and States, and to desire their assistance: some of which rejected his propositions as ridiculous and vain; to wit, the State of Genoa, to whom, as being his native Country, he first applied himself. In the Court of Portugal, where he had married a wife, and by that means was become free Denizen and a Subject of that Crown, he was maligned and hindered of his purpose out of envy, by some of the Council very powerful with that King: who although they would not seem to regard his proposition, yet privately & under pretence of a voyage only to Cape Verde, themselves sent out a Carvell, with instructions to make what discoveries they could of any Land westward. But their project had no great success; the Carvell after much fowl weather and hardship endured, making a difficult return home, and discovering nothing. Whereupon he applieth himself to the King of England, who was at that time Henry the seventh, a Prince that loved treasure well enough, but cared not to hazard much to gain it: and all that Columbus could promise as yet upon that point was only, that he would discover a shorter way to the East-Indies, whereby Christian Princes might procure themselves the wealth of those rich Countries already known, in a shorter time, and at far less charges than hitherto they had been able to do. But what through the parsimony of this Prince, and his cold attention to the business when it was first propounded to him; and what through the misfortunes which his Brother Bartholomew Columbus, met withal in his way to England, which somewhat hindered his addresses to the King, there was no answer given, till it was too late, and that Columbus had engaged his service unto Ferdinand King of Castille; who at last, viz. after a matter of six or seven years' attendance and delays, had yielded to his request, at the earnest entreaty of the Queen Isabel, and of the Cardinal Mendoza Archbishop of Toledo. It is said, that the Queen was become so zealous and earnestly affected to the business, as 'tis supposed, upon some principles of Religion, suggested to her by a Religious man, Fernando de Talovera her Confessor, that she pawned many of her own Jewels to help to furnish him out: and 'tis certain, the Treasure of Castille was never more exhausted, than it was at that time, through a long and chargeable war with the Moors, which was not quite ended when Columbus received his Commission: So that many humane reasons might seem to have excused that King from undertaking any new charge, at that time especially, had it not been the will of divine Providence to have that work go forward, and to recompense the liberality and piety of those Princes with such an infinite advantage both of wealth and honour, by the means of this man. 4. On Friday the third of August 1492, he set out from Palos, a Port Town of Andalusia, with three Carvels, whereof the Admiral Sancta Maria, was commanded by himself; the Vice-admiral Pinta, commanded by Captain Martin Pincon; and the Ninna, commanded by Captain Vincent Yannez, Pineon, having aboard in all of them together about 120 men, and among them Americus Vespucius for one. On the eleventh of August following they had sight of the Canary Islands, and sailing forwards, on the 16th day they met with certain quantities of long grass floating upon the water, and upon one of them a Grasshopper alive; which grass, as it increased daily more and more for some time, so it put them in continual hopes every day of coming to some Land. Nevertheless they sailed August quite out, the whole Month of September following, and some part of October, without kenning of any land; which troubled them extremely; insomuch that his company began to mutiny desperately, and to threaten their Admiral, that they would throw him overboard, unless he would presently return for Spain; swearing they were abused, and that he should not make himself a great Lord, as he intended, with the peril of their lives. They alleged moreover, that the Ships were spent and grown so leaky, that they thought they would scarce endure the Seas so long, as to carry them safely home again. Columbus was much afflicted with this behaviour and resolution of his Soldiers, yet endeavoured to pacify and draw them on, as much as he could, with good words, and to animate them still with hopes of success: but at length, seeing nothing else could prevail with them, much against his will, he made them a promise, that if within three days they descried not Land, he would forthwith return for Spain. This was on the 10th of October; and the very night following they discovered the Island Guanahani, one of the Leucaiae Islands, which lie together in the Gulf of America, called afterwards by Columbus St. Salvador. This was a great rejoicing to them all, especially to Columbus, who went on shore; and having sung the Te Deum on his knees, with tears in his eyes, he erected a Cross and took possession of the Island in the name of the Catholic Kings Ferdinand and Isabel, all the Spaniards that were with him presently (according to his Patent) acknowledging him Viceroy of the Country. There were standing by some few of the Natives, wondering to see men clothed and so acoutred as the Spaniards were, themselves being for the most part naked, and only painted upon their bodies, with white, black, red, and other colours as their fancy lead them. In their nostrils and upon their lips some of them had rings of gold pendant, as it were, in the way of ornament; which the Spaniards quickly espied: and enquiring of them by signs, where they had such fine things, they came to understand, that a certain King of that Country, who lived a great way further toward the South, had abundance of it. This news pleased them so well, that they made no long stay there, but on the 15th of October they set Sail, and fell upon another of those Islands seven or eight leagues distant from this, which they called lafoy Conception; from thence upon the 17th they came to the Island Fernandina; and from thence to Cuba: Columbus not suffering his men in any of these places, to take aught from the Natives against their will, or without giving them something for it, which they seemed to desire. At Cuba he found that the Natives had some Towns and Villages, which they inhabited, and were so ordered, that in fifty or threescore houses sometimes 2000 or 1500 people of Men, Women, and Children, were contained, according to the custom of the Country, that all People of the same Lineage or Kindred lived together in one house: and their houses being built square, in the fashion of a Court, with long and large sides, though but low and of a lamentable Architecture, easily contained them all. 5. From hence they sailed to Hispaniola, where they had sight of the King of the Country, named Guacanagari, who received him and his company with much show of kindness, presenting him with the Fruits and other Commodities of the Country; and, which was better than all the rest, giving them more certain information of those golden Provinces, which were afterwards discovered in the main Land; for as yet they were but upon Islands, and had not touched or seen any part of the Continent of America. Columbus was so well satisfied with the intelligence which he had gained, that he resolved to return for Spain, and to make report of his Adventures to the King; whereunto the condition of his Ships, want of some necessary Provisions to proceed further, together with some other accidents, did also induce him. For, as it commonly happens in the affairs of this World, unanimity and friendship lasteth not long among men, especially where self-love and private interest once make a breach, his Vice-Admiral Pincon, perceiving the voyage likely to be profitable, had by this time separated himself from Columbus, upon pretence of some offence taken, but really out of hopes to advance his Fortunes better by going apart by himself; which, though it were derogatory to his Commission and the command which he had over him, as Admiral, yet Columbus was content to bear with it, for the better carrying on of their common design; so they were reconciled: And having built the Fort of Natividad in Hispaniola, for the guard of some Spaniards that were to be left there, Columbus set sail for Spain on Friday the fourth of January, having first charged his men to show all due respect to the King of the Country, and not to wrong the Natives. But how they did observe his charge, doth not so well appear; For the men are said to be murdered, all of them, by the Natives, during the absence of Columbus: and this is thought to have been some occasion, not only of the War, which the Spaniards made afterwards upon the Natives, but of that excessive severity and cruelty, which for a long time together they used towards them. In his return he discovered a great part more of the coasts of Hispaniola, and gave names to divers Capes and Harbours, by which he passed: But drawing near home, he suffered two such terrible storms, upon the coasts of Spain, as had well nigh buried him and all his hopes in the bottom of the Sea. By reason whereof, and for the performance of some vows, which he had made in his distress, he went on Land, upon some part of the Kingdom of Portugal; which he thought he might safely do: But it proved otherwise. For the fame of his voyage being blown home before him, there was in the Court of Portugal no little matter of offence conceived against him, That he, being a Subject of that Crown (as we have said he was by the right of his Wife) should do such an eminent service, without leave, to a foreign Prince, and one that perhaps, was little better than an Enemy. This was chief through the instigation of some malevolent persons about the King: and although the suggestion were altogether injurious and groundless, Columbus having first offered his service to that King, and been refused, yet it prevailed so fare, that Columbus was apprehended and sent up to Lisbon. But the King himself seeing him, contrary to the expectation and endeavours of some about him, used him with much respect and kindness; and after some short time, having had that discourse with him, concerning his voyage and adventures, that he desired, he let him freely pass to the Court of Castille. Where he was received with a welcome answerable to the success of his endeavours, and to the advantage which they promised that Crown; and quickly furnished out again with more and better Ships, wherein he made several and successful voyages, still discovering more and more of this new World which he had found, and asserting the several Provinces where he came, to the Crown of Castille. And although towards his latter end, through the procurement of some enemies which he had at Court, whose envy, like a dark shadow, perpetually attended the lustre of his brave actions, he suffered some Eclipse for a time in his honour and reputation, upon occasion of a Rebellion, which one Roldanio Ximenez, a seditious turbulent fellow, and one that had been once his Servant, and advanced by him, had begun to raise in the West-Indies; and that Bobadilla was sent to be Governor of Hispaniola, in his stead: yet being come to Court, though in quality of a Prisoner, and, as some say, in chains, the remembrance and sense of his former merits, together with his own approved honesty and virtue, soon dissipated those clouds of jealousy and suspicion, which were gathered against him; and the Catholic Kings looked favourably upon him, renewed and confirmed his former Authority and privileges, viz. of Admiral of those Western Seas, (which Office his Son and Nephew after him a long time enjoyed) created him Duke De la vega in the Island of Jamaica, being a Town which himself had built: So that he both lived and died with Honour; being a man, as 'tis credibly reported of him by divers Authors, of exemplary Piety and Virtue; very religious and devout towards God; just, affable, and courteous towards Men; temperate and abstenious in all things; and in a word, such a man (as Mr. Purchas truly acknowledgeth of him) as God had made a fit instrument for so great a work, viz. as was the discovery of so many great, rich, fertile, and fair Countries, as were formerly unknown to the Christian World; being no less celebrated by the Spanish Writers, Oviedo, Herrera, and others, for his magnanimity, courage, wisdom, and admirable resolution in his undertake. 6. Second to Columbus, in the glory of this grand and successful enterprise of discovering the new World, was Americus Vespucius, a Florentine; who especially in the service at the charge of Emanuel, King of Portugal, undertook the business. He had been one of Columbus his companions in the first expedition, and consequently did now but trace the way which Columbus had before showed him; yet had he this happiness and honour above his Predecessor, viz. to give name unto the Country discovered; the whole Continent of the new World being ever since generally called America from him. This man, as was said, having made several voyages to America, partly with Columbus, and partly by himself, in the service of King Ferdinand, and by them discovered much of the Continent of America on this side the Equator, in the year 1502 Emanuel, King of Portugal, took him into his service. Under whom setting out of Lisbon with his companions, and a competent number of Ships, they sailed up to the Equator; and having crossed the line, discovered the coasts of Guiana and Brasil, beyond the Tropic of Capicorne to 32 degrees of Southern latitude; where having stayed some time, and taken possession of the Country after their usual formalities, they held on their course beyond the River of Plate, unto 52 degrees, as Munster in his cosmography reporteth; which is accounted to be full the height of the Streites. But here being taken with foul weather, and their Ships much spent and impaired by the storms, they were forced to retun homeward by the coast of Africa. In the year following, viz. 1503, he attempted another voyage, directing his course for Melcha or Insula Real, in the Country of Brasil; but having passed Cape Verde and Sierra Liona, upon the coast of Guinee, by a great misfortune, the Ship which carried their chief Provisions was sunk, and 300 Barrels or Hogsheads of Victuals and other necessary Provisions for the company, was utterly lost: by which disaster being forced again to turn homeward, how long he lived, or what expeditions he made after this, it doth not appear. 7. I ought not altogether to forget Sir Sebastian Cabot, a Venetian Gentleman, yet born and living in England; who likewise about this time, viz. in the year 1496, at the charge of Henry the seventh, King of England, set out with two Carvels, for the discovery of a Northwest passage to Cathay and the East-Indies, according to the design which Columbus had first suggested to him. In pursuit whereof, he is reported to have sailed to 67 degrees of Northern latitude upon the coast of America; but finding the Land still to bear Eastward, which was contrary to his purpose, he turned sail and coasted down Southward as fare as Florida, where with the usual ceremonies, he took possession of several places, in the name of the King of England, as we shall further see in the particular description of the Continent. In the way he discovered the Island Baccaleos, or of Codfish; so named from the great abundance of that kind of Fish which they met withal upon the coasts. They lie 25 leagues into the Sea over against Cape Ray of Newfound land; where the English have an extraordinary good Trade for Fishing, and also many other rich Commodities. But being forced at length to return home again for want of Victuals, his business, by reason of Wars which we had then with Scotland, was wholly laid aside, to the great prejudice of the English Nation, who in all probability might have made themselves quarter-Masters at least with the Spaniard in the wealthiest parts and Provinces of America, if the business had been well followed. Sir Sebastian himself went immediately thereupon into Spain: and though he returned again into England, and was graced by the King with some titulary dignity, viz. of Grand Pilot of England, and a pension; yet seeing his design was never revived to effect, I shall forbear to speak further of him: as likewise I shall do concerning Ferdinand Magellan a Portughese; whose name, although it be deservedly famous in the History and affairs of the new World, and that he had the happiness to discover what so many before him had sought, but could not find, namely a passage to the East-Indies by the South Sea and the coast of America, called therefore from him ever since Megellans' Streits: yet because his business chief was to discover, and not to conquer; and that his design upon the Continent failed, which was to have planted a Colony of Spaniards in the middle and narrowest part of the Streits, thereby to have secured the Streits to himself, and prohibited the passage to all Strangers, it may suffice to remember him in some other place, that is, in the description of that part of the Continent which lieth upon those Streits. CHAP. III. Of the Voyage to America; or the ordinary course of Navigation, which the Spaniards commonly hold, to and from the West-Indies. 1. THe English Nation have long since been acquainted with the ways to the West-Indies reasonably well, as appears by the many brave exploits gallantly attempted, and no less stoutly and successfully performed by them in those parts, both at Sea and Land; some of which I shall not altogether forget to mention in due place. So that this Chapter may seem not so necessary. Nevertheless for the satisfaction of those, who are never likely to see America otherwise then in a Map; nor to understand the affairs of that rich part of the World, but by such reports and relations as this, I think it not altogether inconvenient to speak a few words of the particular voyage, or course held by Sea, to and from America, called by the Spaniards commonly Carrera de las India's. 2. Their course is wholly Westward; and they reckon commonly from Sevill in Andaluzia, which is a Province of old Spain to St. John D' ullua, a famous and much frequented Port of the Province of New-Spain in America, about 1700 leagues, after the Spanish measure, which is thrice so much of Italian or common miles; and with winds they do ordinarily dispatch it in two months and an half. To Nombre be bios, or Porto-bello, in the Island of Hispaniola, they reckon 1400 leagues, and do usually make their voyage in two months. They set out commonly from St. Lucar, which is the Port, as it were, to Sevill; or else from Palos, a Sea Town in the same Province with Sevill, & not many miles distant from St. Lucar, Westward; and hold their course directly for the Canaries, which are certain Islands towards the coasts of afric, under the dominion of the King of Spain, well known for the rich Wines yearly transported thence. They lie about 200 leagues distant from Spain, and the Ships arrive at them commonly in eight or ten days, if nothing hinder, making their course through the Bay or Gulf De las yeguas, as they call it, from the abundance of Mares which they were transporting into America, and were forced thereabouts, by a storm, to cast over board. It is counted the most difficult passage betwixt Spain and the West-Indies, especially in the Wintertime, being then for the most part dangerously infested with violent and contrary winds. At these Islands the Spaniards ordinarily victual and supply themselves with necessaries, the Country being rich and affording all things requisite for their journey plentifully, especially that called Palma, where they use most commonly to touch and furnish themselves. From hence they set sail for America, by the Islands of Cape Verde, which lie in the Atlantic Ocean, a few degrees within the Tropiques, toward the coast of afric: And hither, for the most part, they have an easy and certain course, seldom wanting some wind or other to bring them within the Tropiques, or Torrid Zone, as 'tis commonly called: and being there, they have constant winds forward, which they call The Brise's or Levant-windes. These are certain Easterly winds, which continually blow within the Tropiques, on both sides of the Equator, never failing; and in the space of fourteen or fifteen days, do carry the Ships within sight of the Northern Islands, as they at the West-Indies call them; which are, as it were the Suburbs of the New World, lying thick scattered upon the coast of America, in the Atlantic or North Sea. 3. The first which they commonly discover, are some of the Caribee Lands, lying toward the coast of Paria, viz. Desseada, Dominica, Guadalupe; at which last they always come to Anchor, and refresh themselves both going and coming; and from hence disperse themselves to the several parts and Ports of America, for which they are bound. Those that go for New-Spain, take the right hand way towards the Island Hispaniola; and having discovered the Cape St. Anthony, which is a foreland or Promontory, in the furthest and most Westerly parts of Cuba, they sail in sight of the Islands both of St. John de Portrico, and also of Hispaniola; of which last they leave the Port or City of St. Domingo at a distance of two or three leagues off at Sea, and hold their course betwixt the Islands of Cuba and Jamaica, till they attain St. John D' ullua, or Vera Crux, in the Province of New Spain. This passage, viz. from the Islands Desseada and Guadalupe, to St. John D'ullua is reckoned to be little less than 500 leagues; and by reason of so many Islands, great and small, which lie in their way, and cause the Seas to be much subject to contrary winds, it is counted a passage of no little difficulty, and not to be attemped, as Herrera saith, without a very skilful Pilot, and that in the day time, with the favour of a good wind and a full Sea; in respect whereof they commonly make it twenty day's passage, and are glad if they can reach it within that time. Those that go for the Main Land, as they call it, or Castilia del oro, have a passage of 400 leagues from Guadalupe abovesaid. These take the lefthand way; and having discovered the high Mountain of Tayrone, which is as a Pharos or general Landmark for such as sail upon that coast: they touch at Carthagena, a famous and well-seated Port and City of that Province; and from thence pass on to Nombre de Dios, or Porto-Bello, from which places they convey all their Merchandise by Land unto Panama, which is not above eighteen or twenty miles distant, and lieth upon the South Sea: where they are Shipped again; and from thence by Sea conveyed to all the parts of the Province of Peru. They that go to Honduras and the Province of Guatimala, keep company with them that go for New-Spain, till they discover Cape Tiburon, which is the first point of Hispaniola Westward, where they leave them, and run along upon the North-side of the Island Jamaica, unto the point of Negrillo: Then they put to Sea, and seek the Cape called Cameron, which is at the entrance of the gulf and Province of Honduras; from whence sailing fourteen or fifteen leagues Westward, they come to Anchor at Truxillo, upon the River Haguara, which runeth into the said Gulf, and unlade their Merchandise, so much of it as is intended for those parts: the rest they carry further up the Gulf to Porto de Cavallos, or St. Thomas de Castille; and from thence along the coast into the Province of Guatimala. 4. The best and most usual time for an outward voyage, that is from Spain to America, is about the Spring, viz. from the latter end of March to the beginning of May; for then commonly they make their voyage in due time, and come well thither. If they stay longer, so as that the Month of August be spent before they reach the Islands, it is more difficult, and they are usually taken with the Hurricanos, as they call them, which are certain violent and contrary winds that do terribly infest the Atlantic and Indian Seas all winter long, from September to March. And likewise in their return homewards they observe the same time of the year there, viz. about May and June the ships that are to return for spain, from all parts of the continent of America bend their course for Havana, in the Island of Cuba, which is the place of their general Rendezvous where they are all to meet, and to stay one for another till the whole Fleet, especially both of Convoy and Treasure be come in. Those from the main land, set sail commonly in May from Porto Bello, laden with all the wealth of Peru, and whatsoever else comes by the south Sea, which is not seldom very much from the Philippine Islands and the east Indies, and at Carthagina take in more, brought thither from all parts on that side the continent, especially out of the new kingdom of Granada, as they call it. Sailing from Carthagena they avoid the coast of Veragua what they can, by reason that the Current, which falleth out of the Ocean into that Gulf, cometh so strongly upon them, that they would never bear up against it, at least not without much difficulty and danger; So that they are forced to seek the Cape Saint Anthony, which, as we said, was the most westerly point of the Island Cuba, at which place the ships from Honduras do also touch, and so they sail together a matter of fifty leagues eastward, till they come to Havana. The ships from new Spain bear up Northward as far as the Sound or Bay called Las Tortugas, which are certain Islands lying upon the coast of Florida, and so fetch a compass, as it were, of little less than three hundred leagues, before they come to Havana. The reason of this course is, because the American Seas, especially near upon the coast, are frequently subject to calms, so as the ships oftentimes want wind to sail with; and therefore to gain, or assure themselves as much as may be of a convenient wind, they are forced to steer thus far Northward; from whence, that is, from the Islands Tortugas, they have a short and easy cut of a few leagues over to Havaena. 5. When the ships are all met in the Port of Havana, they presently set sail for Spain through the Streites of Bahama, and by some of the Leucaiae Islands; not now in a direct course Eastward, as they came in from the East, but in a greater altitude and more Northerly. The reason hereof is, because the Brise's or Easterly winds, which, as we said, do constantly blow all within the Tropiques, or Torrid zone, do hinder their passage Eastward, and force them to seek their course higher, that is, somewhere without the Tropiques and more towards the North, at least to twenty three or twenty four degrees of altitude, where they find Westerly winds commonly, which carry them homewards as far as the Azores or Tercerae Islands; and the farther they go from the Line, the more ordinary and certain those winds are, and more fit to make their return; for as much as blowing from the South and south-west, they carry them directly East and North-east, as their voyage lieth; which is also the reason why the return which the ships make from America, or any of those western Islands, is usually more difficult, longer and less certain than when they go out; because, as hath been said, in their going out, when they are once passed the Canary Islands and got within the Tropiques (which they usually do in four or five days sailing, if the winds favour them) they have constantly there an Easterly wind, which carries them with full Sails upon the Islands of America: whereas in their return, beside the uncertainty of the winds by which they sail, they are forced to seek a height, as they call it, that is, to fetch a compass Northwards sometimes more than three or four hundred leagues to gain a convenient wind. These Azores or Tercerae Islands lie in the Atlantic Ocean, between thirty seven and forty degrees of northern Latitude, and are reckoned to be about four hundred leagues distant from England; at which when the ships have touched, and supplied themselves with such necessaries as they want, which commonly they do at the Tercerae Islands, but never stay to go on shore, they set sail from thence directly for Saint Lucar or Cadiz; which, when the coast of Portugal was free for them, and that they might come up securely with the Cape Saint Vincent, they usually reached in fourteen or fifteen days; but now of late, by reason of the Wars, and the revolt of that Nation from the Spaniard, they do a little decline that coast, and consequently come in some few days later than ordinary. CHAP. FOUR Of some particular Adventures made by the English into the parts of America; especially those of Sir Francis Drake, Sir Thomas Cavendish, the Lord Admiral Clifford and others, which are briefly related. 1. BY what hath been said in the precedent Chapter, the English will in part perceive how the voyage to the west Indies is commonly made, where the chief difficulty or danger of it is, and how avoided: what may seem wanting to their more perfect information shall be supplied in the particular description of the several places, Ports and Roads for shipping, which belong to the respective Provinces. At present for the entertainment of the Reader, and to perform an office of due respect unto the memory of some brave men of our Nation, who have formerly visited those coasts with good advantage to themselves and honour to the Nation; I shall endeavour to give a brief account of the Achievements of some of the principal of them, leaving the rest unto such particular occasions of remembering them, as will occur in the discourse afterwards; and begin first with him whose memory is deservedly most famous and honoured by all men, for his extraordinary abilities, experience, and happy conduct at Sea, viz. with Sir Francis Drake. 2. This brave Seaman, at the first beginnings of his actions, was Captain of the Judith, with Sir John Hawkins, in the voyage of Guiny, one thousand five hundred sixty seven, and received together with him some considerable damage and injuries from the Spaniard, in the Port of Saint John D' ullua of the West-Indies, contrary to promise and agreement with him, and therefore to repair himself, having first been assured by some Divines that his Cause and Design was just, as Master Camden witnesseth of him; In the year one thousand five hundred seventy two, he set out for America with two ships and a pinnace, whereof that called the Dragon was commanded by himself, and at his first attempt surpriseth Nombre de Dios, at that time one of the richest Towns of America: But in the Action, happening to receive a wound in one of his feet, which disabled him very much, he was not able either to hold the place, or to gather that rich spoil that lay even in sight before him. For his Company, a little too much discouraged with his disaster, carried him back to the Ships, almost whether he would or no, to the great joy and content of the Spaniards, leaving the town and an infinite mass of treasure behind them untouched; a great part whereof they saw with their own eyes in the Governor's house, namely huge bars of silver lying round about the Hall of his Palace, piled up a great height from the ground, ready to be laded and transported for Spain, as soon as the Ships came. But there wanted some resolution in his company, by whom, being over-borne, he was forced to put to Sea much against his Will; so that the success of his first enterprise served only to whet his stomach and courage, to give them a second visit as soon as might be. Being somewhat recovered of his wound, he falls with his Ships into the Sound of Darien, where he lighted upon a certain People called symeron's, which are, for the most part Negro, and such as having been Slaves to the Spaniards, by reason of their cruelty and hard usage are run from them▪ they live in Woods and wild places of the Country, in great companies together, not much unlike to other Savages, hating the Spaniards deadly and doing them upon all occasions what mischief they can. By these he gets Intelligence, that a Requa, as they there call it, that is, a certain number of Mules (most commonly they are forty or fifty in a company) laden with Treasure and other things, was to pass within few days from Panama in the South-Sea, to Nombre de Dios, to be Shipped from thence for Spain; which he therefore resolved, if it were possible, to surprise. These Requas from Panama to Ventacruz, which is about six leagues distant, in the road to Nombre de Dios, do constantly travel in the night, by reason of the openness of the way and the excessive heats in the day time: neither had they as then any other guard but only of those who drive them, and perhaps some Gentleman or Officer of the Kings to oversee the Treasure, by reason of their great security, and that they had lived till then without all fear or suspicion of an enemy upon that coast; so that the enterprise seemed to them not to be any matter of great difficulty. Wherefore having gained a sufficient number of those symeron's to his party, which he might easily do, with no more than eighteen stout and resolute men of his own, leaving the rest to guard and manage the Ships as occasion might be, they march by night over the Strait of Darien, as 'tis called, which is that Isthmus, or neck of Land that joins the two parts of America together, viz. the Northern and the Southern part, and contains in that part of it where they were, not above eighteen or twenty miles over, from Sea to Sea, though in length it be many leagues. They were come down undiscovered within one league of Panama, and had lodged themselves in a Grove on each side of the road where the Requa or company of Mules was to pass: which according to their expectation also came, and, as the manner is, so tied one to another, that if you stop one, you make them all stand. The Requa, which was now coming, belonged for the most part of it, to the Treasurer of Lima who with his Daughter and Family, were going for Spain with eight Mules in the company laden with Gold, and one with Jewels: which without question had been all taken but for the indiscretion of one Englishman, named Robert Pike; who having drank a little too much Strong-water in his march, was become pot-valiant with it, so as his companion could not keep him to his postures nor persuade him to lie close, as they were commanded to do, till the watchword should be given; but hearing the Mules come near, out of a foolish bravery and ambition to be the first that should give onset in such an Action, stood up; and wearing his shirt uppermost, as they did all, the better to distinguish and know one another in the night, was instantly descried by a Spanish Cavalier that road a little before the Mules; who, suspecting what it might be, presently turned his horse, and gave such speedy notice thereof, that the principal part of the Treasure which came behind, together with the Treasurer himself, his Daughter, and other of his company, were saved by a timely retreat, and only some few of the foremost Mules taken: which, as they had some Treasure, so the English, knowing how soon the Country would be alarmed by reason of their discovery, durst scarce stay to ransak them, but taking a little of what came next to hand, resolutely made their way through Venta cruz. and so by woods and wild forests of the Country to the Ships, which expected them in the Sound; yet having the good fortune by the way, about Rio Francisco, to meet a smaller Requa of Mules laden with silver and some gold, which having better leisure to examine, they took and carried as much of it as they could away with them to their Ships, burying the rest in the ground. 3. In the year 1577 was his voyage about the World, in which to his immortal Fame and Honour, he was the first Commander of note that encompassed this Earth's Globe and returned safe home again. For though Ferdinand Magellan had discovered the Streits before him, and gone far, yet he lived not to return home, being slain at the Moluccae Islands, while he was reducing them to the obedience of his new Master, the King of Spain. This voyage afforded Sir Francis Drake some better amends and satisfaction from the Spaniards, than the former had done; though even that was not altogether without profit. For in this he not only took and well rifled many Towns and places of the Spaniards, upon the coasts of America (which they that writ the passages of the voyage report more at large;) but especially he met with divers rich prizes at Sea; as namely at Valparaiso in the South Sea, a ship laden with Wines and as much of the finest Gold of Baldivia (which is counted the best of all) as amounted to thirty seven thousand Ducats of Spanish money, beside silver and other good Commodities. At Tarapaxa, upon the same coast, he met with thirteen bars of pure silver, amounting to four thousand Ducats: And after that with eight hundred pound weight of silver, that was going for Arica to be shipped from thence to Panama, and so for Spain, laden upon Pacos, which are certain Sheep of America about the bigness of Asses, which they use as Beasts of Burden, especially for the carriage of their Treasure by Land from place to place. At Arica they rifle certain Barks and other small Vessels which they found in the Port, and take out of them, beside other Merchandise, fifty seven wedges of pure silver, every one of them of the weight of twenty pound a piece, and amounting in all to one thousand one hundred forty pound weight of silver. At Lima they enter the Haven, where they found about twelve sail of ships fast moored at Anchor, their sails taken off, and all the Mariners secure on shore; whereupon examining the ships, they find in them, besides abundance of Silks, Linen and other good Commodities which they took, one chest full of rials, of Plate, which they thought not good to leave behind; and (which pleased them as much as all the rest) they got intelligence here of another great Spanish ship, called the Cacafuego, which was at Payta, laden with nothing but Treasure. This ship had perceived them at Sea, and was making all the sail she could for Panama: But before she could recover the Port, they pursuing her very hard, about Cape Francisco they get sight of her, and after some short dispute board her and make her yield. In this ship they found thirteen great Chests full of rials of Plate, twenty six Tun of other silver, four-score pound weight of pure gold, besides abundance of Jewels, precious Stones, and other rich Merchandise: all which became prize; having also in their way while they were pursuing of her, met a single Bark laden outwardly with nothing but ropes and tackling for ships, but searching more within, they found no less than seventy eight pound weight of fine gold, beside many great and goodly Emeralds, with other Jewels. They took all, and setting their sail for Guatulco, otherwise called Acapulco, a noted and much frequented Port of these Seas, in their way they meet a ship from China, laden with Silks and China dishes, of which they take as much as they thought good, and after that rifle the Town of Guatulco itself; where, beside some quantity of gold, jewels and other plate, they find one pot of the bigness of an English bushel, full of Spanish Rials; which having emptied they departed without being farther troublesome: only one Thomas Moon an English man borrowed a chain of gold, which he happened to find about a Spaniard, just as they were going out of Town. At this place, finding themselves reasonably well laden, and that their ships had endured the Sea a long time, they resolve to return for England; which after some time they likewise did, by the way of the Moluccae and Philippine Islands, and on the third of November 1580, which was the third year of their voyage, they safely arrive at Plymouth. 4. In the year 1585. this noble and renowned Seaman, having been first Knighted, and otherwise also much honoured by Queen Elizabeth, made another voyage to America with a greater number of Ships; in which voyage, beside other places of less note, he took and burnt a good part of the Town of St. Domingo, in the Island of Hispaniola, forcing the Inhabitants to redeem the other part with a sum of twenty five thousand Ducats ready Money. He took also Carthagena, a Town upon the Continent, and in it Alonso Bravo the Governor, and after the burning of some houses had the sum of eleven thousand Ducats paid him by the Inhabitants to spare the rest. He took likewise the Towns of St. Anthony and St. Helena: But at last the English in the Ships falling sick of the Calenture, and many dying, he was forced to return for England with what he had already got; which upon value was found to amount unto threescore thousand pound sterling, of clear prize, beside two hundred pieces of Brass Ordinance, and forty of Iron. 5. In the year 1595. was his last voyage, which proved not altogether so successful to him as the former, by reason (as is supposed) of some misunderstanding betwixt him and Sir John Hawkins, who was the other General joined in Commission with him for the expedition. They both ended their days in this voyage; and particularly Sir John Hawkins before Port-rico, as soon as ever the ships came in sight of the place. After which Sir Francis Drake, being now sole General, made an attempt upon it, viz. upon Port-rico, but could do no more than fire some of the ships in the Haven, receiving also some loss himself. Nevertheless, after this he took Rio de la Hacha, Rancheria, which at that time was a rich Town, through the Trade of Pearl-fishing; and last of all Nombre de Dios, but found nothing so much Treasure in it now, as he saw the first time: And from hence marching by Land towards Panama, he had hopes to have surprised that place: But Sir Thomas Baskervile, who commanded a Party of seven hundred and fifty Soldiers upon that design, found the passages over some mountains so difficult, by reason of their straitness, and the passes so well fortified and guarded, that he was forced to retreat, not without some loss of men, which the Spaniards knowing the Country better than they, and having the advantage of the Woods on both sides of the way as they marched, killed in their return. By reason whereof they were forced to put to Sea again; where, not long after, the General himself fell sick, and partly of a Flux, and partly of grief, as 'tis supposed, that things succeeded no better, having been hitherto in all his endeavours acquainted only with success and victory, died within few days, before Porto-bello, and almost within sight of Nombre de Dios; and the Fleet under the command of Sir Thomas Baskervile, returned for England. Of Sir Thomas Cavendish his voyage. 6. The second in renown among Englishmen for the Adventures of America, and especially for a prosperous and complete circumnavigation of the Ocean, was my honoured Countryman Sir Thomas Cavendish of Trimley in Suffolk: who in the year 1586. with three ships and about one hundred and twenty men set out from Plymouth for the West-Indies upon Thursday the 21. of July, having in his company Captain Francis Pretty of Eye, Captain haver's, Captain Mellis, and some other Gentlemen: and the 25. of August following fell with the point Sierra Liona on the coast of Guinny; and from thence by the 7. of September with the Island Madrabamba, which is one of those about Cape verde; a place very convenient for the taking in of fresh water and other necessaries for men at Sea, but otherwise much subject to sudden claps of Thunder, Lightnings, and Storms, especially in Winter. Their design was for the Streits and the South Sea; wherefore declining the Islands and the coast of Terra firma, as they call it, which is that part of the Continent of America which lieth West and South-west of the Islands, they steer their course more directly South, and by the latter end of October they discover Cape Frio on the coast of Brasil, and put in with an harbour betwixt the Island of St. Sebastian and the Continent, where they stay some time, building a new Pinnace, and supplying their Ships with such other necessaries as the Country afforded. After which they put to Sea again, directing their course immediately for the Streits; to which place from the utmost coast of Brasil Southward it s reckoned commonly six hundred leagues. December the 18. they enter the harbour called Port desire, which is a very good Harbour, and hath a safe road for Shipping before it. From hence on the 6. of January they put in for the Streits mouth, and after a few days come to Anchor, not fare from the place where the Spaniards had a design to have built and fortified a Town for the command of the Streits, and the securing of the passage into the South Sea against all Nations but themselves. But, as it appeared, their project took no effect. For of four hundred men left there two or three years before, by Don Pedro Sarmiento, to that purpose by order of the King of Spain, there was scarce twenty remaining alive when Sir Thomas Cavendish sailed that way; the rest were either starved for want of necessary Provisions, or destroyed by the Natives. They had begun their Town, (which they named St. Philip) upon the narrowest passage of the Streits, about fourteen leagues within the mouth to the Southward, and not above half a mile broad, in a place very convenient for their purpose, and the Town itself well contrived, with four several Forts, and every Fort having some piece or pieces of Ordinance to defend it; which the Spaniards, when they saw themselves left destitute, and not able to subsist any longer there, had buried in the ground; but the carriages of them standing open and in view, upon search the pieces themselves were soon found and taken by the English. Many of the Spaniards that had been left there, as above said, were found dead in their houses, and lying in their unburied. Those few that were alive (which were only twenty three in all, whereof two Women) although they were scarce able to go or to help themselves, yet were resolved, as they said, to travel by land towards Rio de la Plata, which is distant some hundred of leagues from the place where they were; which they had free leave to do. The English thereupon made no long stay, but having named the place instead of St. Philip, Port-famin, they departed, holding their course still along the Streits, till upon the 24. of February they entered the South Sea; having found the whole course of the Streits to be about ninety leagues in length, and to lie in the same latitude (or at least with very little difference) at both ends, viz. in fifty degrees and two Terces, Southward of the line, having good and convenient harbours on both sides, almost at every leagues end; but otherwise of a most difficult passage, by reason of many wind and turn of the Sea, and of so many contrary winds, with which from several coasts the passage is almost continually infested, but especially in the deep of Winter; at which time by reason of the intolerable sharpness of the cold, frequent storms, & huge flights of Snow, their is neither sailing nor abiding upon those Seas: nor is it so safe or easy at any time to repass, viz. back again out of the South Sea into the Atlantic or Northern, as it is to enter by the North Sea. 7. Being got now into Mare deal Zur, and, as it were, upon the backside of America, they ply up and down those coasts, visiting, and not seldom pillaging the Towns, taking such ships as they meet withal, and steering their course now so far Northwest, till at last, upon the 12th. of June 1587. they double or cross the Equinoctial line back again, sailing Northward of it, up towards Panama and the coast of New-Spain. But whether it were that intelligence had been given to those parts of their being upon the coasts, it was sometime before they could spy any ships stirring. The first was upon the 9 of July, when they took a new ship of one hundred twenty Tuns burden coming from Puna, but newly launched off the Stocks, laden chief with ropes and other tackling for ships, which they took; and in her one Michael Sa●cius a Provencall, borne at Marseills, who, to do the Spaniards a pleasure, gave them information of a great ship called the St. Anna, which was expected from the Philippine Islands; and which upon his information they took within a few days after, being the richest prize (one of them) that ever was taken and carried off those Seas by Englishmen. But first they sail to Acapulco or Guatulco, as some call it, and having rifled the Town, in the Haven they take a Bark of fifty Tuns burden, laden with six hundred great bags of Anile, which is a rich sort of dye, every bag being estimated at forty Crowns; and four hundred bags of Cacao, which are a kind of Fruit of America of the bigness of Almonds, and so much esteemed there, that they pass both for meat and money; every one of which bags being valued at ten Crowns, the whole prize in the Bark, beside what they got in the Town, amounted to twenty eight thousand Crowns. From hence they set sail for the Bay of St. Jago, still Northward; and being come up as far as the Tropic of Capricorn, they were in some distress for fresh water, having none visibly nearer them than thirty or forty leagues. But by the advice of the above said Michael Sancius, who was a man of long and great experience upon those Coasts, they digged some four or five foot deep in the ground, and found very good fresh water in a soil outwardly dry and sandy; which he also told them was an usual experiment in many other places, upon those Coasts. About the middle of October they fall with the Cape St. Lucar, on the Westside of the point of Califormia, and came to Anchor in the Bay called Aguada Segura, where they resolved to stay a while, and wait for the coming of the St. Anna abovesaid; which about the fourth of November following appeared to their no little content. She was a ship of seven hundred Tuns burden, and Admiral of those Seas; and therefore not only richly laden but well manned. By noon the English ships got up with her, and gave her a broadside, which she answered: but soon after put herself to a close fight, and expected boarding; which the English attempting, were twice beaten off, and forced to betake themselves again to their Ordinance, with which they so raked her from side to side, and plied it so continually, that after a dispute of some five or six hours she was made to yield, the Captain hanging out a flag of Truce, and begging mercy for their lives: which the General readily granted, and thereupon commanding him to strike sail and come on board, the Captain, Pilot, and some of the principal Merchants did so. They were in all an hundred and ninety persons in the ship, men and women, and professed that their lading was one hundred twenty two thousand Pesoes of fine Gold, beside Silver, abundance of Silks, Satins, Damask, Musk, Conserve of Fruits, Drugs, and other of the richest Merchandise of India, of which they could give no certain estimate. Now every Pezo we are to know, in silver, is valued at eight shillings, or not much less (for I confess there is some difference in Authors about the estimate of it:) and consequently in gold (according to the common proportion betwixt gold and silver, used at the Indies, which is twelve for one) a Pezo must be worth ninety six shillings, or 4 li. 16 s. so that the whole value of the prize could not be much less than a million of sterling money; enough to make them all Gentlemen that shared in it. The Spaniards and other people of the ship, according to their desire, were set on shore at the Port of Aguada Segura, with necessary provisions given them, both for their Subsistance and defence in their travel. 8. From hence the English set sail for the Philippine Islands, and in the space of forty five days sailing, they reach the Islands Ladrones, as they are called, which lie in the way thither, about seventeen or eighteen hundred leagues from Califormia, whence they came, and in twelve or thirteen degrees of Northern latitude. They are a very convenient place for the taking in of fresh water, and for the supplying of ships at Sea, with many necessaries in so long a voyage, but the people wholly barbarous and savage, and so extremely given to pilfering and stealing, that from thence Magellan gave them their name, viz. Ladrones, or the Island of Thiefs. From hence about the middle of January they arrive at Manilla, the chief of the Philippine Islands, and about three hundred seventy leagues distant from Ladrones. This is counted to be the richest Country for gold in the World, but scarce of silver; so as the Sanguelos, as they call them, who are great and rich Merchants of the Country, do continually trade with the Americans of New-Spain for their silver, giving weight for weight for it in pure gold. From hence, about the beginning of March, they reach the Islands of Javia, where, by way of barter with the Inhabitants, for such things as they had got upon the coasts of America, they plentifully store their ships with all kind of Flesh-meats, Fowls and Fruits necessary for their subsistence homeward, receiving at their going away a present of the same nature from the King of the Country, viz. two large fat Oxen alive, ten great and fat Hogs, abundance of Hens, Ducks, Geese, Eggs, a great quantity of Sugar Canes, Sugar in plate, Cocos, Plantans, sweet Oranges and sour, Lemons, great store of good Wines, Aqua vitae, Salt, with almost all manner of Victuals beside. And it was no more than they had need of in the place where they were. For putting again to Sea, and making for the Cape de buona Speranza, or of good hope, which is the utmost point of afric Southward, they sailed upon that vast Atlantic Ocean, before they could reach the Cape, little less than nine weeks, running a course of eighteen hundred and fifty leagues at least, by Sea, without touching land; some reckoning it to be full two thousand leagues, viz. from the Islands of Java to the Cape of good Hope. There lieth about forty or fifty leagues short of the Cape a certain Foreland called Cabo falso, because it is usually at its first discovery at Sea mistaken by Mariners for the true Cape. From hence by the eighteenth of June 1588. they fall in sight of the Island St. Helena, which lieth in the main Ocean, and, as it were, in the middle way betwixt the Coast of afric and Brasil in fifteen degrees and forty eight minutes of Southern latitude, being distant from the Cape of good Hope betwixt five and six hundred leagues. It is a pleasant Island, and especially well stored with Fruits, as namely Oranges, Lemons, Pomegranates, Pomecitrons, Dates, and so proper for Figgs, that the trees bear all the year long, and at any time of the year a man may gather both blossoms, green Figgs, and ripe. It affordeth likewise good store of wild Fowl, as Partridges, Pheasants, a kind of Turkeys, of colour black and white, and as big as ours in England; great plenty of Goats, and such abundance of Swine fat and large, that they live wild in Herds upon the mountains, and are not to be taken but by hunting, and with great pains and industry. From hence by the twenty fourth of August they discover Flores and Corvo, two of the Azores or Tercerae Islands; and upon the ninth of September following, having first suffered a terrible storm and tempest upon the English Coast, which carried away all their sails, and put them in great fear and danger of losing all they had got; yet at last by the mercy of God and favour of a good wind they arrived safely at Plymouth. Of the Earl of Cumberlands voyage. 1. The right honourable George Lord Clifford Earl of Cumberland had before this made several voyages and Adventures against the Spaniards in and towards the parts of America, viz. in the years 1586, 89, 92, 94, etc. with various success: But in the year 1597. he more publicly and avowedly in his own person undertook an Expedition with eighteen or twenty good ships, and about a thousand men, being himself Admiral and Commander in chief. He set out from Portsmouth on the sixth of March 1597. with design at first to attend the coming out of the Carracks, which go yearly from Spain to the West-Indies: But being disappointed of them, through some intelligence that the Spaniards had gotten of his Lordships being at Sea, he sailed on for the coast of America, resolving by the way, with the consent of the principal Commanders with him, to make an attempt upon St. John de Port-rico, which is the principal Town and Port to an Island that bears the same name, viz. Port-rico, lying upon the Coast of America in eighteen or nineteen degrees of Northern latitude. It was a place, where a few years before, Sir Francis Drake had received some loss, and Sir Nicholas Clifford, the Earls brother, been slain by a shot from one of the Platforms, as he sat at supper with the General in the ship called the Defiance. The Town standeth in a little Peninsula by itself yet closely joined to the main Island towards the North, being a place very well seated, and fortified with two strong Castles; the one of which is built chief for the defence of the Haven, the other of the Town. About three or four leagues distance before the Town lieth a fair sandy Bay or Beach, which the Sea washeth on one side; over which the English at their first landing marched directly to the Town, through a thick woody Forest, and at the end of that upon a Causeway of some two or three score in length, and of breadth only to admit three persons to march a breast; at the end thereof they perceived a strong bridge of wood to be built, which reached from one Island to the other, and joined them both together, having also some Baricadoes to defend it, and a Block-house with Ordinance on the further side of the water. They were informed, that at a low water they might pass the bridge on either side of the Causeway: whereupon waiting till two of the clock the next morning, when the ebb would be, they attempt the passage; but could not gain it, by reason the Ordinance played so thick and directly against the Causeway: so they retreat with the loss of about fifty men in all, wounded and killed. Next day the General gave command that another Fort, standing upon the principal Island, should be attached by Sea. The place was of dangerous access; yet by the help of some Musketeers that were gotten upon certain Rocks within the Island, so near that they could play upon them in the Fort, within little more than an hours space, the Spaniards that kept it quitted the place, and they that attached it by Sea, in boats entered; howbeit the ship that brought them near it was herself cast away upon the Rocks at the ebbing of the water, as it was at first feared that she would be. The Spaniards that had quitted the Fort, together with the chief of the Town that were not already fled, retire and betake themselves to another Fort, called the Fort Mora, giving the English leave to enter the Town, & also to block up the Fort wherein they were: So that in few days they were content to render themselves upon such terms as the Admiral offered them, and the English became Masters of all. The Town and Forts being thus taken, the General's design was to have kept the place; which might easily enough have been done: But it was not long before the English, partly through some distemperature of the air, which in that place, it being a flat and low Island, is not so pure and clear as in the higher part of the Country, but chief through their own intemperance and irregular diet and drinking▪ the place affording them plenty of all things, and especially of many luscious and strange Fruits, sickened and died so fast of the Calenture, bloodyflux, and other hot diseases, that after nine or ten weeks holding the place, and six hundred of his men dead, as abovesaid, his Lordship was forced to return for England, doing no further hurt to the Town, save only the bringing away of four score pieces of Ordinance, the Bells of their Church, and some quantity of Sugar and Ginger: nor sustaining other loss himself in the whole voyage, than of three score men slain upon taking the Town, the six hundred dying of the Flux and other diseases, the Pegasus wracked upon Goodwin Sands, the old Frigate upon Vshent on the coast of Normandy with forty men in them, and a Bark lost by tempest about the Bermudas. The Admiral at his returning, left Sir John Barcley behind him with some men and ships, to compound with the Spaniards for the Town: but they seeing the General himself was already gone, and knowing the condition of the English to be such, by reason of the sicknesses amongst them, that it was not likely Sir John would stay long after him, made no great haste to compound, but found means to protract the business so long, that at last the English were forced to leave it to them, and that without burning or doing any other prejudice to it, according as the Admiral had given order before; being a person of great honour, and one that sought honour more than spoil, by the Expedition; as the Spaniards well found. Of Captain John Oxenham. 1. Hitherto we have spoken of such Adventurers, and voyages to the New World, as were either publicly or privately owned and avowed by the State; here followeth one, who, as it seems, wanted that privilege, going only upon jus Naturae, as he conceived, and to recover that by force, which he complained was by force taken from him, and having no other means left him whereby to obtain his right. This was Captain John Oxenham, a man who had formerly been Servant, Soldier, and Mariner with Sir Francis Drake, and together with him sustained some loss by the Spaniards at the Port of St. John D'ullua: And therefore, notwithstanding his proceed may seem to want some formalities of Law to justify them, and that the Spaniards counted and sentenced him for a Pirate, because he wanted Commission; yet seeing his Actions were not altogether groundless, and that his attempt was so memorably daring and hardy, and also so well and happily managed, so far as concerned himself, I shall not fear to add his name, and a brief report of his Action, to the rest of these worthies. 2. This man, as was said, had served Sir Francis Drake in his Voyages and Adventures at Sea a long time, and had thereby gained himself no small skill in Maritime affairs, and was particularly acquainted with the Coasts and Commodities of the West-Indies; so that by the year 1575. he was got to be Captain of a ship of a hundred & forty Tuns burden, carrying seventy men in her: with which in the year abovesaid he set sail for America, and arriveth at the Sound of Darien, at that very place, where a few years before, Sir Francis Drake had fallen acquainted with the Symeroons that put him upon the design for Panama by Land, and of surprising the Treasure Mules; a Place and People which Captain Oxenham knew very well, and intended to make use of them now. Nor was it long before he lighted upon some of them straggling up and down in the wilds of the Country: but they tell him that the Mules travel not now, but with a strong guard of Soldiers; which was somewhat contrary to his expectation, and altered his design quite: nevertheless, being resolved to Act something worthy of a man, before he returned, it served not so much to disanimate him, as to put him and his companions upon a more hopeful, yet withal a more hard attempt: which was, that seeing there was now but little hopes of doing themselves any good by land, as they hoped, nor by Sea on that side they were, they resolved to visit the other Coasts, and to try their fortunes upon the South Sea. To this end the Captain brings his own ship on ground, and, as well as he could, covers her with boughs and such other rubbish as the place afforded; and burying his Ordinance in the ground, he with his company and six Negroes to conduct them, march by Land towards the Coast of Panama and Peru. Having gone a matter of twelve or fourteen leagues they come to a River, which, as the Symeroons told him, ran directly into the South Sea. Here they cut down wood, build themselves a Pinnace of about forty five foot long by the keel, and in her they put to Sea, making towards the Island of Pearls, which lieth about twenty five leagues distant from Panama toward the South, hoping it would not be long before some ships from Peru or other parts of the South, would be sailing that way for Panama. So that by the way, however Sir Francis Drake hath deservedly the honour of first discovering the South Sea to Englishmen, viz. by the only open and known way of the Streits; yet it must be acknowledged, that Captain Oxenham was the first Englishman that ever sailed upon it with command. 3. He had not waited long, but there comes a Bark from Quito (which is a Province of the Country of Peru) laden with Commodities, and having in her besides of fine gold sixty thousand Pesoes, which he took; and within six days after another from Lima, wherein he had no less than two hundred thousand Pesoes of silver, in bars. What a Pezo is, both in silver and gold hath been already said, in the relation of Sir Thomas Cavendish his voyage. There are that render these Pezos' pounds of weight, saying that he took two hundred thousand pound weight of silver, and sixty thousand pound weight of gold, which perhaps is not so well done, and may make the sum to seem less credible: for as much as every pound weight of silver, after the ordinary rate of five shillings the ounce, is worth four pound of silver in Coin; and likewise every pound weight of gold, according to the common proportion betwixt gold and silver, which at the Indies is twelve for one, is worth forty eight pound in Coin; and consequently the whole value of the prize would amount to above three millions in gold and silver together, viz. two millions, eight hundred, and fourscore thousand pound in gold, and eight hundred thousand pound in silver; which perharps every body will not believe. I think it therefore better to express it by the usual term and value of a Pezo in Spanish, which is commonly said to be eight shillings of English money: and so the whole value of the prize taken amounted to nine hundred and sixty thousand pound sterling in gold, and to fourscore thousand pound in silver: which being found a competent prize, and enough to satisfy reasonable men, they retire with their Pinnace up the River, intending to make what haste they could to their ship. But as it unhappily fell out, through the covetousness and dissension of some of his company, so much time was spent before they could agree about sharing of their booty, and how to transport it to their ship, that the Spaniards at Panama had notice of them; whereupon ships were presently sent out to pursue them at Sea, and likewise some Soldiers to intercept their return by Land. The Captain himself, through the obstinacy and wilfulness of some of his company, was forced to leave the Treasure with them, and to travel some leagues up into the Country to find Negroes that might help him to carry it, his own men refusing to do it but at their own demands, and quarrelling with him for larger pay. In the mean time the Spanish ships that sought him at Sea come to the mouth of the River where they were gone up, and by the Feathers of certain Hens, which the English had taken, and, as it seems, plucked there, guessed presently that they might be gone up the River; and thereupon putting in after them, they soon took both them and their prize together. The Captain, as I said, was absent: but by reason that either the Negroes, or else some of the English themselves that were taken, had discovered their ship in the Sound, neither he nor any of the rest escaped, but were all, first or last, met with by the Spaniards; and having no Commission to show for what they did, were executed every man of them, only two boys saved. Thus, ended the stout and resolute Captain Oxenham; the Justice of whose cause I will not undertake to dispute with his Adversaries. I could wish it had been as perfectly just in all respects, as it was gallant and bravely managed on the Captain's part; insomuch that his very enemies, who made him die for it, do yet admire and extol it: being spoilt only through the passion, covetousness, and self-will of some of his company, whose lives paid for their folly. CHAP. V. Of the situation, and most probable extent of the New World, the Temperature and Disposition of the Air there, the quality of the Soil, and Nature of its several Climates. 1. THe Spaniards and other Nations have not altogether the same sense concerning the situation or extent of the West-Indies: Commonly they are taken to signify that part of the World lately discovered, which lieth Westward of the World's general and fixed Meridian, which, according to the common opinion, runneth through the Azores or Tercerae Islands, from one Pole to another, thereby dividing the Globe of the Earth into two equal parts, or Hemispheres. The Spaniards looking to the pretended Donation or Grant, made by Pope Alexander the sixth, to the Kings of Castille and Leon, of whatsoever Lands or Islands discovered, or that should be discovered by them sailing Westward of the Azores, whether upon the coast of India or elsewhere, do not seldom comprehend under the notion of the West Indies, and the New World, the Moluccae and Philippine Islands, with some other places in the Indian Sea, though they lie clearly in the Eastern Hemisphere: which, because it seems not so properly done, and doth otherwise beget obscurity in the Authors that treat of this subject, I thought it not amiss to give this Item of it here. According therefore to the most ordinary and general acception of the word, America, or the West-Indies, is that part of the World lately discovered, which lieth Westward of the Azores, and the World's Meridian, and possesseth, either in Sea or Land, the greatest part of that Hemisphere, viz. the Western Hemisphere of the World; the Land itself, viz. of America, being bounded Eastward and and Southeast with the Atlantic Ocean; and Westward, and to the South-west with Mare del Zur, the Northern borders of it being not yet known. A Country of so vast an extent, that some have equalled it to all the other three parts of the World, Europe, Asia, and Africa together, to whom I can hardly assent; yet do readily acknowledge it to be much larger than any one, yea perhaps than any two of the other parts, could they be exactly compared. It lieth for the most part North and South, not directly, but somewhat inclining, in the Southern part of it, Eastward, and in the Northern part Westward, being in length, as 'tis commonly supposed, from Terra Magellanica in the South, to Estetiland and the further parts of Quivira in the North, above a thousand nine hundred and seaventy seven Spanish leagues, which according to English or common measure, is more than six thousand miles; reaching from 60. degrees of Northern latitude (for so far it hath been discovered already by Land) unto 53 degrees of Southern: The breadth of it, viz. from St. Michael, otherwise called Piura, in the Province of Quito upon the South Sea, to the Prefecture and Town of Parayba on the Coast of Brasil, where it is thought to be broadest, is reckoned to be 1300. leagues, and in the whole compass to contain little less than ten thousand leagues, or thirty thousand common English miles. 2. The whole Country lieth in the form of two Peninsula's, or large demy-Islands, joined together by an Ihstmus or neck of Land called the Strait of Darien, of about an hundred miles in length, but in breadth, viz. from one Sea to another in many places, especially about Panama and Nombre de Dios, not above seventeen and eighteen miles over. They that resemble the Country to the form of a Pyramid reversed, I suppose, would be understood only of the Southern or Peruvian part, as 'tis called; neither is it so easy to conceive, where they lay the Basis of it: if from the Coast of Peru Westward, to the uttermost point of Brasil towards the East, as by the form of the Maps 'tis most probable they do; the spire, or top, of their Pyramid will have somewhat an obtuse or blunt point; in as much as the Country of Magellanica, which lieth upon the Streits and maketh the point of the Pyramid, is by confession some hundred of leagues over from East to West, or from the Atlantic to the South Sea, the Streits themselves running a course of one hundred and ninety leagues all along the Coast of it; and consequently must be of a far greater breadth than the Strait of Darien; where 'tis evident the Land of America, or rather of Peru, contracts itself into a much sharper point or Pyramid, viz. betwixt Panama and Nombre de Dios, as hath been said. To me (taking the whole Country, or both Peninsulas together) America seems rather to resemble some rich Usurer's bag, tied fast in the midst; the one end whereof is rich and well stuffed with Crowns, the other empty and lose; So seems America. The Southern part thereof containing the golden Countries of Peru, New-Granada, Castilia aurea, Chile, and the rest, like the full bottom of the bag, swells and spreads itself with a large circumference and border, both East and West: the Northern part, especially beyond New Spain and the Strait of Darien, which is as it were, the hand upon the Purse, and that part, by which the Catholic King both holds and commands all the rest, as the Provinces thereof seem to lie more scattered one from another, and not so compacted together, as consisting much of Islands, and the Continent itself frequently divided with Bays and Inlets of the Sea, so in comparison of the Southern Provinces, it affords but little of those precious Commodities, for which America's acquaintance is so much desired by other Nations, and with equal care, policy, and good success hitherto, forbidden by the Spaniards. 3. It is a question among Cosmographers, too great for me to determine, whether America be really Continent or Island, that is, whether the Northern Borders of it be joined to any part of Asia, or divided from it by some narrow Sea or Frith, as it is to the Southward from those, as yet undiscovered, Southern Lands, which lie on the other side of Magellan's Streits? It seems to be the more common Opinion, at least amongst Englishmen, that it is an Island, though a huge one, wholly surrounded by the Sea, and divided from Asia by a certain Frith or narrow Sea, which they call the Streits of Anian, from a Province of the Asiatic Tartary which beareth that name, and is supposed to border upon those Streits. Nor do there want some presumptions of probability for it; as for example, a report of Pliny, out of Cornelius Nepos, an ancient and credible Author, of certain Indians that were driven by storm upon the Coasts of Suevia, or Suaben, in Germany, in their Canoa's or little Boats; in which it had been impossible, for them to have come thither by any other passage, than by the North parts of America: Impossible, I say, to have come any other way, and not to have touched first at some other Lands, or Islands by the way, viz. upon the Coasts of Barbary, Spain, Portugal, the Azores, or Canary Islands; by reason that a ship, or any thing else, floating at Sea, when it is not hindered or diverted by storms, tide, or some other accidental cause, naturally of itself, and by the proper course and conduct of the waters only, beareth towards Land: Beside that, it is not very probable, they could have subsisted alive, and not been starved in so long journey, as to have come by Magellans' Streits, or the Atlantic Ocean. There be extant likewise some positive testimonies of certain persons, that say, they have really passed that way, as of one Salvatierra a Portughese, and F. Vrdanetta a Religious man, mentioned by Mr. Carpenter in his Geography; and of one Juan de Fuca, is he is called, an ancient Greek Pilot, mentioned by Mr. Purchas, in his third part of Eng. Voyages, pag. 849.850. who is said to have lived forty years in America, and in his own person to have discovered the passage in the year 1592. at the command of the Viceroy of Mexico. But of what credit these testimonies shall be thought, for aught I know, the Reader must judge: I only report them as I find them. I could hearty wish, for the honour and great advantage which the Nation might reap by it, by having thereby a free passage into the South Sea, and consequently a much shorter cut to the other Indies; that the passage were discovered, and the English well Masters of it, especially if it could be made so easily as the said Pilot Juan de Fuca pretendeth, and in so short a time as is the space of twenty days; or from the Coast and near the latitude of Virginia, as some others have argued, and seem to hope that it may. But for my part (ingenuously to speak what I think) I fear the Proverb may somewhat prevail upon the English in this point, Quod volumus facilè credimus, and that the desire we have to find such an advantageous passage is not the least argument to make us think, That it is to be found. Not that I conclude there is none; for that were to be too injurious against the positive depositions of those who are said to have made it, and which I myself cannot disprove by any evident reason: And the report of Sir Thomas Button, mentioned in the same Mr. Purchas, concerning a strong Tide coming from the West much about the same latitude, seems to add something to the probability of the passage: but that I think the discovery of it, especially from the Land on this side, or from any part of Europe immediately, is a business of so great difficulty, that it is almost all one as if there were no passage. For how many of our own Nation, worthy men, and of great experience and skill at Sea, (not to speak of our Neighbours the Dutch, a People no less industrious and skilful) have with undaunted courage and resolution undertaken it at several times with great hazard of their lives and charge to the Adventurers, yet always forced to return without effect? Those Northern Seas whither they sail Eastward or Westward, being so barred and blocked up, as it were, with huge and perpetual mountains of Ice, their nights so long, their daytime so dark, by reason of the continual fogs, mists, and flights of snow, which are ever and anon falling, and lastly the weather generally in those parts so extremely cold and freezing, even in the midst of summer, that all things well considered, it may seem an attempt of small hope; and that Divine Providence by the order of Nature itself, or by the natural frame and constitution of this sublunary and terrestrial World, hath set a non plus ultra to humane endeavours that way. Nevertheless if the State think it expedient to make yet any further trial in the business, and to command the prosecution of it, with more public authority resolution and strength than as yet hath been used about it, as from so great wisdom I cannot but expect much, so for the ends abovesaid, viz the honour and advantage of the Nation, according to my duty, I shall wish all happy success to it. But this perhaps will seem a digression; I shall therefore return. 4. The greatest part of America that is inhabited or commanded by the Spaniards (to speak in the language of Astronomy) lieth between the Tropics of Cancer and Capricorn, or within the Torrid Zone, as it is called, but to speak more intelligibly to the general capacity of Readers, it lieth in the middle part of the World in respect of North and South, so as it receives the rays of the Sun almost perpendicularly, striking upon it all the year long, and consequently should be much subject to heats and droughts, as the Countries of Aethiopia, Egypt, Lybia, and other parts of the World that lie in the same parallel, generally are. But with America it is not so: there is no Country in the World generally more temperate in respect of heat and cold, than the West-Indies be. The reason of the difference is partly the Brise's, as they call them, or the Levant winds, which perpetually blow upon it from the East on both sides of the Aequator, together with other winds from all coasts of the Sea, that do much qualify and abate the heats, which otherwise, 'tis probable, would be not a little troublesome, especially in the plain Country and maritime parts of it: and partly the very site and position of the Country itself, which more within Land is generally mountainous and hilly: so that from whatsoever Coast or part of the World you enter the West-Indies, travelling forward, you still mount upward and ascend, as it were, in some parts, to a very great height; which is true, not only of the Continent or main-Land, but also of all or most of the Islands adjoining: by reason whereof, not only the Air, for the most part, is found to be temperate, cool, and healthful, but the valleys and lower grounds also very fertile and pleasant. Howbeit not in all parts of the Country alike, either for the one or the other, viz. either in respect of temperature of Air, or fertility of Soil. For we are to know, the Country of America consisteth generally of three several sorts of Land: The first whereof is flat, and, as it were, level ground, which lieth for the most part upon the Sea Coasts, and takes up no small part of the Country, by reason that, as we have said, America is wholly, or at least for more than three parts of four surrounded and environed by Sea. The second is extreme high Land, as consisting of the Andes, as they are called, which are a certain ridge or row of mountains, of such incredible altitude or height, that they are not thought to be paralleled in the world again. These run in a long and continued ridge through the whole Country of Peru, or the Southern part of America, from the Province of Popayan almost up to Magellans' streits, above a thousand leagues together; the tops of them being in most parts about twenty leagues over, and so perpetually covered with snow, that they are not much inhabited or known, save only upon the borders, or lower skirts of them. The third is a mean Land betwixt both, consisting partly of mountains of lesser height, yet for the most part running parallel with the Andes through the whole Country of Peru Southward, and partly of valleys or low-land; both which together they call the Sierra or Hill-Countrie. And according to this diversity of site, or position in the several parts or Provinces of America we are to expect a difference both in the temperature of the Air, and in the quality of the Soil. As for example, the Plains of America (for so they are commonly called) that is, the flat and lower parts of it, which lie upon the Sea Coasts, are generally hot and neither so much inhabited, nor counted so healthful; yet neither are they scorched with any intolerable heats, by reason of the Brise's, and those other frequent Sea gales, which, as we said, are continually blowing upon them, and as it were, cooling them from all parts: Nor yet are they parched with any immoderate droughts, although it never reins upon those parts of the Country, at any time of the year▪ for instead thereof, there falls continually every morning a certain dew, which after a time condensates, and turns into small pearly drops of water, which doth not a little refresh the Country. Beside that, this part of America, being a flat and level Country, it is so far from being rendered incommodious for want of water, that in many places it may seem to partake somewhat too much of that Element; as all along the Coast of Brasil, and also on the other side of America Westward; where the Country for a great part of it is rendered unhabitable, by reason of the great abundance of Waters, which falling with such huge Torrents, as they do, from the mountains more within Land, and finding no convenient passage in those level and flat Countries, do many times drown the Lands on each side of them for a great space together; or at least render the Country less profitable and useful, by opening so many great lakes, or standing waters, in all parts of the Country, and many of them of such vast extent, that they seem rather to be petty Seas within Land; and by turning so much of the other Land into marish or fenny ground, as upon the Coasts of America is every where to be seen. 5. Contrariwise upon the Andes, and in many parts of the Province of Chile, especially more towards the Streits, the Air is extreme cold, and not well to be endured; and beside, so strangely sharp and piercing of men's bodies, that for strangers, and such whose bodies are not used to it, it is not a little dangerous to travel that way. They report, that in the midst of Land it makes men Sea-sick, and causeth the same alterations, vomitings and other distemperatures of the stomach and body, but much more violent and extreme, which men commonly feel at their first going to Sea. This happens chief upon the mountains Pariacaca, Lucana, and Sora, which are part of the Andes. In other places, viz. about 'las Punas, which are another ridge of mountains, though lesser, running parallel with the Andes in the Province of Chile, the quality of the Air is such, that it takes away a man's life suddenly, and before he feeleth any sensible alteration or grief in himself, either from within or without. Men drop down dead as they travel in the way, without finding any pain or sickness in themselves: others lose their hands and feet as they travel, or at least some of their fingers and toes, which fall and separate themselves from the other parts of the body, with no more sense or feeling, than when a rotten apple falls from the tree that bore it. And this, how fabulous soever it may seem, yet is it a certain truth. Acosta, and other Authors of approved credit, do avouch it from their own experience, viz. of what they had found and felt in themselves, and from what they had observed and seen with their eyes in others: and it seems confirmed by Mr. Purchas himself, who, in the relation of Sir Thomas Cavendish his second voyage to the Streits (which to his great misfortune happened to be in the deep of Winter, and when the weather there is most intolerably cold and freezing, as hath been formerly said) reports a like accident, namely of one Harris an Englishman, who going to blow his nose, had the ill hap to pull it off and cast it into the fire, before he was ware: and of one Anthony Knivett of the same company, whose toes came off with his stockings in like manner, through the extremity of cold in those parts. 6. But the Sierra or mean Land, viz. betwixt the height of the Andes and the lowness of the Plains, as it takes up the far greater part of the Country, so is it generally more temperate, healthful and agreeable to men's bodies: It is also abundantly well watered with fair and pleasant Rivers, such as for the multitude of them, and the largeness of their respective streams are not to be paralleled in any other part of the World: It enjoyeth constantly its proper seasons of rain and fair weather, no less than Spain itself, and many other Countries of Europe; by reason whereof the Soil is likewise rendered so exceedingly fat and lusty, that it is to be admired what they report concerning the goodness and fertility of it. They have in many places two Harvests in a year, (as in the Island of Hispaniola) reaping in and about October that which they sow in April or May; and in May, that which they sow in October: yea, some say, there is no kind of Grain sown at the West-Indies, but in some places or other it will ripen and be fit to reap within four months. All kind of herbs, roots, or whatsoever fruits of the Garden, as Melons, Cucumbers, etc. in sixteen or twenty days at farthest. In some places a bushel of Maiz sown (which is their most ordinary breadcorn) yields two hundred bushels of increase; and a bushel of the best wheat, threescore; and 'tis said to be an usual thing there, of an acre of ground well husbanded, to reap two hundred bushels, or twenty five quarters of any Grain whatsoever. As for Fruits, I mean such as are natural and of the proper growth of the Country, there is incredible plenty and variety of several kinds, and those incomparably fairer, larger, bigger, more luscious and pleasing to the taste than are to be found elsewhere in the World: And as for such as have been transplanted thither out of Europe, as most kinds of European fruits have been, viz. Apples, Pears, Oranges, Lemons, Quinces, Figgs, etc. they do not only thrive well, but in a short time are exceedingly improved and bettered both in bigness, beauty, and taste, only through the richness and lustiness of the Soil. It is said, that an ear of wheat hath been seen there as big about as a man's arm in the brawn, and of above a span in length, and to have had growing in it above a thousand grains: A Radish root hath been likewise seen there of the same bigness and length, viz. of a man's arm, very tender of substance, and of a pleasant taste. And 'tis commonly observed, that for Wheat and other grain of Europe, they choose out a less lusty and colder soil; because otherwise to sow it in the fattest and richer ground, it would run all out into stalk of a huge height indeed, but without ear-ring or ever bearing of Corn. There be whole Woods and Forests, as it were, of Oranges, Lemons, Quinces, and other such fruit, both for bigness and beauty far exceeding the common ones of Spain, of the same kind. At the City of Cusco, which is the Metropolis of Peru, they have ripe Grapes all the year long; and in divers parts of the Country there be trees that bear fruit one half of the year on one side, and the other half year on the other, as Acosta reporteth of his own experience, of a Figtree in Malla, nigh the City of Kings: and others speak as much of other fruits in other parts of the Country. And so it is likewise for , I mean such as have been brought thither out of Europe, whether great or small , as Kine, Sheep, Hogs, Goats, etc. the increase that hath been of them would seem to be beyond belief, but that all Authors affirm it. In the Island of Hispaniola (and 'tis likewise the same in many parts of the Continent, and other Islands beside) there are many thousands of , that live wild in Herds upon the mountains having no certain owner; so as it is free for any man to kill them that will: and thousands of them are every year killed only for their Hides and the Tallow. And yet 'tis strange to consider what great multitudes of them are in private men's possession. The Bishop of Venezuela only is said to have had at one time 16000 head of great feeding upon his own Pastures: Another to have had of one Cow which he kept twenty six years for breed, to have had an increase of eight hundred head of ; and 'tis not counted any unusual thing for the Farmours of America, especially such as are professed Graziers, and do undertake (as it is the custom there) to serve such a Town, City, or Place with flesh meat at a certain rate, by the year, to have the like numbers, viz. ten or twenty thousand head of of their own and feeding only upon their own grounds; being also men of great estates, and reckoned commonly at one hundred, two hundred, and three hundred thousand Ducats a man, and upwards; living splendidly in their Estancias, as they call them, or Farme-houses in the Country, and maintaining a Table both for diet and ornament, not inferior to most Knights, or the best Gentlemen in Europe: which doubtless is an evidence beyond all dispute, of the goodness and fertility of the 〈◊〉 where they live, that such men as these can both live so gallantly and thrive so well. CHAP. VI Of the principal Commodities of America, both Natural and Mercantile; and first of Maiz, of Cassavi, Jucca, and other roots there, of which they make bread. 1. BUt to give some further assurance of the general richness and fertility of the Country at the West-Indies, it is requisite that we speak something more in particular, of the several Commodities and Fruits which America yields. These I distinguish into two sorts, viz. Commodities Natural and Mercantile. I call those commodities Natural which are so proper to the Place and Country of America, that as they grow there, so are they, at least for the most part, there likewise consumed and spent, as not being so fit or not so much used to be transported thence into any other parts by way of Merchandise; of which kind, I suppose the most part of their Grain, Fruit, and Cattle may be reckoned to be. I call those Commodities Mercantile, which are generally brought from thence, and in so great abundance, by the Merchants that trade in those parts; of which sort are chief the Metals of America, viz. Gold and Silver, to which must be added the great quantity of Pearl, precious stones and Jewels, yearly brought from thence, their Sugars, divers sorts of Spicery and Drugs, abundance of Cotton wool and Cloth, Hides, many kinds of wood, as well Medicinal as other: of all which my purpose is to speak something, before I come to the particular description of the several Provinces in which they are found; but yet briefly, according as I am obliged, and referring the Reader for more full satisfaction upon this subject, in case he desire it, to Acosta his History of the Indies, and to Oviedo his general History, whom I chief follow, and who treat of these things more at large. And first I shall begin with those Commodities which I call Natural; and amongst them with such as are of most general necessity and use for the sustenance of man's life, viz. with that famous plant called Maiz, and some other plants and roots, of which at the West-Indies they commonly make their bread, as we in Europe do of Wheat and other grain. 2. Maiz, the common bread corn of America, is a Plant, which groweth plentifully at the West-Indies in most parts of the Continent, upon a moist and hot ground, as that generally is. It groweth upon a certain cane or reed of good bigness and about two cubit's high from the ground: it groweth grape-wise, that is, the grain or fruit thereof, not covered nor enclosed in any husk or cod, as other grains of corn most commonly are, but open and in clusters, only fenced on each side with a large and broad leaf, growing upwards by it to the full height of the Maiz. The cluster, or bunch of grains, is commonly a span and half long, sometimes more, rending sharp up towards the top in the fashion of a Sugar-loaf, and of the bigness ordinarily of a man's arm; having upon the top of the cluster a certain tuft or bunch of long hairy fillets, which, as the grain comes to maturity, do likewise grow long, and bend downwards on one side of the bunch, not much unlike to the foretop of Time and Opportunity, as they commonly picture it. The grains of this Maiz are round, like unto pease, but bigger: yet commonly six or seven hundred of them are contained in one cluster, and for the most part two or three clusters upon every cane or reed. They are white till they come to be ripe, and then they turn outwardly black, but the flower of them, or substance within, is still as white as snow: and maketh a kind of bread, for strength or nourishment nothing inferior to wheat. It naturally engendereth much blood; so that strangers not used to it, if they eat overmuch of it at first, are subject to swell upon it, to become scabby, and obnoxious to such other diseases, as proceed of too much abundance and heat of blood: but to such as are used to it and eat it moderately, they say, it is a most agreeable kind of food, easy of concoction, not at all obstructive, as bread with us, whether of wheat or other grain, is generally held to be more or less, but rather in some degree purgative of noxious humours, and helpful against the stone, and other oppilations of the body; with which infirmities the Indians, that continually feed upon this Maiz, both in bread and many other ways dressed, are observed seldom or never be troubled. The buds of it while they are green and tender, are of such a fat and delicious substance, that they use them commonly instead of oil and butter, being no less pleasant and agreeable to the taste. They make Wine of it also, or a drink not less strong than Wine, and which, being freely taken, as quickly overcoms a man: which they make by steeping the grains of Maiz in water till it breaks, and afterwards boiling it, much after the manner as we make ordinarily our beer of Malt. There are divers sorts of this Maiz, but that which is most commonly used for bread, is this already described. Their way of eating it, especially with the commoner sort of People, is most commonly boiled in the grain hot, which they do much after the manner that the People of China and Japan use in the boiling of their Rice, They have an earthen or some other sort of Vessel full of little holes at the bottom and round about the sides below, into which having put so much of the grains of Maiz as they think fit, and stopped it up; they set it into another vessel which they have full of water and already boiling on the fire; so as the water enters by little and little into the vessel where the Maiz is, through the little holes: with which the Maiz presently beginneth to swell, and after a little boiling so stops the holes of the vessel, that no more water can enter; and so boiling it on still, it comes at last from a pulp or soft moisty substance, to be more firm and hard, and such as they use for bread. And when they eat it single or alone as bread, they count this the best way of eating it, viz. in the grain hot: but otherwise dressing it, as they oftentimes do, with oil, butter, sugar, and divers sorts of Spice, they make many other pleasant and delicious meats of it. This, as I said, is the more common way of using it by the ordinary sort of people; but the rich and better sort grind the Maiz, as we do our wheat, and bake it, for the most part, into little cakes, which confectioned with sugar and spices, as they use, do make a very curious and dainty kind of meat. 3. This is their Maiz, or the Indian wheat, as they call it. They have another kind of bread at the West-Indies called Cassavi, made of a certain root which they call Jucca: it is a root of a large size and somewhat of a moist substance, the juice whereof is held to be a kind of poison, especially to some persons: for of others I read, that they have eat of the root green and full of juice, though not without danger, nor perhaps without costing some of them their lives, as namely the English at Port-rico under the Earl of Cumberland: but the root of it, when it is well dried, especially if they use so much art with it, as to grind it and work it into paste, is made into a very good sort of bread▪ yet more nourishing than toothsome. For the chief art which they use about it, is rather in the planting of the root than otherwise, of which the manner is thus. They raise a bed of earth in some lusty and good soil of about nine or ten foot square every way, in which, at an equal distance, they set ten or twelve slips, as I may call them, or little branches, which grow naturally out of the same root, each of them about a foot long, on every side of the bed commonly three, and laid so aslope within the ground, that the ends of them all do almost meet together in the middle of the bed: Out of these after a certain time there springs a set of new roots, which grow commonly to the bigness and length of a man's arm, and sometimes as big as a man's thigh; but this is only when they let them lie a long time in the ground, viz. a year, or year and half: but then likewise they are said to be best, and to make the most pleasant and agreeable bread. By that time they are come to maturity, the whole bed or plat of earth, on which they were planted, seems to to be all turned into roots. Then they take them out of the ground, and having scraped them a little on the outside, they slice or cut them into small pieces; which done, in a press made for that purpose, they strain and force out all the juice they can, just in the same manner as some Country folk strain crabs, and press their cheese when they make it: and having by that means brought their Jucca into the fashion of a broad cake, but somewhat thin, they lay it up for some time, till it be more throughly dried, and then use it for bread without more trouble. 'Tis said to have little or no taste at all in the eating (and that's probable enough, by the ordering of it) but as for virtue and nourishment, wondrous▪ good and wholesome; yet I remember Acosta, who had tasted of it, says plainly, he had rather eat a piece of the coursest and blackest bread he ever saw in his life. Neither do they eat it, but first moistened and steeped in some water or warm broth: the reason whereof is the excessive dryness of the bread, which is such that neither Wine, nor Milk, nor their Melasso, as they call it, which is the honey or sweet juice of the sugar canes will pierce it; and therefore it keeps long, and they carry it commonly to Sea instead of Biscuit. By Land it is chief used in the Barlovente Islands, which are Hispaniola, Cuba, Jamaica, etc. where there is not such plenty either of Wheat or Maiz; not through any defect or barrenness of the soil, but as it is rather thought, from some indisposition of the Air and Climate; which is such, that the very meal which they bring thither sometimes from New Spain and from the Canaries, contracts presently such a moistness, that they can hardly make any good bread of it; and that which they do make will not keep, but in a few days become moist and fluid again, and by consequence apt to corrupt; which is generally attributed to the overmuch humidity and heat of the Country. 4. There is yet a third sort of bread made at the Indies, which they call Chugno, and is made likewise of a certain small root called Popa. This bread is used chief upon the Andes, and some parts of the Sierra or Hill-Countrie, and generally in all the colder parts and Provinces of America, where the root groweth plentifully, and where, by reason of the cold, there is not so great plenty of Wheat or Maiz, nor yet perhaps of Cassavi or Jucca; which, how dry soever it be, when they have reduced it to bread, yet naturally is of a gross and juicy substance, luscious, or at least, not unpleasing to the taste, and requireth a warm and lusty soil. These Popas are a kind of smaller root, not unlike to the Bulbocastanum, or ground-Chesnut, with many leaves growing out upon them: which they only dry well in the Sun, and then grind them; making a kind of bread of them, which will keep long, and is probably of a good and strong nourishment; for it is much used at the Mines of Potozi, where the labour is hard. They eat these roots also dressed otherwise, both boiled and baked, and account them a very good meat. CHAP. VII. Of some choice and excellent Fruits, and Fruitbearing Trees at the West-Indies. 1. THey have likewise plenty of Rice and Millet growing in America; but because they use them not so generally for bread, and that they are not proper to the Country, but found as plentifully elsewhere, I shall pass them over, and come to speak of such Fruits, Fruitbearing trees, and others, as are peculiar to the New-world, and either not at all, or not so plentifully, or at least not of such perfection and excellency found any where else. 2. Amongst the Fruits, and trees that bear Fruit, at the New World, the Platano, or Plane tree, I suppose, for many respects may deserve the first place; not that it is the same tree which Pliny and the Ancients call the Plane, being neither so big (in any proportion) nor affording such a shade as the Roman Plane is said to do; but only for some resemblance which it beareth towards it, and especially in the largeness of its leaves, wherein the Plane at the Indies doth much exceed even that of the Ancients. It groweth commonly two stades, or twice the height of a Man, from the ground, in a moist and wet soil, which it necessarily requireth, by reason that it makes a great stock, as they say, in the ground, that is, it casteth a very large root every way round about its bulk or body: which itself is not much above the bigness of a man's: out of which root, on all sides their spring divers Scions or young Planes, round about the principal tree, every one apart by himself, and bearing fruit. The leaves of it are of a wonderful bigness, of an ell broad, as some say, and above an ell and half long, hanging down to the ground, and sufficient to cover an ordinary man of stature from head to foot. The Fruit is for the most part a span long, and of the thickness of a Man's wrist, somewhat bending in the middle, and groweth in clusters commonly upon one bough, but that one so well laden, that it is said to be no unusual thing to gather two or three hundred Apples off that one bough. The Apple or Fruit of the Plane is at first green: but as it comes to ripeness, it turns yellow both within and without, and becomes a most pleasant Fruit both for sight and taste; though many times they gather it green, and let it ripen in vessels made for that purpose; but it is best and sweetest, when it ripens upon the tree: The meat or substance of the Fruit within, when the rind is taken off, is tender, very delicious and well nourishing, inclining nevertheless rather to cold than heat. The tree beareth fruit all the year long (as they say, 'tis usual at the West-Indies for many or most Fruitbearing trees to do) and yet the same bough or stalk on which the fruit hangs, never beareth twice; but being cut away, another presently sprouteth in its room: so that there is a continual succession, as it were, of new sprigs, young boughs, green fruit and ripe, ever following one another upon the principal stock. They are said to have whole groves of this kind of tree in many parts of America, the fruit whereof yields no little profit and revenue to the owners; it being a fruit wherein the Indians do generally much delight, eating it commonly not only raw, but likewise roasted, boiled in pottage, baked, conserved, confectioned, and a hundred other ways, in all which it serveth very well. 3. The Coco is another excellent Fruit at the Indies. The tree which beareth it, is reckoned a kind of Palm tree, not properly, but by reason of some resemblance it hath in growth to the ordinary Palm. It grows much upon the Sea coast, upon a dry and sandy ground, yet always hot: and 'tis said then best of all to flourish, when 'tis planted near to a Village, or some houses, or by the way side, seeming, as it were to be delighted, and to thrive the better for the dust and dirt, which in such places it is beaten withal. The body of the tree is smooth and slender, being in no part bigger about than a man's middle, and growing still more and more slender towards the top: nor doth it ever shoot forth a bough, sprig, or leaf, but at the very top, which is usually of the height of thirty or forty foot at least; But there it brancheth out into many small boughs, in fashion not unlike to an Ostriches feather, thick set and not growing upward, but running out and spreading broad, as they grow, on all sides of the tree or stock. Uunderneath, and, as it were, in the shade and coverture of which boughs, the Cocos, or Coker-nuts, as they call them (which are the fruit of the tree) do grow in little clusters, sometimes three or four of them together, immediately out of the stem or stock of the tree, reaching according to the number and quantity of them that grow, about a yard or more downward from the boughs. Every Coco or Nut is commonly as big as a man's head, of the fashion of the lesser sort of Melons, and of so hard a shell, that if one of them should happen to light upon a man's head, falling from the tree (as commonly they do fall when they are ripe) considering the height of the tree, he would have no great need of a Surgeon. Nevertheless the Fruit itself is admirable and rare in many respects, and serves the Indians for a hundred uses both of necessity and delight. Outwardly it is fenced with a green rind or covering of a fibrous substance, full of many small strings or sinews, like threads; which therefore, when it is dry, they carded out into a kind of hards or course Tow, and make cordage of it, ropes for their canoas and ships, Match; but most commonly they use it for the stopping up of the ribs of ships, and in leaks; to which purpose it serveth excellently well, by reason that if it be never so little moistened, it presently swells, and by that means keeps out water better than any other stuff they can use. Next to this rind or outmost covering, which is commonly two fingers thick, there is a hard shell which contains in it a certain liquid substance, very delicious and pleasant, which while the fruit is green, is thin and clear like water, but as white as milk, which they therefore drink both for the daintiness of the taste, and to cool them in the heat; but when the fruit comes to be ripe, it grows more jelly and thick, and likewise more pleasant. The quantity of it is commonly a pint and half, or a quart, more or less according to the bigness of the Coco. Of this liquor, beside that they drink it immediately out of the fruit, as I have said, according to several ways which they use it, they make both Oil, Wine, Vinegar, and also milk of it; and serves reasonably well in all. The liquor itself drunk raw out of the fruit, is thought to be somewhat flatulent, and to breed crudities and other gross humours in the body, if it should be drunk overmuch: nevertheless it procures urine abundantly, and they say the Indians, who continually drink of it, are so little troubled with the stone or any other infirmities of the Reins, that they know not what they mean: and it yields such plenty of this liquor, that one tree of these Cocos, if it thrives well, is thought sufficient to supply a whole Family of no great number of persons, with Wine, Oil, and Milk of itself alone. For every month it shoots forth new boughs and new Cocos, and 'tis not counted a good tree that beareth not forty or fifty Cocos, at least, every month. In the midst of this liquor lieth the kernel of the Nut, or the principal meat of the Coco. This is a white and tender substance, in taste much like unto Almonds, taking up all the rest of the room in the Coco-shel, and containing likewise in it another sweet and delicate liquor, which is held to be both comfortable and cordial. They have likewise another way to extract Wine out of the Coco; which is to cut the rind and bark off the tree, but most especially off the boughs and fruit, while it is green, from which presently there issueth and drops a certain liquor no less pleasant than Wine, which they receive into vessels prepared for that purpose; which liquor they commonly also boil, and make of it a kind of Honey or Sugar, more esteemed than that which is common. 4. There is another kind of this Coco, which groweth most upon the Andes, in bigness not much less than the other; but instead of the fat oily substance in the middle of those of the first sort, these are filled with an huge number of small kernels or nuts, like to Almonds, or the grains of a Pomegranate admirably compacted and laid together. These kernels differ not much from Almonds in taste, and are a meat reasonably pleasant, so as the Confectioners use them commonly for Marchpains and other banqueting Stuff, instead of Almonds; although of that kind of fruit, viz. Almonds, they want not most excellent ones at the West-Indies, especially those of the Province of Chacopoyas in the Kingdom of Peru, which are said to be the most pleasing, delicate, and wholesome fruit in the World, of a more fat tender and delicous substance by far, than those of Castille, and for the most part much bigger. 5. Besides these, there is at the New World another tree called Coca, which though it beareth not any fruit that is much spoken of, yet by reason it hath some affinity of name with the Coco, and is likewise a tree not a little esteemed there, it requireth that we speak something of it. It is a tree that grows well only upon hot and moist grounds, and not much above a fathom high from the ground; yet requiring good care and skill to husband it. It is in estimation only for its broad leaf, which it casteth forth every fourth month new, to which leaf the Indians attribute I know not how many strange virtues and operations. This is certain and confirmed by daily experience, that it helpeth much against weariness of the body in any kind of labour or travel, that it reviveth and exhilarates a man's spirits, seeming to infuse new courage and strength into him; insomuch that the Indians will oftentimes go three or four days together about business with no other meat or victuals but a few leaves of this Coca champed in their mouths. For which reason 'tis counted one of the chiefest Commodities at Potozi, not only amongst the Miners themselves, but generally with all other People; and they travel far to get it, viz. as far as the Andes, on the skirts whereof it chief groweth. They gather it with a great deal of care; and the leaf being very broad, they have great Baskets or Hampers made on purpose, into which they put it, and so lad their Mules or Pacos with it, and away for Potozi, where it is present Merchandise. They sell it for the most part at three or four pesoes a Basket, and vend commonly one year with another four-score or a hundred thousand Basket sthere. 6. Another admirable tree there is at the Indies, called the Magney or Mete-tree; of which they report wonders, as namely that it yields them both Water, Wine, Oil, Vinegar, Thread, Needles, and I know not how many other necessary things beside; not altogether untruly. The tree, according to the description which Acosta gives of it, is of a big body, and groweth commonly in the open fields, being of a moist and tender substance, hollow in the midst: which therefore, when it is green, they use to cut; and at the places where they make incision, there issueth a certain liquor fresh and sweet, which they commonly drink raw, as it issueth from the tree, gathering it in vessels of gourds, Coco-shels, and others which they set there on purpose to receive it. This liquor, according as they seethe or boil it more or less, becomes a Wine of a pleasant good taste, or Honey, or Sirup, or Vinegar, every one in their kind good and wholesome. It beareth a large broad leaf, or rather, as some say, divers kinds of leaves; of which, while they are tender, they make rare and curious conserveses; but when they are grown out to their full bigness, being of a gross fibrous substance, they draw out of it a kind of thread like unto Hemp or Flax, which they afterwards spin and work into Mantles, Mats, Shoes, Girdles and many other necessary things, and of the rest make a sort of course Paper: and of the point of the leaf, which is both hard and also very sharp, they make Needles, that is, such instruments to sow withal as they had and used before the Spaniards came among them. The bark of the tree is both fat and very unctuous; so that, being roasted they make a salve of it, as 'tis said, very good for hurts, bruises and old sores; and from the boughs they gather a certain gum, which they likewise report to be a sovereign Antidote against poisons. The trees grow generally in all parts of the West-Indies, but chief in the Country of Mexico and New Spain; where there is scarce an Indian to be found worth the house that he dwells in, but will be careful to have some of these trees planted and growing about it, for the many necessary supplies which it affordeth towards the maintenance of a house and family. 7. And in the Country of New Spain there likewise groweth another famous tree, called the Tuna or tunal tree. It is originally from the root, nothing but a heap, as it were, of great broad leaves growing one out of another, as well from the ground as upwards; the leaves long and large, not sharp or pointed, but round at the ends, and of the thickness of a man's thumb or finger: in which manner growing, it possesseth in time a good large space of ground, and likewise grows upward into the fashion and height of some ordinary tree. It's manner of growing is only by new leaves sprouting out at the ends of the old, and the old ones still waxing bigger and bigger; so that at last it seemeth to have got a body and boughs, which is yet nothing else but the roots of the bigest and eldest leaves, now at length come to be hardened into a stock or trunk; the leaves themselves being commonly thick set with certain long and sharp prickles, of a whitish colour. There are two sorts of them, the wild, and the garden or planted tunal; both of which bear a fruit, but very different one from the other, both for taste and use. The garden or planted tunal, bears a fruit well esteemed with the Indians for meat, being somewhat bigger than ordinary plums, and having many little grains lying in the pulp or substance of it, like figs, of a white colour, good taste, and no less pleasant than figs; and beside that, of a delicate sent or smell. The fruit of the wild tunal is green, growing (as also the other doth) out of the very top of the leaf, in the fashion of a fig, narrow below or towards the leaf, but upwards growing broad and round, and on the top environed with a set of thick leaves in fashion of a Crown or Coronet. The pulp of it, or substance within, is juicy and red, but neither pleasing, nor any way commended for the taste, as I observe: in stains the hands of any that touch it with a deep red or sanguine colour, like Mulberries; and which is more than that, the urine of those that eat of it, will seem as if it were all turned into blood; insomuch that some have been much frighted at their first eating thereof, and taken themselves for dead men, finding their urine to be so strangely changed, and not knowing the quality of the fruit. Within the Coronet, or circle of leaves, which grow upon the top of the fruit, there are many little grains contained, which are the seed of the tunal, and out of which, if they set them, there springs forth a Plant of the same kind, round-bodied and not unlike to the trunk of other trees, when they first spring out of the ground, which presently spreads itself into leaves growing one out of another successively, as the first did. This kind of tunal, as we said, is not so much regarded for its fruit, but for another commodity which comes of it, of far greater profit and advantage than the fruit could be▪ were it much better than it is; viz. for the grain, called Cochinele, so famous and so much used by the Dyers for the dying of perfect Scarlets, or colours in grain, which is made of this tree in manner as followeth. Upon the leaves of the wild tunal there groweth usually out certain tuberous or fungous excrescencies, which, in time, turn into a kind of Insect, or Worm, and multiplieth so much, that at last all the leaves of the tree, which, as it was said, are very large, and as thick ordinarily as the thumb or finger of a man's hand, seem to be turned into a web of Worms, hanging and interwoven together by the fibrae, or little sinews of the leaves. These webs or verminated folios of the tunal, the Indians husband with a great deal of care and industry, both while they are a breeding and afterwards, till they be well dried; at which time making them up into boxes or little casks, they send them into Spain, and other parts of the World, as a great and rich Merchandise; which doubtless they are. For 'tis said, they send commonly, one year with another, betwixt five and six thousand Arrobes of Cochinele only into Spain (every Arrobe containing five and twenty pound weight at least) which, according to the usual rate they are sold at, amounts to two hundred eighty three thousand, seven hundred and fifty Pesoes by account. 8. Nor may I quite forget the Hov●, or Hohi, as some call it; for though it be not a tree that beareth any excellent fruit (for the fruit it beareth is only a small yellow Plum, of the bigness of a Damosin, and of little substance or meat, by reason of the greatness of the stone) yet because it gives such a propicious and healthy shade, as they say it doth, so as both Indians and Spaniards seek it out on purpose to rest and sleep under it, it deserves, at least, that I should say what manner of tree it and where it grows. It is of bulk a fair and big tree, the boughs growing▪ chief towards the top, thick and spreading; by reason whereof, as I said, it yields as cool a shade as most trees at the West-Indies do; the bark or rind whereof, being of a more tender and oily substance, they boil, and make a lavatory or bath of it, exceeding good and wholesome, especially for the legs, in case of any extraordinary weakness or weariness, from what cause soever proceeding. It groweth chief upon the Strait of Darien, but generally in all parts of Castilia del oro, and not much elsewhere, and, as they say, hath always a good air about it. If it be so, it seems given by God, as a remedy and relief unto the poor people of those hot Countries, who use much to lie abroad and sleep in the fields, against the inconveniences, which otherwise they might be subject unto, by means of another tree, which (as Oviedo affirms, but nameth not) grows much in the same parts, of such a pestilent and contagious quality, that if a man rest never so little under it, he shall be sure presently to feel some indisposition in himself; and if he stays or ventures to sleep under it, his head and face will swell, and his eyelids in a short time be closed up: yet is the tree, to look upon, fair and goodly, of a green flourishing colour, well branched and adorned with boughs and thick leaves on all sides, and the fruit itself so pleasing both to the eye and taste, that scarce any man, especially that is a stranger, but would be induced to taste of it; which yet no man can do without danger, it being of such a noxious quality, that of it, together with some other ingredients the Indians of old time were wont to make the poison, wherewith they invenomed their arrows, so mischievously, that 'tis said, scarce one man in forty that happened to be wounded by them, escaped death. This tree groweth much upon the gulf of Vraba, which lieth upon the Country of Darien abovesaid; and mine Author thinks, that if the unhappy fruit which deceived our first parents in Paradise, be to be found on earth, 'tis as likely to be this, as any other he knows. CHAP. VIII. Of Cacao, and the famous drink called Chocolatte, of Atolle, and other drinks used at the West-Indies. 1. I Should commit a great oversight, if in treating of the Commodities and Rarities of the New-World, I should forget the Cacao; which, though it be but a small fruit, ordinarily not bigger than an Almond, and hardly of so good a taste; yet because it is so proper to the Country, so plentifully there growing, and likewise so much esteemed and used as it is, almost in all kind of bartery and traffic, I must not altogether omit it. It is a fruit, which with the Americans is almost every thing; it is both meat, drink, and money. It grows upon a small tree of the bigness and fashion of that of the Pomecitron, thriving best upon hot ground, yet in such places where it is well shadowed from the Sun. There be several kinds of them; and by the description which Hernandez, or rather Antonius Recchius, makes of the Cacao, in his general History of American Plants, printed at Rome 1651. it seems that Herrera, Acosta, and others are not so exact in their report of this fruit, who generally describe it as a fruit somewhat less than an Almond, whereas Hernandez, a Doctor of Physic, and one who lived many years in those parts, by command of the King of Spain, on purpose to observe the Natures of such Plants and Physical rarities as America afforded, makes some kinds of Cacao to be as big as a good melon or Pompey, and none less than the greatest sort of Apples. To reconcile them I suppose we must say, that what Acosta, Herrera, and others call the Cacao, is but the kernel of that Cacao which Hernandez describeth; and that there grow many of these lesser Cacaos together, in one common husk, rind, or shell: which Hernandez likewise intimates when he says the Cacao contains within it divers small parts close compacted together, and afterwards calls that the seed, or kernel, of Cacao, which the Americans use instead of money, and whereof they make drink, which is the very Cacao that Acosta and others only mention, without taking notice of any other. It is a fruit of a tender and fat substance, of good nourishment, especially roasted, boiled, or any other way dressed: raw, or eaten out of the fruit only, it causeth, as some say, oppilations and obstructions of the stomach. Yet the Indian women love it extremely, and think themselves never well but when they are sucking the skin or film of it, which is commonly a white juicy substance, but sometimes red or Murrey, which they find to be very cooling to them in those hotter Climates, and have an opinion also that it makes them fair. It is a fruit that lasteth long, and impaireth not much by age; in respect whereof, and that it is so generally esteemed there, the Indians commonly use it instead of money, as hath been said, buying, or having in exchange for Cacao almost every thing in the Market. But the chief reason of its so general esteem and use at the West-Indies is, a certain drink they make of it, called Chocolatte; which, because it is a liquor that the Americans extremely love, and that it gins likewise to be cried up in some parts of Europe for an excellent drink (though all men give not the same report of it) I shall relate, as briefly as I can, how they make it, from the report of a late traveller in those parts. 2. They take a certain quantity of Cacao nuts or almonds, as we call them; which, having well dried, they pound them with some cod of Chili, or long red Pepper of America, a handful of Aniseed, some quantity of Cinnamon, Cloves, and likewise of white Sugar, till they have brought them all into a soft powder, or paste, which they put up into boxes or tablets of what quantity and bigness they please, laying it first upon paper within the box, from which, upon occasion, the powder or paste will easily separate; but to any thing that is of earth or wood it sticks fast. They put to it likewise certain grains of Achiotte, which is another fruit of the West-Indies, growing much after the manner of Cacao, viz. many grains of it together in one husk or cod, all of them red. This is only to give the Cacao a good colour; and the Achiotte is commonly pounded by itself, and sold in boxes, or little round cakes, yet so fine and dry, that it will easily mix and incorporate itself with the Cacao, to give it tincture. The better sort, and they that mean to make the Chocolatte rich and very pleasing, add many other ingredients; but these already mentioned are the most commonly used; and the Cacao thus made up, they sell usually at four shillings a pound. This is Chocolatte, or the confectioned Cacao. And as there is difference in the composition of it, so likewise they drink it divers ways. The richest is that which is used by the Gallants and Ladies at Mexico, viz. to drink hot with Atolle, after this manner. They dissolve a box or tablet of Cacao in some little quantity of pure hot water, standing on the fire; and having first with a Molinet, or some other instrument, stirred it up, and well mixed the Cacao and water together, they put so much of Atolle into it, as fills up the Cup or vessel, and so drink it by suppings very hot. This Atolle is itself a rich and delicious liquor, of which I shall speak by and by. But the most usual way of drinking it is, to dissolve a box or Tablet of Cacao in hot water, and having well sweetened it with Sugar, to drink it without more ado, only with some conserveses, or Naples-biscuit, either dry or steeped in the Chocolatte, as every one please. Sometimes also they dissolve it in cold water, and stir it continually with a Molinet, till it rise to a scum, or froth, which they take off, and put into some other vessel or cup, and make the other hot; which when they have likewise sweetened with Sugar, they pour out into the vessel, where the scum or froth is that was first taken off, and so drink them both together. But this way is not held to be so good, as causing obsructions and windiness in the stomach: whereas the effects of Chocolatte well tempered and moderately taken, are said to be, that it fortifyeth and comforts the stomach; which at the West-Indies, in many persons, is frequently subject to a Cachexia, or fainting some hours after meal, whether it be from any peculiar indisposition of the Air or Climate, or from some natural weakness and insolidity in the food or diet of the Country; which though it be for the most part luscious toothsome and pleasing in the palate, in what kind soever it be, whether of flesh, fish or fruits, yet is it not held to be of so strong and solid nutriment, as the diet of Europe generally is. It is said likewise to revive and exhilerate the spirits very much, to help concoction, to make lusty and corpulent, and may be well taken three times a day, in the morning, a little before dinner, and some three or four hours after, but very moderately, and never exceeding one reasonable draught at a time: and a if man hath occasion to watch, or sit up late, it will help him very much to take one cup of it more about eight or nine a clock at night. 3. Now as for Atolle, of which I spoke even now, it is a drink of itself very delicious, made of the juice of the young Maiz, or Indian Wheat, much like unto Almond milk, but somewhat thicker, and so confectioned with Sugar, Spices, Musk and other ingredients of the Country, that it is not only of Admirable sweetness, both for the taste and smell, but much more nutritive and comfortable to the stomach; and would doubtless be accounted a rare dtink in Europe, if it would endure the Sea, or could be transported thence, but that it will not: whereas Chocolatte, or Cacao, made up in boxes, as we said, is sent abroad into Spain, Flanders, Italy, and many other parts of the World. The Commoner sort of Indians have another kind of drink, which they call Chica, a hellish slap, and such, as if it had but some good quantity of Hen-bane added to the Toad, which they commonly put into it, and steep him there till he be dead and quite consumed, would be a draught fit for the Devil than a Christian. They take a great Jarre or vessel of the sort of those which usually they have from Spain, and put in some certain quantity of water, filling up the rest with Melassos', or the juice of Sugar Canes, and sometimes a little Honey: And beside these, to give it a strength agreeable to their Palates that drink it, they put in good store of the roots and leaves of Tobacco, and of several other roots of the Country, of strong and violent operation, adding to all, the biggest and blackest toad they can find: and having so done, they close up the Jarre, and let it stand for the space of three weeks or a month, till all the ingredients be throughly steeped and consumed; after which, they drink it. And though, for the most part, at the first opening of the Jarre, it gives a scent that a stranger hath much ado to endure, yet the Indians love it and drink it excessively, having many great meetings only to drink Chica; and most commonly they carouse so long at it, that they are all of them not only drunk, which is usual with them, but even raging mad with it; insomuch that the Spanish Officers and Magistrates among them labour what they can to prohibit such meetings, but all in vain; custom and the natural inclination of the Americans to drink and swill very much, hitherto prevailing against their endeavours. I am not ignorant that some Authors give a better character of a certain drink at the West-Indies, under the name of Chica; nor can I say which of them it is, that hath mistaken the name: This I am sure, the Author whom I follow, pretends to be an eye witness, and to have seen with his eyes that which he reports of the thing itself, viz. the quality of the drink, and manner of drinking it by the Indians: which in truth seems to me to be but a relic of their old barbarity and savageness; and therefore I shall speak no more of it. CHAP. IX. Of the abundance of at the West-Indies; and of several sorts of Beasts and other Creatures, both of Land and Water proper to the New World. 1. I Must for brevity's sake, and to comply with the intentions of my friend, who calls for these imperfect Notes with some importunity, pass by many particular things, otherwise not unworthy to be known, in the rank of Trees, Plants, and Fruits; and only refer the reader, desirous of further satisfaction herein, to the elaborate and choice History of American Plants and rarities, above mentioned, written by Franciscus Hernandez, a Spanish Doctor of Physic, augmented and accurately commented upon by Nardus Antonius Recchus and Italian, Joannes Terrentius, and others: proceeding myself to give some brief account concerning the , and such other Beasts of America, as may seem most worthy of our knowledge. We have said before, that the of Europe, which have been transported thither, have thriven abundantly, and multiplied into such incredible numbers, as well Kine or great Cattle, as those of the lesser sort, viz. Sheep, Hogs, Goats, etc. that Swine, and also great in the Islands, especially of Hispaniola, and in many parts of the Continent beside, live wild in herds upon the Mountains, and may be killed by any body that will take the pains to do it. Yea, they say that the very dogs which the Spaniards carried over, and which did them not a little service, when time was, against the naked Indians, have multiplied so exceedingly, that they go also in companies, like other wild Beasts, up and down the Country, and are one of the greatest inconveniencies to which the Country of America is subject, for the mischief that they do to their Sheep and other small , being become almost as ravenous and bad as so many Wolves, and seem to be little less than metamorphized into Wolves, by their wild and mountainous breeding, and by reason of a strange fierceness which they have contracted by such breeding and living. So as the Spaniards that brought them thither, are forced to keep guard, and to maintain, as it were, a defensive war against their own Creatures. Nevertheless in the most inland Countries of America, where the Spaniards live and many hundreds of leagues from the Sea, or any part of the Islands, there is so great plenty of flesh-meat, that for a Ryall of plate, which is but six pence English money, a man may buy thirteen or fourteen pound weight of the best Beef, Mutton, or Pork, in the Market, of an Obligado (as they call him) or some of his Deputies, who are men appointed and bound, as we said before, to serve such a City, Town, or Place, with flesh meat, at a certain rate, all the year long. So that omitting to speak any thing more concerning foreign or European at the West-Indies, I shall speak only, and that very briefly, of such , and other Creatures, as are more proper to the New World, seem either most worthy, or most necessary to be known by us; beginning first with those of the Land. 2. And among the Land Creatures of America, I suppose the Pacos, or Peruvian Sheep, as they commonly count and call them, may by right come in the first place, being the most profitable of the Country, I had almost said, of the World, affording the Indians both meat, clothing, and service. It is a Beast of a reasonable good stature, bigger than a Calf, and somewhat less than a Bullock of two year old, and bears a burden, for the most part, of 150 pound weight, without the charge either of saddle or shooing, as both Horse and Mules require, feeding only upon such meat as they find upon the road; and in case they find none, travelling some days without either meat or water. There are two sorts of these Pacos; one that bears a good fleece of wool; the other smooth and bare, yet somewhat the stronger of the two for burden. They have long necks like a Camel, and are of divers colours, white, black, grey, and spotted. Their flesh is likewise very good meat, especially while they are young, and of their young ones, which is said to be the tenderest and most delicate that can be eaten, though they kill not many of them by reason of their necessary service, and so great plenty of other meat. But of their wool they make several sorts of cloth; one more gross and common: the other very fine, which they call Cumbi; and serveth for Carpets, Cover, and many other uses, lasting long, and having, a good lustre, and (which is somewhat more curious) woven on both sides alike, without difference. They drive these Pacos in troops, sometimes four or five hundred of them together, or more, laden with Merchandise, Wine, Maiz, Coca, Quicksilver, and Silver in Barrs, which they carry from the Mines of Potozi, as far as Ariqua, upon the South-Sea, which is about threescore or seventy leagues, without any other Convoy or Guide, but only of a few Indians to drive the Sheep, and some Spaniards to oversee the Indians. They endure frost and cold naturally, as having been bred, and thriving best upon the Sierra and Andes of Peru; where they are seen many times covered with ice and snow, yet never shrinking at it; whereas in the Planes and hot Country they die. They are in truth a very serviceable and good Creature, yet not without some odd qualities, which the Reader, must know, especially that sort of them which are smooth and bear no fleece. If they meet a stranger by the way, they will many times suddenly stand still, and raising up their long necks as high as they can, stare and gaze upon him so wistly, as will make a man laugh not a little to see it, and with such a confidence as if he feared nothing; yet all on the sudden a fright takes him, and away he runs with his load upon his back, and commonly so fast that his driver is hardly able to recover him before he hath gained some high rock or Mountain, where the Indian either cannot or dare not follow him for the precipice; and from hence nothing will command him but a Harquebuz, which they are oftentimes forced to use, only to get the Silver again, that is upon his back. They have likewise another quality not a little troublesome; which is to grow resty, and lie down under their burdens: though this be but seldom, and, as they say, never but when they are laden or driven beyond ordinary. But if the fit once take him, there is no other remedy but to have patience to sit down by him, make on him, and let him take his own time to rise; which, after a while, he will do of himself: but to stir or strive with him before, is to no purpose; for though you beat him never so much, or kill him, or cut him in a thousand pieces, all will not make him move a foot: but by bearing him company, and treating him fairly, after two or three hours' rest he will rise and go on his journey as willingly as can be. They are commonly estimated at five or six pieces of Assay, which may be about forty shillings English money; and at the Indies he that hath but four or five of these Pacos to travel withal & carry Merchandise from place to place, will not count himself a poor man. 3. The Vicugnes are a kind of wild Goats, but much bigger than the ordinary Goats of Europe, and without horns, otherwise coated and haired like Goats. They live wild on the mountainous parts of Peru and Chile, being in other parts not so common; and for the most part upon the tops of those highest mountains the Andes, nothing offended with the sharpness of the cold or snow. They go commonly in herds or great companies together, being exceeding fearful Creatures, and withal very light of foot. Anciently the hunting of them was forbidden to the common People, and reserved only to the Inguas and Lords of Peru: now 'tis generally used, whensoever they are found in the lowlands. They are of a dark brown colour, not much unlike to dried Roses, & bear a fleece of a long shaggy hair, yet so fine that the Indians make rugs and cover of it, of great value. Their flesh is counted the most dainty sort of Venison, and in some cases medicinal: yea the Indians have an opinion that the very Quilts and Cover made of the wool or hair of the Vicugnes, are good against the inflammation of the reins, and for the tempering of all excessive heat; nor is it improbable. For considering what kind of Pasturage this beast doth naturally delight in, and for the most part live by, which is more than half frost and snow, it may well be thought, that not only their flesh, but every thing else that proceeds naturally of their substance, should in some degree be refrigerative, and retain some cooling virtue in it. Of the flesh there is no dispute to be made, but that it is very sovereign and good in all such cases, viz. of inflammations and immoderate heat. Acosta gives a notable instance of it in himself; who having traveled so long upon the Andes and those cold mountains of Peru, that his eyes were inflamed with the excessive sharpness of the Air, and become so painful to him, that they seemed ready to drop out of his head, only by rubbing them lightly with a piece of the raw flesh of the Vicugne, the pain was presently assuaged, and his eyes in short time reduced to good temper. Nor is this the only good they have by this Beast; for out of his stomach, when he is killed, they take likewise the Bezoar stone, true and good, and scarce any way inferior to that of the East-Indies; which, as 'tis well known, is a stone of rare virtue, especially in way of Antidote against any sorts of poison, in all pestilential Diseases, and likewise the infirmities of deep Melancholy. They find it commonly of the bigness of a walnut; sometimes of an Hen's egg, or an Orange; but these are rare. 4. There is also at the West-Indies another Beast, which they call Tarugne, not much unlike to the Vicugne; but bigger of body, and likewise of a swifter pace. These live not in companies, as the Vicugnes do, but solitary and single, and carry their ears hanging down, whereas those of the Vicugne are erect and stand up: in other respects they much resemble the Vicugne, yielding likewise the Bezoar stone, as the Vicugne doth; and which, though it be not altogether so big, yet is thought to be much better in virtue and operation than the other. There are Bezoar stones likewise taken very often out of the Pacos; but those are less, not ordinarily above the bigness of an hazel nut, or filbert; and whether so perfect and true in kind, or no, as the other, I cannot say. The Taurus Mexicanus, as some Authors call him, and we must English, the American Bull, or Steer, is another strange Beast at the West-Indies; strange I call them in respect of ourselves, and these parts of the World; for otherwise they are no way strange, being common at America, especially in the more Northern parts of it, and of no very monstrous or deformed shape. They resemble the Ox of Europe only a little in the head, and not otherwise; being not only of a far less size than the ordinary Ox or Bullock, but also of a stature somewhat with the lowest, even in proportion to their own bulk; having a good big full body, of the size of some lesser sort of Cows, but very short legs to bear it; yet we may well count them the natural and proper Kine of America. They are of a bright brown colour, or if you please, of a dark yellow, such as the Italians call il colore lionato, having a thick long hair curled all over their body, which at a distance makes them appear somewhat terrible and horrid, but coming nearer them, their countenance seems rather cheerful and pleasing; neither have they any truculency or fierceness of condition, but are as tractable and easily maniable as other . On their backs they have a little rising or bunch, like a Camel, though I do not observe that they are any where used for burden, like the Camel. They breed and abound most in the Province of Quivira, which is a plain level Country in the Northern part of America, affording little else but pasturage; and from hence they are had into other parts, being the chief wealth of this Country, and subsistence of the People; who chief live upon this , feeding huge multitudes of them in Herds up and down the Country, as their pasture leads them, using their flesh for meat, which is very good, and making a drink of their blood. 5. Yet is their another sort of small reckoned for Kine at the West-Indies, which they call Dantes, but in their figure and shape more resembling Mules than Kine; neither have they any horns. The hides of these Beasts are much used by the Indians for Jerkins, or a kind of upper Garment, which is as good as some Armour for them, it being so thick and hard, as it is said to resist any weapon that the Indians use: like to the Armadillos (as the Spaniards call them) which are likewise another kind of Beasts proper to the New World, much lesser than the Dantes, yet covered all over the body, as it were, with a Coat of Mail, that is, with a scaly hard skin, which she opens and shuts at pleasure, and thereby both covers and defends herself upon occasion. The flesh of this Beast is eaten by some, but not so generally commended for good meat. The Saynos are a kind of Hog or Swine of America, a wild and fierce Creature, and in this respect somewhat more strange, that their Navel is said to be on the midst of their back. They are armed likewise on their feet with talons, so sharp that a Razor will not pierce faster or further than they, and with them they do usually tear and wound such as pursue them, very dangerously, especially if they have not good care and skill in hunting them. The flesh of them, when they are taken, is counted good meat; but to keep it, the Navel in the back of it must be taken quickly out, otherwise it will putrify in a few days. The Chincelles are a kind of Squirrel, of a wonderful soft and smooth hair, the skin whereof is thought to be very comfortable to the stomach in any sudden pain or fainting, and affordeth a delicate kind of Fur, much used and esteemed by the better sort. The Viscachas and Cuyos are the Hares and Coneys of America, of much bigger size than these of Europe, and are hunted there likewise for sport, as here, and their flesh counted not the worst sort of Venison. The Micos, or Monkeys of America, are many and of several kinds; some whereof are said not to be much less than the body of a little man, and also bearded under their chaps as venerably as any Goat. They describe a certain kind of them in Peru with long tails, and commonly of thrice the bigness of an ordinary Ape, of divers colours, viz. black, grey, bay, and spotted; and report many pretty stories of them; which, if true, argue them to be extremely ingenious, and to have, at least, some traites de visage, as they say, or resemblances of reason. This is common with them; when they have mind to any fruit upon a tree, they get presently up, and winding their tail about the bough, with the weight of their body shake as much fruit off it as they think fit. Of another it is said, that seeing a Soldier level at him with his Musket, he snatched up a stone, and before the Musket could be discharged, threw it at him and hit him full in the eye. Acosta tells of another, which they commonly sent to the Tavern for wine, the pot in one hand and money in the other; which errand he would perform most exactly, and with such discretion, that they must be very rude with him, that should get the money out of the one hand, before his pot were filled and put into the other. The Boys in the street would throw stones at him many times in sport, and he at them again, but never till he had first set down his pot; then he would lay about him with any thing next hand; nor would he offer to take up his pot again, till they seemed to be quiet, and that his way was clear: and if they gave it him, he would drink wine freely; but otherwise not so much as touch it. There be also Lions, Bears, Tigers, and other wild Beasts of prey at the West-Indies, but neither so great, nor so ravenous as those in other parts of the World. The Lions in America are rather grey than red or yellow, and have not that long shaggy hair on the foreparts of their body, with which they are painted. The Tigers are more fierce and cruel; but that is only when they are hungry, and seek their prey: for otherwise, viz. when their bellies are full, if the report of Maffaeus be true in his historia Indica, they are as fluggish and heavy a Beast as any, and may be both taken and killed by any body almost that will: But by his favour I will not be the first that shall make trial. There is likewise abundance of Staggs and wild Deer in all parts of the Continent of America; but, for aught I know, in the Islands there are none found. 6. These are all Beasts and Creatures of the Land, with which, and infinite others, not here to be mentioned, the New World is abundantly stored: Nor do the Waters afford less variety, either of Sea, or more within Land, viz. in the Lakes and Rivers, which are generally so plentifully and well stored with good fish, that there is no Country in the World comparable to America in that respect. Amongst these the Cayman, as they call him, or Indian Crocodile, as the most prodigious and strange, deserves to be first mentioned: yet is he an amphibious Creature, living as well, and perhaps as much upon Land as in the water. It is a most fierce and ravenous Creature, of a vast bulk or bigness, being said to be from the fore part of his snout to the end of his tail seven or eight yards long; and of such strength, that he hath been seen to take up a living man, lying asleep upon the shore, in his mouth, and to carry him clear away with him into the water, over to another Island or Rock in the Sea, where he meant to have devoured him: But being shot with a Caliver he lost his prey, and the man was recovered, but died soon after. He seeks his prey commonly upon Land, which he kills or drowns in the Water: yet cannot there eat it, by reason of some peculiar disposition of his throat or gullet, which is such, as that it permits him not to swallow any thing in the water, but with hazard to suffocate or drown himself. The best is, his motion by Land is but slow, and his body so unwieldy, that he cannot turn himself but with much ado, nor his head to either side without turning his whole body. Yet do they much mischief, especially about some Rivers in the Provinces of Mechoacan and Tlascalla, where there are many of them. They say 'tis excellent sport to see a Cayman and a Tiger fight, as they happen to do oftentimes, endeavouring to pray one upon another. The Cayman, with his tail, cruelly beats and jerks the Tiger, endeavouring what he can to hale him into the water. The Tiger as stoutly resists him with his paw, and labours to pull up the Cayman to land; which for the most part he doth, and then opens him by the belly, which is the only part of him where he can be pierced; his whole body otherwise being armed with scales so extremely hard and thick set, that no Lance, and scarcely an Harquebuz or Musket shot will enter it. The Indians fear him not so much by water as land: for being themselves excellent Swimmers and Dyvers, and the Cayman always swimming above water, or very fleet, they make no great matter to encounter him hand to hand in his own element for they easily get under his belly, and with their knives or short Lances pierce him there as they list, and so bring him to Land. 7. The Tyburons are a kind of Sharkfish, of large size, and extremely ravenous. They are commonly ten or twelve foot long, and about six or seven spans broad on the back, being fashioned like a Sole, with huge wide mouths, and two rows of teeth on each side of their mouth very sharp and thick set, and of so great strength, that at one snatch or jerk, they will break the bones or pluck asunder the joints of any Beast whatsoever: They follow the ships at Sea willingly, for the wash and other stuff which the Mariners cast out to them, being so ravenous that they receive everything. Acosta reporteth, that out of the gullet of one of them, he saw taken at the same time a great Butcher's knife, a long iron hook, and a piece of a Cow's head, with one horn still growing upon it. Others tell of Hats, whole Shirts, Legs and Arms of Men, ropes ends, with many other things of like nature found in the same manner. Yet is the flesh of them counted very good meat, when they are well dried, and a principal relief in many occasions at Sea; where they are taken without much difficulty, and so big, that many times ten or twelve men have somewhat to do to pull one of them up, when they have him upon the hook. They come likewise out of the Sea up into the rivers, as the Caymans' do, and are exceeding dangerous both to men and cattles, that are not ware of them, or happen to lie or sleep upon the banks of any great river, as in America it is not unusual to do. At Sea they are commonly attended by a smaller sort of fish which they call Rambos, which lives by the meat that falls from the Tyburon, as the Jaccall is said to do by the Lion. 8. The Manatis, or Oxe-fish, as some call them, is another great fish of the Sea, bigger by fare than the Tyburon, headed like an Ox or young heifer, with two arms, or at least stumps of arms on each side before, and those as some say, distinguished into several joints with nails upon them, not unlike to those of a man's hand. This is a gentle and harmless creature, and though of bulk or body not less than a young Ox or Bullock, yet neither of any fierce or horrid aspect, but rather amiable and clearer countenanced, as the figure of it in Hernandez, and Laet showeth. It cometh frequently upon land, and feeds upon herbs or grass, if there be any near; and being at Sea it swimes commonly above water and is easily taken. 'Tis counted for meat the best fish in the World, being as tender and delicate as any veal, or the best young pork; and so like it, that a stranger would verily take it for veal, which it resembles so much every way, both for colour and taste, that it hath been disputed and questioned by some whither it might be eaten on fasting days; for that it both eateth herbs and grass, resembles flesh so much, and beareth its young alive, suckling them with milk by certain teats which they have, as other Land creatures do. They find in the head of it a certain Stone, or hard congelated Substance, which being ground to powder, they say is very good for the stone in the reins, and to provoke urine, especially that which is found in the male-fish. 9 The Tortoise is a Fish yet greater than any of these before spoken of, viz. than the Tyburon or the Manatis, and upon the Shores of the West Indies, every where, there are great multitudes of them found. These are a Shellfish of figure and shape round, carrying their house or cover, always upon their back, and by consequence moving but slowly. They take them sometimes at Sea with Nets made for that purpose only, but most commonly on the Shore, whither they frequently resort in huge multitudes, chiefly to lay their eggs, which in the sand are hatched with incredible increase, only by the heat of the Sun: and though they make all the haste they can to Sea again, assoon as ever they perceive any body, yet they are easily overtaken, and by turning them with a staff or pole, upon their backs, which is not hard for them to do that are acquainted with the manner of hunting Tortoises; two or three men will stay and take a whole company of them. They are commonly a yard and a quarter at least in length, and sometime more than twice so much in breadth, and of such bigness & weight, that it will ordinarily require six or seven stout men to draw one of them out of the water; and scarce any found so little, but it will load two or three men to carry it handsomely away when it is cut in pieces. The flesh of them is very excellent good meat, when it is well powdered, and of no less pleasant taste. Every Tortoise layeth commonly two or three hundred eggs at a time, as big as Hen's eggs, but round like a ball: good likewise to eat, and have this property, that whither boiled or roasted, the white of them is always soft. When the young ones are hatched, they naturally make to Sea, never expecting that the old one should come to feed them. To this the Tide helps them very much, and there they live and thrive so well, that, as they say, some one of them hath been found of that bigness and weight, that 20. men had much ado to lift it from the ground. 10. There is, besides these, infinite variety of other kinds of fish in the Indian or American Seas; as the Iguana, which is a kind of water-Serpent, of somewhat a terrible and ugly form, but otherwise not at all hurtful; of the bigness commonly of an Otter or Fox, the skin spotted and smooth, and the flesh neither unwholesome nor unpleasant meat. And the Bobo, which is a gallant fish as any belong to the Seas, of the length of a man's arm, having one only bone or gristly substance running through the midst of it from end to end: it is of a most tender and delicate substance, white as milk, and as fat as butter; excellent meat which way soever dressed, boiled, baked, stewed, roasted, or otherwise: And beside these many others, which I must necessarily pass over in silence; as likewise I might well do these that follow, viz. the Niguas (as the Spaniards call them) or West-Indian Nits; and the Broma, or water-worme, two little Infects indeed, and hardly to be numbered in the rank of perfect Creatures, yet such as make themselves considerable enough to be named, only by their troublesomeness; the one to Men at Land, the other to the ships at Seas. The Niguas are so small a kind of vermin, that they can hardly be perceived single, nothing near so big as a Flea, which lodge themselves insensibly and unperceived at first, under the nails of men's fingers and toes, and in other private parts of the body, and multiply in a short time so strangely, that they turn the party to extreme pain and torture, and not seldom cause him to lose a joint either of his hands or feet: Nor is it easy to prevent their breeding, without continual brushing of and a great care to keep all things about a man, as much as can be, clean and dry. When they are perceived to be bred, the best remedy is counted to be, to pour melted wax upon the place where they are nestled; which, though it scalds and be troublesome for the time, yet when it is cold, it brings away a shoal of that little vermin with it, sometimes four or five hundred of them at a pull. A cheap remedy indeed, if it be so effectual as they say. The Broma, or water-worm, is no less troublesome and mischievous to the ships at Sea: it is found generally in all parts within the Tropiques or Torrid Zone, and more especially near the Line: The English call it sometimes Arters, from what ground I am not able to say; but the inconvenience and danger which it brings to ships, if not prevented, is apparent and great. They fasten commonly in such great multitudes, upon the planks of a ship, especially betwixt wind and water, where it is not less dangerous, that the ships many times are found covered with them very thick in those parts, and the planks under water wrought like Hony-combs, full of a number of little cells or cavities, which the worms make in them, and in time eat through the planks, be they never so thick, and endanger the ship. They are at first as little as a pin's head or less, but grow in time to the bigness of a Man's little finger; and the further they work into a plank, the bigger likewise they grow. And therefore to prevent the inconveniences that would otherwise certainly befall the ships that go to the West-Indies, they usually sheathe them, as they call it, before they go out, that is, they nail or fasten upon the ribs of the ships, under water, and betwixt wind and water sometimes thin sheats of lead, sometimes double planks of good thickness, both within and without. But neither of these ways are counted good; partly by reason of the overmuch weight or ballast, which they give to the ship; and partly for that they endure not; for the worm easily works through the planks, be they never so thick; and the lead being very thin, washeth away, and in time decays so much, that the worm will not be hindered from entering. Others burn the outermost planks of the ship, under water and above, to the blackness of a coal, and then pitch it all over with pitch: This doth reasonable well. But the best remedy of all, and that which is now most generally used, is that which is said to be the Invention of Sir John Hawkins, a Gentleman in his time of great experience and command at Sea. They take the sheathing-board, which they intent to lay on, and besmear all the inside of it with Tar, half a finger thick at least, and upon the Tar another half finger thick of hair, such as is commonly used in Mortar; and then nail it down on the ribs of the ship, so far as they judge it necessary, driving the nails reasonably thick, never above a span distance one from another. This is thought both the cheapest and securest way: For the Tar either killeth the worm, as some think; or at least, when she is wrought through the sheathing-board, the Tar and hair together so involve and choke her up, that she is not able to pass further, but there stops and dyeth: And the thinner the sheathing-board is, so much the better. CHAP. X. Of Sugarcanes, cotton-wool, Mulberry trees, and Silkworms, at the West-Indies. 1. AMong the Commodities of America, which we call Mercantile, or such as the Merchants bring from thence, the Sugars are not to be esteemed the least, whether we regard the abundance, or great plenty of the Commodity itself that is brought, or the extraordinary gain and profit they make that bring it; it being become such a general instrument of deliciousness to all sorts of People, in all Nations, and so exceedingly agreeable to dainty palates. 'Tis said, they buy a pound of good Sugar at the Indies for five or six Maravedes, which make not two pence of English money; and in some places a hundred pound weight together for nine or ten Rials of plate, which are not above five shillings; whereas with us in Europe, the rate of it is far otherwise. Some say it is no Plant of the natural growth of America, but brought thither from other parts, as namely from the East-Indies, or Canary Islands; which seems rather to be a mistake, considering the great abundance thereof which groweth naturally, without any kind of planting or Husbandry, in all parts of Brasil, Paraguay, Tucuman, and divers other Provinces of America, both of the Continent and Islands; insomuch that in some place about the River of Plate, they report, that the Canes grow to the height of some lesser trees, yielding a proportionable quantity of good Sugar in every joint or knot of the Cane. For originally, and at first, we must know, this delicious powder, which we call Sugar, is nothing else but the pith or sweet marrow of a certain Cane or Reed, which the Latins call Saccharum, borrowing the term, as 'tis thought, from the Arabicks, together with the first knowledge of the Plant, and we commonly the Sugar-Cane. It groweth in the manner of other reeds up into a long stalk, with joints and knots in it, commonly seven or eight foot high, and where the Soil is lusty and proper for it sometimes more; of the bigness of a Man's arm in the brawn, and sharping up towards the top as it groweth. The joints, or knots, of the Cane, are, for the most part, three or four inches distant one from another, and within full of a spongeous and sweet juicy substance or marrow, of which the Sugar (as we have it) is made. At every knot or joint of the Cane, on each side, there groweth up a long leaf, sharp at the point, and in the fashion of a wing. The root of it is likewise long and large, and runneth not directly downward into the earth, but rather sloping, and creeping along under the uppermost crust of the ground; out of which at several places there sprout divers young Scions, or little Plants, which they cut away, both that they should not draw too much of the nutriment from the principal or mother-Plant, as also for that they set them for increase, or a new stock of reeds; And 'tis said to be a year and half commonly before a Plant of the Sugar-Cane comes to its full perfection or growth. But I conceive that to be much according to the nature and condition of the Soil where they grow. For in Hispaniola (where indeed the Soil is exceeding lusty and good) 'tis said they grow to a cubit's height in less than two month's space. The substance of the root is likewise very sweet and pleasant, nothing so hard or woody as the roots of some other Canes and Reeds be, but rather tender and soft; and where the Soil is good and proper for them, one root will bear sometimes twenty or thirty Canes; which in the Island of Hispaniola is not unusual; but they never suffer all of them to grow up for the reason abovesaid. They grow both in the Plains and Hill Country. in a hot and moist Soil, and require extraordinary Husbanding, and especially that the ground about them be kept clean, and free from annoyance either of weeds or any thing else. 2. The manner of making the Sugar, is commonly thus. When the Reeds are full grown & gathered, they cut or chop them into small pieces at first with a knife, or some other fitting instrument, and afterwards grind, or break them into yet smaller, in certain huge Querns or Mills, which they have for that purpose. These Querns go sometimes with wheels, and are turned about by their Slaves, who tread and labour in them just in the same manner as the Turn-spit Dogs do in many places in England: Others there be that are drawn about with an Horse, or Bufalo: But the more general way now used of late for grinding and bruising the Canes, is by water-Mills, which they find to be far more quick and convenient, especially where they have the opportunity of a good stream. When the Cane is thus broken and pulverizated in some sort, they put it in great Caldrons, or boiling vessels of Brass, with some quantity of pure water, and likewise a strong lie, or water of ashes made for that purpose; and so boil it, till all the sweetness be quite out of the Cane, or hard substance of the Reed, and transfused into the liquor. When this is done, they take it out, and through a colatorie or strainer they press out the liquor into certain great Keelers, or vessels which they call Tangue; and afterwards boil it again, with a less proportion of lie put to it: the effect of this lie is chief to raise the scum, and thereby to help to clarify and refine the Sugar, by separating of the sediments and grosser parts of it from the pure. When they have boiled it to the consistency or thickness of Honey, they strain it out again into other vessels, which they call Tachas, and boil it again to a yet greater thickness and consistency, ever adding some quantity of the aforesaid lie, and continually stirring and scumming it, as it boileth. After this they take it out, and set it to cool in certain lesser vessels which the Spaniards call Formae, or Plates, which contain not above the quantity of two or three pound weight of Sugar a piece. They are commonly made of earth, and perforated, or full of little holes at the bottom, through which the thinner or more liquid part of the Sugar droppeth into other vessels appointed to receive it. It standeth commonly in these Forms or Plates about eight or ten days, both that it may be perfectly cooled, as likewise to observe whether it be refined and purged of its sediments so fully as it ought: If it be not, they boil it once again as before. When it is cold, it looketh like sand, or small gravel of a dark brownish colour, only it is softer in the hand, and crumbles not so harshly as sand doth. The way to make it white, is by a certain peculiar earth, or Marle, they use, which, being first dissolved in water, and wrought into a kind of soft clay; they spread it upon the Sugar, as it lieth in the Forms or Plates, and in time it brings it to a white colour, yet more or less perfect, according as the Sugar itself is pure and fine. And now it is fit for the Merchants, who transport it into all parts of Europe: where, by the Sugar-bakers Art and skill, it is yet more accurately purged and refined: but of this I cannot say much. It is a Merchandise of incredible wealth and advantage to the Country; it being no unusual thing for some one Sugar-Mill, or Ingenio, as they call it, to afford a revenue of thirty or forty thousand Pesoes every year: and though it be likewise brought from the East-Indies, China, and other parts, yet is it not more plentiful in any Country of the World, than in America, where the Cane grows and thriveth well in all Provinces generally, but most kindly in hot and moist Countries; insomuch that in some of the Islands they count an Ingenio, or good Sugar-Farm, to be no less profitable than some of their mines of Gold and Silver. 'Tis said, that out of the only Island of Saint Domingo, or Hispaniola, they transport commonly one year with another, about a thousand chests of refined Sugar, beside that of the courser sort; every chest containing eight or ten Arrobes at least, which is twenty five pound weight, according to English account, and likewise proportionably from other parts. 3. cotton-wool (as they call it, from the likeness it hath to our ordinary wool of Europe, especially as to matter of use) is another very profitable and good commodity of the West-Indies. Though we call it wool yet, is it the fruit of a tree, at least of a shrub or lesser Plant, and groweth upon it in the manner of Apples or other fruit. It groweth, as I said, sometimes upon trees, as particularly in the Island of Puna in the South Sea, and in Hispaniola, but for the most part upon certain lesser shrubs or Plants, not much above a cubit high from the ground, or at most not above the height of a man at the middle. The substance of the Plant whereon it groweth, is very hard and woody, and no less thick set with sprigs and branches growing out of it from below, or but little above ground; which, in time are all beautified and covered, as it were, with a purple coloured flower, yet about the edges, and below at the stalk, yellow; after which appears the fruit in a round cod or hu●k, of different bigness, according as the Soil is good and proper. If the Soil be warm and very lusty, they are commonly of the bigness of ordinary Apples, or Quinces; if otherwise, less: When the fruit is ripe, the cod opens of itself, dividing into four quarters, and the matter within it appears; which is nothing else but a soft gentle substance, much resembling wool in the touch, lying close, and well wrapped together in the cod: it groweth still, that is, after the cod is opened, to the bigness of a man's fist ordinarily, and then, unless it be gathered by some body, it sheds itself upon the ground, as the Down-Thistle commonly doth, together with its seed, which is a little round black substance of the bigness of Coney's trettles, or some lesser sort of Pease, but flat. This is the seed of the Cotton; and they gather it constantly, and sow it every year, in the same manner as they do other Grain, viz. upon tilled Land, and in furrows; and in harvest they reap their crop, which they have never above once upon the same stalk or Plant. 4. This woolly substance of the Cotton-Apple, when it is gathered, the Indian women card and spin, as we do our ordinary wool in Europe; and there are both stuffs and cloth made of it of several sorts and in great abundance; some very fine, like silk; others less fine: and of the coursest sort of all they make Sails for ships, cover for their Tents in the field, either when they are marching against an enemy, or following their Herds of to pasture, and in many other such like occasions. And 'tis commonly the woman's work, not only to carded and spin, but also to wove this cotton into cloth, especially one sort of it, viz. of which they make their Inni's, as they call them, which are certain hanging Beds, much used by the American People, both at Mexico and in all the Northern parts, and likewise in Peru. These are webs of a good strong sort of Cotton Cloth, woven about eight or nine foot long, and an ell broad, with loopholes at each end; through which, by putting a cord or some small line, they hang them up in their houses upon beams or tainters made for that purpose; and when they are abroad in the fields, or hunting in the woods, upon the boughs of trees, or any other thing they find convenient. They use them chief in the field, and when they march against their enemies; for they are not very troublesome to carry, and are much more convenient and healthful, either to sleep in, or lie upon, than the bare ground, especially in those Countries, and in the night time: And when they are foul, they make a lie of a certain great cucumber or Gourd cut in pieces and steeped a good while in water, and afterwards boiled; with which they scour and bring them to as perfect whiteness, as any Soap or Fullers-earth would be able to do. 5. And because the Silks, Taffetas, Satins, and other fine drapery of America, are not only as good for the most part as those of the Eastern parts, but begin also now to be as great a Merchandise, both from Mexico and Peru; and for that the Country affordeth such good plenty of Mulberry trees, both planted and naturally growing (the leaves whereof are the most proper and kindly sustenance of the Worm, which breeds and makes the Silk) I must not pass it over without some short touch at least upon this subject, viz. of the nature of Silk itself, and especially of that admirable Creature the Silkworm, which breeds it. Silk originally is nothing else but a fine thread spun out of the bowels of a certain Worm, which the Latins call Bombyx, we in English commonly the Silk Worm; in same the manner as the common Spider weaves his dusky, yet curious web, out of himself. The Worm at the Indies is of the bigness of a Man's finger or thumb, somewhat greater than those of Italy and other parts of Europe; and is bred two manner of ways: that is to say, by putrefaction, as other Infects commonly are, and also by a more proper and specifical generation. The first is, according to the report of Pliny in his Natural History, of the Flowers of the Cypress and Turpentine trees, and likewise many times of the Ash and Oak, which, in time of year, either fall from the trees of themselves, or else are beaten off with rain-showers; out of which leaves corrupted and putrified upon the ground, there is soon after, by the heat of the Sun and the exhalations or vapours that issue out of the earth, a certain Insect engendered, of the bigness of a Butter fly, naked and smooth at first, like a Worm; but, in time, coming to be overgrown with a kind of hair, and after that with a thicker and warmer coat, which, against winter, the Insect works for itself out of the Cotton, or downy fillets of those leaves among which it was bred, or can otherwise come by. Their other manner of breeding is by generation properly so called, that is, by coupling of Sexes: for there is both Male and Female of them. The manner thus. The Silkworm, after he hath wrought up his bag, or ball of silk to the full, soon after dyeth within it; and though he leaves but a poor Skeleton or thin corpse behind him; yet out of it, laid in some close subterraneous room, where no wind cometh, in a few days after it is putrified, there springs a pair of other Infects or worms of the same kind, though not altogether of the same figure or shape; for they are both horned and winged. These the Latins call Chrysalises, and seem to be made only for generation, or preserving the kind: for as much as they do nothing else but gender for the space of three or four days together; at the end whereof the Male dieth, leaving the Female behind him impregnated and big with a numerous issue of little eggs, to the number of one hundred sometimes or more, of the bigness of Millet seeds, or some other smaller sort of grain; of which assoon as she is delivered, she likewise followeth the Male, and dyeth. 6. Out of these eggs (for so the Authors perpetually call them) a new Breed or Stock of worms, is to be gotten, which is the second manner of their breeding, as hath been said; neither is it the least part of the care and skill of those that keep Silkworms, and trade in the making of Silk, to hatch them well: the best way whereof, and most commonly used in Italy, and other parts, is said to be the natural heat of a woman, either in bed, or otherwise carrying them about her, in her bosom betwixt her breasts; especially if she be a woman of good complexion, or a Virgin: and so they are hatched commonly in three or four days. They keep the eggs all Winter long for the most part, and without any great inconvenience, not thinking of hatching them, till the Mulberie-trees be well blosomed, the leaves whereof are their most natural food, and are seldom out before the latter end of May, or beginning of June. When the eggs are hatched, and the worm appears, the next care is to procure it sustenance, whereby it may grow to a bigness, and strength able to work. Their best meat, as I said, is the Mulbury leaves; for though they feed them sometimes with the leaves of Rubus, or the great Bramble, with Lettuce, and likewise with Nettle-leaves; yet neither do they thrive so well, nor wove so big a web, as they do, when they are fed with the Mulberry-leaf. They feed with a great appetite, assoon as ever they are bred, eating constantly thrice a day, viz. at Morning, Noon, and Night, when they are young; and when they are grown to some bigness, five or six times every day. After they have fed well for the space of nine or ten days together, and their bellies are full, they are taken with a kind of dead sleep: which holds them for the most part three or four days together: and though it be a sickness and some weakening to them, yet they awake of themselves, and in time by good handling seem to be revived with it, and fall to feeding afresh. And this they do constantly, that is, feed, sleep, and revive again, three several times at least before they come to their full strength, or to be able to wove: which is commonly about forty or fifty days after their first birth. When they have had their last and longest sleep; for the space of eight or ten days together afterwards they feed the stoutliest of all, and then quite give over; which they that keep them perceiving, know that now their belly is full, and that they are ready to work out all again that they have hitherto eaten, with the advantage of a rare interest beside. They know it also by this, that the bag of Silk, that is to say, the matter out of which the Worm afterward spins the Silk, gins to appear, and to shine through the lawn coverture or thin sides of the worm. Against which time they that look to their working, have always in readiness some boughs or branches of the Oak, Chesnut, or any other tree, whose substance is very hard and dry: for upon such they always work best; any degree of moistness, how little soever, whither of the air, or in their Looms, or otherwise, being counted very prejudicial both to the Worm and web. Upon these boughs they lay the Worms, which presently fall to work and spinning of their thread from one twig to another, backward, forward and athwart, as themselves please, always working inward, that is from the circumference to the centre or middle part, till at last they have spun out a round bag of Silk, for the most part of an Ovil or oblong figure, in which last of all they close up themselves; yet still continuing to work, till they have either wholly or well nigh filled up the bag within, and that the bottom within themselves, viz. within their bowels, and out of which they spin, be quite spent and unravelled. The bag, or web which these Silk-wormes spin is many times as big as a man's head all of one thread, so fine, that it can hardly be discerned, but by very good eyes, and spun out so long without any rapture or once breaking off, that, as Aldrovandus affirmeth, some one, of them might be able to circled about the biggest City in Italy. The colour of it is different, white, yellow, green; or otherwise, according either to the nature of the Climate and Country where they work, or to the quality of the food, with which the worms are fed. This spinning holds them conmonly nine or ten days. When all is done, and they are come, as it were, to the last thread of the Clue, and that the Worm, by filling up the bottom of the bag, hath quite emptied herself, in a short time she dies, as we said before, in the midst of herself made prison and work: and there spring out of her Skeleton, after some few days, two other lesser Worms, of the same kind, though differing somewhat in shape and figure; whose business is only to propagate, as we likewise said; and that being done they die: and the Silk-masters unravelling again the whole web, or bag of silk, which the dead Artist hath wrought, order it according to their own skill, as may be most fit for the Merchant; of which I can say but little. 7. This is the generation of Silk-wormes, which as briefly as I could, I have described from the report of divers Authors; especially of Hieronimus Vida his curious and elegant poem of this subject entitled de Bombyce: and this is the original and first ground of Silk, that so rare and so much esteemed vesture: it is but the entrails of a Worm, an effect of putrefaction and rottenness: which if the Gallants and Ladies of the world, when they ruffle most in it, would be pleased a little to reflect upon, perhaps it would do them no harm; and be a means, that while it renders their outward personages comely and fine, as it doth, it should not put their inward and better part so much out of fashion. 8. As for the Mulberry trees, the leaves whereof are said to be the most natural and kindly sustenance that can be for the Silk-wormes, I have not much to say of them; only this. They are Trees of somewhat a larger size than ordinary, of a great body or trunk and also of high growth. They bear their fruit in clusters like grapes, being indeed nothing else but a multitude of small berries growing together upon one long bunch, just as grapes do. The leaves are broad and somewhat thick, of a very green colour, and sharpening towards the end in fashion of a heart seeming to be snipt or cut round about the edges with little gashes, more or less deep, according to the kind of the Mulberry: for there are two sorts of them, viz the black & the white; so called from the colour of the fruit which they bear: the first whereof, when ripe is outwardly black, but the pulp of it, or jucy substance within red or of a deep murry; the other white and of a more pleasant taste, something resembling wine. They grow best in hot Countries: and where they make Silk, there are whole Woods and Groves of them, made or preserved on purpose, only for the Silk-wormes to feed on. Of all the Trees of the Garden it is counted to be the last that putteth forth its blossoms; which it never doth till about the end of May, or beginning of June, when all the cold weather is gone: and till then the Silk-wormes also, where they breed naturally and not by the art and care of man, lie dead like so many little grains or seeds, or like the dunging of flesh-flies, upon the ground; but after that time begin to revive and show themselves; as if there were some natural sympathy and correspondence betwixt the one and the other. They grow either naturally of a slip of their own kind, or by the inoculation or grafting upon some other Trees: and the white Mulberry is commonly a graft upon that which is called the white Poplar. There are good store of them said to be at Bermudaz, Virginia, and some other English Plantations; which, if the Planters had Skill, or were enjoined to mind the business, might in time afford great plenty of Silks, and a richer trade and employment than any other Commodity they yet deal in. But they think not of it; and therefore it may well suffice to have spoken thus much of the business. CHAP. XI. Of the abundance and excellency of the Metals at the West-Indies; especially of Gold and Silver. 1. AMerica or the New World, is doubtless a Country admirable rich, & which the Sovereign Creator of all things hath plentifully stored with all sorts of the most excellent and rare endowments of nature, as well in the rank and order of things inanimate or without life, as of living creatures; according as in part we have seen already, and may be more largely and to admiration observed, as the scattered instances or tokens of his Divine Magnificence and bounty, in all the Histories and reports of the Country. But of that wherein it seems most of all to excel, we have yet spoken nothing viz. of the Metals, which alone were able to render it the most desirable part of the World, though it had no other advantages. It aboundeth with all sorts of these, viz. Iron, Brass, Copper, Led, Tin, etc. But the excellency and richness of the other two, viz. Gold and Silver, and likewise of that which is as it were, the Sperm and Solder of these, and of all other Metals beside, viz. Quicksilver, is such, that it makes all the rest to be neither much spoken of, nor much sought after in these parts. In which respect I conceive I may be more easily excused, if I pass them over likewise in silence, and make Those only the subject of my following discourse, which are so much (would to God I might not as truly say toomuch) the subject of all our desires, viz. the Metals of Gold and Silver. 2. Among all Metals, Gold hath justly the pre-eminence or first place, in the esteem of men, by reason of its natural perfection and purity, which is such, as it renders the Metal in a manner incorruptible and of immortal durance. It is not improbably conceived to be a substance, wherein the Elements, viz. Fire, Earth, Water, etc. (which are the natural Ingredients and constitution of all other sublunary bodies) are mixed with most equal and exact proportion, both for quantity and quality, that is, there is no more of the Substance of any of them found in it, than the condition of the rest will most fitly agree with and endure, and that substance likewise most perfectly defecate and purged by the work of nature from all intrinsical impurity or corruption, before it meets in composition with the rest, whence ariseth such a perfect Union and Consolidation of all the Elemental substances in the substance of Gold as is invincible, and resisteth the actiivity of all other bodies whatsoever less purified, and less perfectly mixed, whose contrariety should otherwise cause corruption, or the dissolution of its substantial and essential parts. I say the Elements in the composition of Gold, are both so pure in themselves, and likewise so perfectly mixed in due proportion to another, that it is naturally impossible they should be separate, or dissolved one from another by the action of any other body, in which 'tis evident, they are not so perfectly mixed. Yea the Fire itself, the most active of all Elements and Elementary bodies, which incinerates and turns to Ashes, the substance of all common Metals, and sensibly wasteth Silver itself, yet prevails no further upon this, than only to refine and purify it, that is, to deliver it from the adulterate and improper mixture of other Metals; but wasteth not one dram or scruple of pure Gold, though you melt it a hundred times over. This renders Gold in a manner incorruptible and immortal (speaking naturally) and by consequence the most excellent and fitting instrument of commerce and bartery that the wit and reason of man could invent or desire. Second in excellency and in all properties of perfection unto Gold, is that of Silver; a substance, or Metallick body, wherein the Element of water seems to pravail in some undue proportion above that of fire rendering thereby the whole substance of the Metal of a constitution phlegmatic, as I may say, and feminine, that is weak and less able to resist contrarieties, as appears by the pale colour of it, and by experience upon all occasions of trial: yet in comparison of all other Metals except Gold only) it is with all reason preferred, and questionless excels them all both in purity and perfection of mixture, as much as itself is excelled by gold; and perhaps much more. For I observe, the Metals of gold and silver do (both of them) exceed all the other sorts of Metals, whither Iron, Brass, Copper, etc. incomparably or beyond comparison, as we say; I mean, there never was any certain comparison, or proportion of value, fixed and settled betwixt the one and the other by estimation or the common consent of men, as to say how much a pound of Gold is better worth than a pound of Iron; or a pound of Silver than a pound of Brass or Lead; not but that it may be easily calculated and known, how much the one exceeds the other in value; but because it is not commonly known, nor ever was, I suppose, by any general and certain estimation or count among men: whereas the proportion, or difference in value, betwixt gold and silver, hath ever been generally and certainly known among men; not indeed so fixed & certain as to be always, & in all places, one and the same (for it varieth according to times and places, and especially according as either the one or the other metal is plentiful, or scarce, needful, or counted less necessary among men) but yet a proportion or some certain difference in value hath been ever commonly estimated and assigned betwixt them. Anciently the proportion betwixt these metals is said to have been of ten for one, that is, one talon of gold was held to be worth ten talents of silver; so that if five talents of gold were due, and a man would make payment in silver, he should pay fifty talents; and for fifty due in gold, five hundred in silver. Pliny reports, that at the first coining of these metals in Rome, the proportion was fourteen and an half or fifteen for one; others, as Herodotus, speak of thirteen. But that which seems now to be most common at the Indies, China, and other places, especially where silver is scarce, is the proportion of twelve for one; So that if an ounce of silver be worth five shillings, as it is said to be, an ounce of gold is worth three pound sterling, & a pound of gold in weight worth no less than forty eight pound of silver in Coyn. 3. Of this Metal, viz gold, there is such plenty at the West-Indies, that, beside the infinite rich Mines thereof, which they have in all the Provinces of the Southern part, viz. Peru, Castilia del oro, Chile, etc. and likewise in many of them in the Northern, especially in the Countries of Nicaragua, Veragua, Guadalaiara, there is scarce a River of note in all those parts, but the sands of it are well powdered with gold, and afford good store of it to the washers: yea the very earth, or common soil, which they dig, or otherwise take up in most parts of Peru, is so tinctured with it, and yields ever and anon such grains and crumbling of it, that Acosta, an Author no way lavish of his reports, nor of a light judgement, professeth to think there is much more of the metal yet to be discovered than hath been found; judging, as he doth, by the general quality or tincture of the Soil. There be three sorts of gold at the Indies, or rather the same gold or metal they find in three several manners or ways, viz. in grains, as they call them, in powder, and in stone. Gold in grains they call certain small pieces of gold, which they find in the earth, of pure and perfect metal, without mixture of any other sort of base alloy, or at least with so small a mixture, as it scarce needeth melting or refining. These the Spaniards in America call Pepones, from some resemblance which the grains have to the seeds of Melons or Pompions; though many times they are much bigger, and contain a pound weight or more. They find silver likewise sometimes in the same manner, viz in grains, and pure; but that is but seldom, and a little in comparison of what they find of the other. Gold in stone, is a vein or little Mine of gold, which groweth and spreadeth itself into branches in some flint or other stone, just as silver doth in the Mine. Much of this sort is found in the Mines of Curuma, and about the Salinas or Salt-wooks of Peru, a place so called; where they find huge stones pierced many times quite through, and interlaced every way with veins of gold, in such quantity, and so richly, that the stone is found, not seldom, to be more than half gold. Of this sort is that which they find most commonly in the Mines, and is very good gold, but requireth excessive labour and pains to break it from the stone, and to get it forth. Gold in powder, is that which they gather in Rivers, Brooks, and other places where any store of water passeth from the Mountains, the streams or torrents whereof, bring along with them, from the said mountains, abundance of this metal in small pieces, which, as it comes, settleth continually in the sands and breaches of the said Rivers, where afterwards it is found. I say the gold itself is most probably thought to be engendered on the tops of the mountains or mountainous parts of the Earth, and perhaps not far from the Source and Springs of those Rivers in which it is found, and into whose streams it is easily conceived to be devolved in tract of time, by showers of rain, and by many other natural causes; and is not bred or engendered in the sand or stream itself: And so likewise 'tis observed, they find most plenty of it commonly after some great floods. Of this sort of gold they gather greatest quantity; there being, as I said, scarce a River of note in the whole Country of Peru, or Southern part of America, whose sands are not more or less tinctured and enamelled with it. And it is most plentiful, so is it likewise, for the most part, very pure, and needs not half that labour of refining it, which gold in stone, or of the Mine usually doth. To gather it, they first of all divert, or turn the course of the stream some other way, and then search the Ford, especially in the breaches, if there be any, and in the cliffs, or hollow places of the banks, where it is likely it may settle in its passage with the waters: and in such places they always find best store. It is, for the most part, the women's work to gather this sort of gold; which they do in this manner. They sit commonly kneedeep in the water, upon the bank of some River, or other place, where they have good store of water before them, with a Trey or little Bowl in their hands, cut sloping on either side, but in the midst deep and round, like the bottom of a Barber's Basin, having a good quantity of the sand which they are to wash, continually standing by them, & which is brought to them by some other body appointed to serve them: Of this sand they take what quantity they think fit, and wash it in their Treys, in such manner, as the sand and sandy earth easily washeth away together with the water, and the gold, by reason of its heaviness and weight, naturally sinks down and slips into the deep bottom or bowl of the Trey: which when they have done, they deliver it likewise to others that stand there to receive it, and take in more sand. So that to every Trey, or washer of gold, there are three or four persons at least appointed to attend, viz. one to bring the sand from the River to the washer, another to receive the gold when it is washed, one to oversee the work, and another to provide victuals and necessaries for them all. For they stir not from morning till night, from the place where they work. And thus you shall see hundreds of people washing and searching for gold all along the banks of the Rivers. This is generally the way of gathering of gold: as for their manner of refining it, we shall speak of that and the refining of silver all under one. 4. Silver they find either in veins straggling, as they call them, or fixed. The first is, when they find some piece, or a few small pieces of that metal alone; which when they have taken out of the Mine, or stone, there is no more of it to be found. The other is, when the vein of the metal runneth out, and spreads itself up and down the Mine, in breadth and length, upward, downward, and every way, like the root of a tree with arms, boughs, and branches; for so for the most part it doth; and the Mineralists do commonly represent the Mines of these metals, especially of silver, by the type of a tree planted within the bowels, or middle part, of some great mountain, with its root spreading largely downward, and with its boughs and branches reaching as far upwards, even to the top, or higher parts of the mountain; at which it usually discovers itself, either by some part of the pure vein itself, breaking out, and running along upon the ridges of the mountain, or but little within the surface of the Earth, or else by the signs; which are certain fumosities, or metallic exhalations, which the Mine sendeth forth, of divers colours, viz. yellowish, white, blue, green, according to the strength and quality of the Mine, and its near approach to the surface of the Earth. These signs, where they find them, they call Marchasites; and the nearer they approach in colour to the metal which they signify, the better signs they are accounted to be, as arguing that the Mine is rich, and that the metal within the ground is well concocted and pure. This, we must know, is a general rule to discover and find the Mines, but not universal. For sometimes they venture to dig, and fall upon very good Mines, without any such special signs appearing, only induced by the quality of the earth, and the natural barrenness of the mountain or place where they dig. And 'tis generally counted in Peru a sign good enough, if the mountain or mountainous part of the Earth which they pitch upon (for in such a Soil only the best and richest Mines are found) be very rugged, hard, and sharp, and so absolutely barren, that not a Tree, Plant, or Shrub, groweth on it, and that the grass (if yet it bear any) be of a faint withered colour, and seeming, as it were, to be parched with drought. These veins lie commonly deep within ground, yet affording very good and pure metal. The principal veins of the Mine, for the most part, run directly North and South, yet branching themselves into lesser boughs several ways, viz. East, West, and towards all quarters, being found many times five or six foot broad, and seldom so narrow as a span, and this running and branching of the veins in the Mine, they call the Chase. The way of digging for the metal is divers. Sometimes they begin at the top, or upper part of the mountain, where they first observe the Marchasites, or signs of the metal, and sink the Mine downward like a well, only taking a convenient space of ground for the platform or compass of the Mine, and leaving Stanzas, or places to rest upon and dispatch necessary business, at a certain distance one from another continually, as they work deeper into the Mine. The other is, to begin to dig at the foot, or near the bottom of the mountain, in line almost level, that is, sloping a little upwards, and till they come perpendicularly under the place, where they first observed the tokens of the metal; it being a thing generally presumed by the Miners, that though every Mine of metal that may be in the body of a mountain, doth not show itself by signs at the top, as when it lies very deep within ground, or is obstructed by some Quarry of stone or otherwise, yet wheresoever any such signs of it do appear at the top, there it reacheth to the bottom of the mountain or to the level of the plain ground, at least well nigh to it, and that the deeper the Mine runs within ground, the bigger and better it is, verifying in a new sense the proverb, The best is at the bottom. This is counted the best way of Mining, and most commodious in many respects, especially for draining away of the waters, which are commonly found in the Mineral hills, and do extremely trouble the Miners in their work, if they be not diverted; and likewise for carrying the silver out of the Mines when it is digged: neither of which can be done the other way, viz. where the Mine is sunk right downward, without excessive labour, charge, time, and hazard to the workmen; but this way are done with ease. For the waters that issue out of the chinks of the mountain, and fall into the Mines, are easily received into certain Cisterns, made for the purpose, and by pipes diverted which way they please; and the silver is no less easily carried out of the Mine: For the way to the mouth of it being either level or sloping downwards, the poor Miners are not forced to mount with it upon their backs, as they do the other way two hundred, sometimes three hundred stades, or man-heights, from the place where they dig it, upon ladders made of Neats-hides or leather, and from which, many times by mischance, they fall down with it into the Mines upon their backs, and are broken to pieces. If they dig far into the mountain, before they come at the Mine, they are forced to use the Compass to direct their course, as if they were at Sea, according as by the signs they observed the vein to run, when they first found it. They have likewise another advantage of the water, when they dig the Mine this way, viz. that by the force of it in the channel or pipes, by which it runs out of the Mine, they turn about certain Mills, and other Engines, by which they break and grind the metal, when they have gotten it out of the Rock, and prepare it for the refining; doing likewise thereby many other necessary businesses appertaining to the Mines. Nevertheless about and near to the mouth of the Mine, they have houses of all necessary office beside, for the Miners and other workmen; and especially a Smith's Forge, for the sharpening and repairing of their tools: for their labour is excessive hard and difficult, and it requires both edged tools and strong arms to split the hard metal, and break it out of the Mine; which they are forced to do with wedges, hammers, and all sorts of instruments, and with no less difficulty than they break the hardest flint, or any other Quarry of stone. They labour likewise perpetually in them, I mean, by turns, so as while one company worketh, another sleepeth and takes rest: but the work itself of the Mine never stands still, but goeth continually on night and day; of which, in the Mines, they know no difference, working altogether by candlelight, as well by day as by night, and without which, their noon and their midnight would be both alike. For indeed the Mines in this respect may be taken for the Suburbs of Hell, by reason of their extreme darkness; and how near soever they be to that which commandeth all things, yet they always want there three of the chief comforts of Nature, having neither Sun nor Light, nor good Air in the Mines. 5. The last and most curious work about the Metals is the refining of them, that is, the separating and purging them from the mixture of other courser metals, with which they are always more or less engendered in the Mines. This is done two manner of ways, either by Fire, or by Quicksilver. The Indians anciently, before the Spaniards came among them, used no other way of refining but only by fire, and melting of the metal. To which end they had usually, and have still in many places, to this day, several small furnaces, which they call Guayras, built near the Mines, in places where the wind commonly bloweth; with which, without further trouble or need of bellows, only by supplying them with wood or coal from time to time, as shall be necessary, they make their refining. And they say there is some kind of silver, particularly that of Potozi, which will not be melted by any artificial wind they can make, as of the bellows, or otherwise, but only by that which is natural of the Guayras: and therefore upon the sides of that huge mountain, viz. Potozi, there are commonly seen five or six thousand of these Guayras, or little fires, burning all at one time together; which in an evening, or dark night, they say is a very pleasant spectacle, to behold them blazing all at once, like so many little Comets, or fixed Meteors of the Earth. But the more common and speedy way is to refine by Quicksilver, which the Spaniards do now generally use; both because they have extraordinary plenty of it, and because they find it draws more silver out of the mass which they refine, than by fire they can do. 6. Quicksilver among metals is like water among the elements, it is the glue and solder of them, viz. when it is refracted and in due proportion: for otherwise, when it is united, and entire in itself, it separates and consumes all of them but gold and silver. In which respect they call it not improperly the Humidum radical of metals. It is a liquid substance, having no certain form or fixed subsistence of itself, but runs continually from place to place, as gold and silver, or other metals do, when they are melted, yet is it the heaviest and most compacted of all other metals; for they all swim upon quicksilver, and will never sink to the bottom. They say a piece of Iron of two or three pound weight hath been cast into a little barrel or vessel of quicksilver, which swum upon the top of it, like cork, or some piece of light wood in a vessel of water, and would not sink; only gold, they say, will sink; which they attribute to a secret property and sympathy, that is betwixt those two metals. It hath many rare and admirable properties; but that which may seem most remarkable, and which fits it so much for the effect we are now speaking of, viz. the refining and purifying of the metals, is the natural sympathy and inclination which it hath to gold and silver, especially the first; which it naturally seeks out, where it is to be found, among all metals, separates and divides it from them all, and itself embracing and circling it round about immediately, and without the mixture or interposition of any thing else but itself. In the same manner, but not altogether so intimately and perfectly it unites with silver; not penetrating the substance of the metal, which the perfect composition thereof, if it be pure and fine, resisteth and forbiddeth as hath been said, but only embracing and circling about it on all sides, yet piercing and consuming the courser metals, if there be, and so long as there be any of them mixed with it. And though it be of itself the heaviest of all other metals, yet is it soon transmuted or changed into the lightest substance of all, viz. smoke; which a little fire presently doth: and that smoke evaporating, and flying up into any colder Region or when it encounters any cold metal, as in the head or top of a Still, it presently gathers together again, and becomes perfect quicksilver. Hence it serveth so excellently well to refine and purify both these metals, viz. gold and silver, and likewise to be itself separated from them again afterward. It groweth naturally in the Vermilion, or Minium, which is a metal well known & much used for painting & dying; and of which they have admirable rich Mines in divers parts of America; especially those of Palcas, out of which they draw yearly, only for the King's use, a hundred thousand pesoes of mine; and those of Guancavilca, which yield every year eight or nine thousand Quintals, or so many times one hundred twenty five pound weight of quicksilver: And of another they report, that a poor Indian of Acoria, who first found it, sold the interest which he thereby had in the Mine, viz. for discovering of it, for two hundred and fifty thousand ducats, and afterwards commenced a suit against the buyer for deceiving him in the bargain; it being found, that his only interest in the Mine, for finding it, was well worth five hundred thousand pound and more. Before they can use it for the refining & purging of other metals, they must first separate it from the stone or metal in which it groweth. This they easily do by fire, which melts the stone, being first well grinded or broken, & the quicksilver evaporates in smoke up to the head or top of the Limbeck, or vessel wherein it is melted, where encountering a colder substance, it as quickly congregats and thickens again, and would fall presently down again, but that in the descent it is by pipes in the head of the Limb k or stillatory diverted into some other vessels appointed to receive it. They keep it in nothing so well as in leather-vessels: for any thing of wood or ordinary metal it would eat through and destroy: and 'tis said, they spend only at the Mines of Potozi, in the refining of silver by it, 6 or 7000 Quintals, one year with another. 7. Silver, if it be good, even when 'tis first digged out of the Mine, is of a white greyish colour, like the best sort of Amber: but if it looks darker, inclining any thing to black or red, it is not counted good, but rather conceived to have in it a great quantity of earth and dross, which must be purged away in the refining: Nevertheless they count it no ill vein, when every pound weight of metal out of the Mine yields but two or three pesoes of perfect silver, when 'tis refined. Now the manner of refining metals by quicksilver, and also of separating the quicksilver again from the metals, when they are perfectly refined, is thus. First of all with hammers, and other instruments for the purpose, they break and grind the metals as small as possibly they can, reducing them, so near as may be, into a dust or powder, which they afterwards sift through a searse of Copper, and then put it into certain Troughs or broad open vessels, being first moistened or well steeped in brine or salt water. This they do, because the salt hath a certain quick penetrative force in it, and is apt to separate the earthly and drossy parts which as yet stick to the metal, and consequently makes it more fit to receive and draw the quick silver to it. When this is done, they set the vessels which contain the powder, or pulverizated substance of the metals upon little furnaces, with a soft fire under them, which they increase by little and little. This is done, because the fire also is observed very much to help and facilitate the incorporating of the quicksilver, with the metal. After this having the quicksilver or Mercury (as the Chemists call it from its nimbleness and active, searching into the metals) in a piece of Holland, or some other fine and strong linen, they press or strain it through the cloth upon the metal in the vessels; upon which it falleth in small drops like dew: some body in the mean time continually moving and stirring the metal up and down in the vessel, while the quicksilver drops upon it, and afterwards also at times, for the space of five or six days together: in which time the mercury will be so perfectly incorporate with the metal, and have united itself so intimately to it, that nothing shall be betwixt them, but that all the dross, earth, or other course metal whatsoever, with which it was naturally engendered or mixed before, shall be either consumed or separated from it. After some time, when the Refiners think the Mercury hath done his part, and be perfectly incorporated with the metal that is to be refined, they take the whole quantity or mass of it together, out of the Troughs or vessels where they are, and put it into certain other vessels, which are bigger and almost full of water; in which they again fall to stir and to move the quicksilver and metal together up and down the vessel, in such manner, as that the earth and drossy parts of the metal, separated from the other, do pass away with the water, and the silver or gold united with the mercury, as being more ponderous and weighty substances, remain at the bottom: which they take out and wash yet once again in Keelers, or certain broad and deep platters, till it seem throughly purged from the earth and drossy substance. The metal thus united with mercury appears like small sand. And because there always slips away some portion of silver and quicksilver with the dross in the washings, therefore they commonly wash that dross over and over again, till at length nothing be lost either of the one or other. When they are thus throughly cleansed from the dross, they appear bright and shining, either with a white or yellowish colour, according to the proper nature of the metal that is united with the mercury. And by this they know the metals are refined as much as they ought. Then followeth the last piece of work, which is to separate the mercury or quicksilver from the metal, wherewith it is incorporate, that so they may have the pure metal alone. And this is done thus. 8. First they strain it, as before, through a piece of strong fine linen, or Holland, as forcibly as they can by this means if there be any Quicksilver not incorporate and united with the metal, it passeth out as before in little drops like dew which they gather and save; and the rest, viz. the silver and quicksilver united remain in one lump together: which with much art and diligence they work last of all into the fashion of a Sugar-loaf, containing most commonly one hundred pound weight in the whole, and made hollow in the midst. This they set upon a furnace, covered with a certain earthern vessel in the nature of a Limbeck or Still, but of the same fashion, and mould that the metal within is, viz. of a Sugar-loaf, laying some few coals upon the top of it, and giving a good strong heat to the furnace. With this heat all the quicksilver in the metal presently evaporates and flies up, as we said before, into the top of the Limbeck or earthern vessel, where being refrigerated by the encounter of a colder substance, it quickly thickens again, and distils downwards by the sides of the Limbeck, like the smoke or vapour of a pot covered and seething on the fire; and by certain Retorts or pipes framed conveniently in the head or upper part of the said Limbeck or earthen vessel, it is not permitted to fall right down again, but diverted another way, and received apart by itself. The silver in the mean time remaining entire upon the furnace, without changing form, but yet abating much of its weight, by reason of the absence of the mercury, which is now flown quite away. They say it abates commonly five parts of six in the weight: so that if the whole lump or loaf of silver and Mercury united, weigh threescore pound, when it is first set on the furnace, when the Mercury is sublimated and gone, it weighs not above ten; so great is the disproportion or difference in weight betwixt them. 9 For the breaking and grinding of the metals, when they are first taken out of the Mine, which, as we said before, is a necessary preparative to their refining and incorporating with the Mercury, they have many Engines or Mills, some whereof go with Horses or Bufalos in them; others are turned by water, carrying huge Pestles in them, which beat and break the metal, after the manner of Tanne-mills. They carry commonly twelve or fourteen Pestles apeice, and there are said to be no less than forty eight of these Mills at Potozi, which go by water, and thirty more which go with Horses, beside a multitude of hand-Engins: at the City of Tarapaya, not fare from Potozi; there are twenty two all upon the water, which do nothing else but grind and break the silver, as in so many great Mortars, night and day without ceasing. When the metal is thus separated from the Mercury, they count it pure and refined, whither it be gold or silver, and as such melt it again into bars, and carry it to the Touchstone and marking. For it is not yet so perfectly purified and fine, but it must, at least in part, endure one trial and purging more. This is done by the Assay-master, as they call him, who gives to every piece or bar of silver, its particular Alloy or value, according to which it must be sold, and pass for metal more or less fine and pure, and without which Alloy and mark given it by the Assay-master, it is not lawful to vend any of those metals. It's a great and rich Office at the Indies to be Assay-master, and requires likewise a great and exact skill in the metals, viz. to give the true alloy and value to every piece and bar of metal that is brought. The business is done thus. They bring their metal in bars or ingots to the Assay-master or his Deputy, who cuts from every one of them a small piece of metal, and weighs it exactly, marking well out of which bar or ingot every piece was cut; and then puts them one by one into several crucibles or Melting-pots which he hath standing on the fire, marked every one of them according to the number of the bar, to which the piece of metal belongs, that he puts into it. These crucibles are little small vessels made for no other purpose, but for the last trying of the metal, and most commonly of the ashes of certain bones, which are beaten together and cast into a Mould. To every one of these set on the Furnace, the Assay-master gives a strong and violent fire by which the metal instantly melts, and the Lead, Copper, Tin, or other base metal, in case there be any yet remaining in it, dissolves and evoporates into smoke, and the silver or other metal, remains in the Crusible alone, now advanced to the utmost perfection and fineness that art can give it, and withal so strangely united and fixed in itself, that though it be liquid and melted, yet they say, it will never spill nor run out, though the mouth of the Crusible should be turned downward, but abides still within it, firm and fixed without losing one drop, or the least particle of its substance. When the Assay-master perceives by the colour of it (which is then fiery red) that the metal is perfectly refined, and that it hath evaporated all that was evoporable by fire in its substance, he takes the several Crusibles off the furnaces, and sets them in some place, where they may conveniently cool, and then weighs every piece over again, observing with wonderful exactness, what every one wants of the weight which it had, when it was first put in, and according to the waist, that is, according to what he finds it want, of the first weight: he gives the whole bar or ingot of metal the alloy, and marks it at what value or estimation of purity and fineness it shall pass. The balance and weights which they use, are the most delicate and curious in the world, and their grains so small, that they cannot be taken up by a man's fingers, but only with a small pair of pincers, which they have on purpose: and they make the trial for the most part by candle light, that not so much as any suspicion of wind or air extraordinary should intervene, to move the balance one way or other. So precisely curious are they in the business; and not altogether without cause, for upon the estimate of this little piece, the value and judgement of the whole bar, or ingot, for purity and fineness, dependeth, as hath been said. CHAP. XII. Of the famous silver-Mines of Potozi, and of the Pearls and Pearl-fishing at the West-Indies. 1. I Should conclude too abruptly, and leave the report, which I pretend to make, of the wealth and riches of the New-world very imperfect; if in treating of the subject of metals, I should forget those famous and unparalled Mines at Potozi, in the Country of Peru. I confess the Spanish writers seem to me to be a little reserved, and sparing in their reports concerning the Gold-mines of America, mentioning them only in the general, and not particularising much of them one way or other; whither out of design or no, I cannot say: but of these silver-mines at Potozi, they are wonderfully liberal and free, as if they meant to make them the admiration and envy of all the world beside. And truly it is not altogether without cause. For doubtless they are one of the most admirable things and discoveries of nature: a treasure, which the Bountiful hand of Divine Providence, had from the beginning laid up there for the Princes of the Catholic Monarchy, and for the defence of the Crown of Spain. And though it be only one mountain or hill of itself, with a little hillock growing out at the foot of it, yet is it so infinitely rich, that it seems to be all of silver, and would doubtless of itself alone, be a sufficient support and revenue for any Prince in Christendom whatsoever, that had it by him at home in his own dominions. It is but one Tree, yet so excellently branched and laden, that all Europe is filled with the fruit of it. In a word it is but one general Mine, yet so admirably wealthy and good, that the treasure of it alone, if it could be gotten, would pay three such Armies as the State maintains, and be a competent revenue for all public occasions beside. I know my sober Reader will think I speak with the largest, and that I use an huge liberty of Hyperbolising in what I say; but it is not so, I keep within bounds, and though I must confess of myself, I do not without some difficulty believe what I report; yet I say no more than what very grave Authors, wise and sober men, that have seen the place, and profess to speak, not only of themselves, but according to the judgement and estimation of men that live there, and are well experienced in the Mines, will make good by their testimony. I shall need to name, only Acosta, who in his natural History of the Indies (lib. 4. cap. 12.) tells us, 'tis the opinion of understanding men in those affairs, that there are no less than three hundred thousand quintals of metal refined at Potozi every year; and Laet in his discriptio novi Orbis lib. 1. cap. 4. tells me, that a quintal is a measure, which with the Spaniards in America containeth one hundred twenty five pound weight. Put these together, and the sum will be thirty eight Millions, five hundred thousand pound weight of silver melted at Potozi, yearly. I suppose it will be said, he means of Bullion or metal out of the Mine; whereof silver, when it is refined, makes not the third part. I grant both, being willing to give all the advantage to moderate propositions that I can. But let us then suppose, that every pound weight of metal out of the Mine, yields a Pezo, or which is less, but five Shillings, of fine silver (which I suppose no man will deny but it doth, one with another) and it will abundantly justify what I say, viz. that if we had it, it would pay three such Armies as the State maintains, and afford a competent revenue for all public occasions beside. For it amounts to little less than ten millions of money, viz. to nine millions three hundred and fifty thousand pound by account; which under favour I humbly conceive is an Income thrice as great as the State expendeth yearly one way or other. And otherwise they confess commonly, that the King's annual revenue out of this only Mine (which is but the fifth part) is above a million one year with another. 2. Potozi is a Mountain in the country of Charcas, a Province of Peru, in the Southern part of America. It lieth about sixty or seventy leagues distant from the South-Sea, and about twice so many from the Atlantic, or Northern, (of which we shall speak more in due place) being of a soil, when the Mine was first discovered, extremely dry, hard and rocky, and every way as unpleasant to the eye as might be; and so utterly barren, that it yielded no kind of commodity or fruit outwardly. And though it lie within the Tropiques in the twenty first degree of latitude, yet is the air about it very cold, and the place in the months of June, July, and August, constantly showered with rain. The colour of the Soil is for the most part of a dark red, and the whole fashion of the moutain somewhat resembling a pavilion or round Tent, with a point sharpening still upwards in the manner of a Sugarloaf; being in height from the plain ground, about a quarter of a Spanish league, and in the compass at the bottom a full league or more; and at the foot of it on the one side, there groweth out a lesser hill, which the Indians call Guaina Potozi, which signifies the little or younger Potozi, which hath veins of good metal likewise, but straggling here and there in divers parts of the mountain, and not fixed, or running in continued branches, as those of the great Potozi do. It is a place of itself, or to outward appearance, that would be thought altogether unhabitable by reason of the unpleasantness and barrenness of its outside: but its wealth within hath so peopled it round about, that there is not any Town at the West-Indies, of greater resort than it, nor better supplied with all sorts of things, either for necessity or delight, having Flesh-meat of all sorts, Fowl and Venison in abundance, variety of choice Fruits, excellent Wines, with all kind of conserveses and other delicates besides. The dwellings of the Spaniards and Indians, who come thither only for pleasure, or else for the gain and trading of the Mines, are said to extend two or three leagues in circuit round about the foot of the hill: the Mines whereof were first discovered by a poor Indian about the year 1546, accidentally, as it might seem, in this manner. 3. A certain American of Chumbivilca, in the Province of Cusco, named Gualpa, was hunting thereabouts for venison; and being forced to use his hands to climb up a part of the mountain that was rocky, and had some few bushes growing upon it, by chance laid hold upon a little shrub, which grew out of a vein of the silver, and strained himself so much to get up, that he pulled up the branch by the roots, perceiving in the hole or place where the root grew, some quantity of metal; which upon better view and some experience he had of the Mines at Porco, not above six leagues distant from thence, he found to be very good: whereupon he began to look better about him, and found presently scattered up and down on the surface of the earth, several other pieces of the same metal, but a little changed in colour, by reason they had lain open (a long time perhaps) to the rain and weather; which yet only upon carrying to Porco, he quickly found to be good metal, and what a brave fortune he had met with by his hunting. And for some time he managed his business warily and happily, drawing silver continually out of his Mine, as much as he could desire. But it was not long before a companion, or friend of his, whose name was Guanca, perceived so much of it, that he made shift to become Sharer with him in the Mine: and so they two enjoyed for a while the richest Mine in the world; and might have done so much longer but for their own covetuousness and dissension. It happened that the part of the Mine, which this New-comer Guanca had chosen proved not so much to his liking, as he expected, and therefore he desired to share in common with Gualpa in his Mine; which was not better metal than the others was, but more easy to get forth: but Gualpa refused; and the other was so much provoked upon it, that, being but a Servant to one Villaroel a Spaniard of Porco, he presently discovers the whole business to his Master: who thereupon making search, and finding the metal good, and the Mine likely to be rich, immediately repairs to the King's Officers, makes known the Mine, and procures his Servant Guanca, to be enroled first discoverer of it, and together with him undertakes the vein, as they call it, that is, procures so much land about the Mine to be marked out and allotted, as the Law alloweth unto those that first discover a Mine, which is some certain yards round about the plot, and to those that will undertake to dig and search it. By this means they become Lords of the Mine, having liberty to dig and draw forth the silver as their own, paying the King his Tribute, which is the fifth part of what they draw forth. 4. There were presently upon this three or four other principal veins of the Mine discovered upon this Mountain; of which, that which is called the rich one they report, that at first it ran along in a ridge, above the surface of the earth or plain ground, the full height of a Lance, three hundred foot together in length, and thirteen or fourteen foot broad, continuing likewise in this proportion of bounty and richness above fifty or threescore stades, or so many times the height of a man within ground, They had digged by the year 1588. two hundred stades deep into the ground, still following the Mine; which because it runs not directly downward, but sloping somewhat in the mountain, they suppose it will be above a thousand or twelve hundred stades before they come at the root of the Mine, or the foot of the hill. This Mine yielded at the first one hundred and fifty, or two hundred thousand pesoes every week into the Register of the Contractation house, as they call it, and the King, by the year abovesaid, had received out of it no less than a hundred millions of pieces of Assay, that is, if I understand my Author aright, so many millions of such pieces as they carry to the Assay-master, to be tried and marked by him, when it is refined: which helps well to verify what he saith in another place, that in the Fleet of the year 1587., in which Acosta, came from the Indies, there came along with it eleven millions of Treasure, of which near the one half belonged to the King. The labour in these Mines, as I intimated before, is excessively difficult and hard, the Air they have very gross, extreme cold and unwholesome for any body not used to it: they work night and day without ceasing, only by Candle-light, without other knowledge or distinction of day and night, save what they gather by their work, or by their weariness, and desire to be at rest. But that which seems most grievous of all is the labour and danger of carrying the metal out of the Mines; which they do thus. They have Ladders of three branches or rows, made of Neat's hides, so strongly twisted in thongs, that it yields not to wood for strength or toughness, and supposed to endure the air of the Mines longer than wood would do; these are commonly ten stades high, and at the foot of them there is a kind of Scaffold or stage built in form of a Gallery, with seats and other conveniences, to rest upon. The rows of the Ladders are so framed together with wood, & at such distance, that, if occasion be, they may both mount and descend together. Every man carries the weight of fifty or threescore pound of metal upon his back, tied up in a Wallet or cloth, in such manner cast over and fastened to his head, as he is sure enough for losing his charge, and the whole weight of the metal resteth upon his shoulders behind. They mount commonly three and three together, the foreman carrying the light, which is a candle so fastened to the thumb of one of his hands, as he may use all the other part of his hand to hold by; which is more than needs. For many times, in such great altitude, going or coming, their hold slips, or by some other mischance, the poor Miners come to the ground sooner than they would, losing their lives by the fall, or at least are so maimed and broken with it, that many times death were better than life to them. This was at first the manner of working and labouring in the Mines at Potozi, till they had digged in several veins above two hundred stades deep within ground: Since that time, to remedy the inconveniences and trouble that came by carrying out the metal at the Top of the Mine in so great an height, they have invented Soccabons, as they call them, which are certain countermines, as it were, wrought in from the sides or lower parts of the mountain, in a level line towards that part of the mountain where the vein of the metal runs, and to which the Mine that was begun at the top is brought. By this means they enter the Mines now to work, and export the metal with much more ease, and less danger than formerly, both at Potozi and all other places generally, where there are Mines. These Soccabons, or cross-Mines, are commonly about eight or ten foot in breadth, and somewhat more than a stade in height; which they keep shut at several places with doors, for the security of the passage. One of them, viz. that which was made to meet the rich vein, as they call it, is said to have been above twenty years in the digging and making; containing well nigh three hundred yards in length, before it came at the vein of metal; in all which way they were forced to make their passage and work through the hard and flinty bowels of the mountain, with excessive toil and labour; and the Soccabons of the other Mines cost not much less either of time or pains: So great charges, pains, and peril, are men content to be at for a thing of naught; for that which is nothing else, for the most part to them, but an instrument of trouble, vexation, and sin. 5. Something must be said likewise (before we leave this subject) of the Gems and precious Stones, that are found at the New World, they being so considerable a part of the riches and wealth of it. These are chief (at least for aught I yet perceive) Emeralds and Pearls; of which there is so great plenty at the West-Indies, that the abundance of them makes them the less esteemed, verifying herein a pretty passage of story, reported to have happened betwixt a Spaniard of the West-Indies, and an Italian in Italy. The Spaniard was newly come from America richly freighted, having brought over with him, amongst other things of value, a great quantity of fair and goodly Emeralds; whereof showing one (a very fair stone) to the Italian, who he knew had skill, and used to deal in such commodities, he asked what it was worth? The Italian, upon sight of it, answered roundly, he thought it worth one hundred Ducats. Being showed another of more exquisite lustre and form, he prized it at three hundred: Whereupon the Spaniard, having good store of them, and tickled with hopes of extraordinary gain by them, would needs carry the Merchant home to his lodging, and shown him a casket full of them. The Italian seeing such a quantity of them together, Sir, said he, If you have such store, I will give you crowns apiece for them, and they will not be worth much more either to you or me: intimating thereby, that stones are chief estimated according to the rarity and scarsness of them: which was very true, though it grieved the Spaniard not a little. The Emerald, according to the report of Pliny, if it be a right and perfect stone of that kind, is the most pleasant and delightsome Gem to the eye that is, of an exquisite verdure or green colour; yea, they say, it is not only agreeable and pleaseth the sight very much, but that it attracts it also with a strange kind of efficacy, so as a man seems not satisfied with looking upon it, but desires to view it still more and more; that it fortifieth the faculty visive, and restoreth it when it is dim and decayed by overmuch attended looking upon any thing: and therefore Lapidaries, and men that cut or engrave fine stones, have usually some of them lying by them, only to refresh and revive their sight, when they perceive it fail them, or grow weak at any time. To which end, viz. the better to please and affect the sight, they are shaped or cut, for the most part with some hollowness in them, whereby the visual rays, as they are called, being united and strengthened one with another, do give the greater lustre. They are said to appear both fairer and bigger at a distance, nor do they change or abate their lustre, either for Sun, shade, candlelight, or otherwise, as most of the other sorts of Gems usually do, more or less: and as they are commonly of the bigness, so are they not much under the value of a Diamond, if they be of the best and perfect sort of Emeralds: For all are not such. There are some of so exquisite and admirable lustre, as nothing can be desired more; in others the green is more dark and clouded: and lastly, some are spotted; but those are commonly held to be counterfeit. Those which the fortunate Cortes, after the conquest of Mexico, presented to his new Spouse, the Lady Jane Zuniga, were extraordinary, and thought to be the rarest in the World. They were five of them, of most exquisite colour and perfection; and of such bigness, that they were wrought into several figures and shapes of things: viz. one in the fashion of a Coronet, or little Crown; another of a Rose, fair and great; the third was like to a Fish, with the eyes of gold, counted an admirable piece of Indian work; the fourth was wrought in the fashion of a Bell, having for its clapper a great and rich pearl, engraven round about with this Motto, Sea Bendito qui te criava, in English, Blessed is he that created thee; the fifth was like a Cup, with the foot and brim of gold, and four little chains of gold, all joining together at the top or cover of it, in a great pearl. 'Tis said that the Merchants of Genoa offered no less sum than 40000. Ducats for one of them, which they would have presented to the great Turk; but were refused: And though I confess there be some of much greater bigness mentioned in Pliny, yet doubtless these were very rare stones both for bigness, workmanship, and perfection. They grow usually in other stones like to Crystal, and the greatest plenty of them is in the new Kingdom of Granada, and in the Province of Veragua, and especially about the Cities of Manta and Port Vieil; where there is a whole Country, or little Province, which they call de las Esmaldas, or the Land of Emeralds, from the abundance of them, that are supposed to be there, and which the Spaniards had not yet subdued, when my Author wrote: and they send usually three or four hundred weight of this kind of Gems only into Spain, one year with another. 6. Of Pearls, which anciently were counted the only Gem, both for price and excellency, and such as Princes only, and persons of very noble quality used, there is such plenty of them at the new World, that the very Negro Servants, or She slaves, are said to wear Chains and Bracelets of them. These grow in Oysters, or a certain shellfish much resembling Oysters, and bearing that name; and are fetched up from the bottom of the Sea by the poor Indians that are forced to dive for them. 'Tis true, the Indians, through necessity and custom, are become wonderfully apt and ready at this work, even almost beyond belief. They will descend commonly ten or twenty fathom deep into the water, and stay there an hour, or the better part of an hour, plucking the shel-fishes from the hard Rocks, or searching for them in the gravelly corners and chinks under water, till they have filled the satchels or bags which they carried down with them; or that want of breath enforceth them to come up. Howbeit if the Sea be very deep, or not calm, they find much difficulty to abide under water, and therefore tie commonly certain stones of good weight about them, only to keep them down, which are exceeding painful to them all the time they are under water, beside the danger they are in to be destroyed by the Tyburons, and other preying fishes, whiles they are there. But when they have a mind to come up, 'tis but unloosing of the stones, and they mount presentiy, being counted the most expert Swimmers in the World: To which likewise their own dry, withered, and lean complexions do dispose them very much; being, for the most part, of very thin and spare bodies, and dieted on purpose for this service, with the driest meat which their hard Masters can procure for them, and that also in small quantity and with but scant allowance. The Pearls differ much from one another, both in fashion, colour, bigness, and polishing, and they seldom find two of them altogether alike: when they do, it much enhanceth the price and estimation of them, even where they are most common; a pair of such Pearls having been valued, at the Indies themselves, at a thousand Ducats. They are counted the most excellent which are of an Orient white colour, bright and clear, like the finest Allom, big, weighty, and especially if they be round; which is counted such a singular rarity in this Gem, that Oviedo tells us of himself, he once bought a Pearl at the Indies, not much bigger than the pellet of some Cross bow, for which he gave 650. times the weight of it in good gold, upon no other special account, but only because it was round. They fish for Pearls upon all the coasts of America, and the Islands generally more or less, but especially in the South-Sea about Panama and the Island Margarita, so called from the abundance of them which they have found there: and in the North-Sea, about the Islands of Cumana, Cubagna, Rio de la Hacha, and other places, which are commonly found bigger than those of the South Sea. And although it be the opinion of some, grounded upon the covetousness of the Spaniards, when they first came into those parts (who spared not the very feed or mother of the Pearl itself, but swept & took all that came to hand) that the profit of Pearl-fishing is much decayed, of what it was; yet if it be true what the same Oviedo tells us, I should think it may be otherwise, and the trade good still. For he saith, These Pearl-Oysters come by shoals successively into the places where they are usually taken; and that though a bank in the Sea be swept never so clean of them by the Pearl-fishers, yet not far off they find always more, and likewise in the same place good plenty of them again in a short time. The End of the first Part. AMERICA: ¶ The second Part. Containing The topographical description of the several Provinces, both of the Northern and Southern part: With some other Observations incident thereunto: By N. N. Printed by R. Hodgkinson for E. Dod. CHAP. I. Of the general division of the New World into Continent and Islands; and of the two parts of the Continent, viz. the Northern and the Southern. 1. AMerica, or the New World (as we have said before) is itself most generally thought to be but an Island (though a very huge one) and to be surrounded on all parts by the Sea: not only on the East, West, and South, (as is already found by experience) but also towards the North; where it is likewise supposed to be divided from the Continent of Asia, by the Sea running between. Nevertheless for distinction sake, and by reason it is of such a vast extent, as that it equalleth and far exceedeth any other part of the World, how great soever, that is counted or called Continent, it seems not amiss to express the whole under this division, viz. of Continent and Islands: understanding by the first, viz. Continent, only the main Land, or more principal Provinces of America, which lie united together, and extend themselves, in one continued tract, from the Northern to the Southern borders; and by the latter, the Islands which lie about the main Land, and, though some of them at a good distance from it, yet as well by reason of situation, as for that they were discovered and conquered at the same time with the other, are generally taken and reckoned for part of the New World. That which we call the Continent of America, is divided generally into two parts, which are two great Peninsulas, or ●emy-Islands, environed on all parts by the Sea, save only in the midst; where they are joined together by a certain Isthmus, or neck of Land, which they call the Strait of Darien, lying almost under the Equinoctial Line, in some few degrees of Northern latitude: which runneth in length from the district of Panama, as they call it, and Nombre de Dios to the Southward, about an hundred miles or more, but in breadth from East to West, or from the North to the South Sea, is nothing answerable; being in some places not above seventeen or eighteen miles over. These two Peninsulas are generally counted the Northern and Southern parts of America; so called from their situation, in respect of the Equator: the one of them lying wholly Northward of the Equinoctial Line, and the other, at least for the greatest part of it, Southward. They contained anciently (beside many huge and vast Provinces, governed, for the most part, by Royteletts, or certain petty Princes in each respective Province or Territorie, whom they called Casiques) two great and mighty Kingdoms; the one of Cusco, generally called the Kingdom of Peru, in the Southern part; and the other of Mexico, now called new Spain, in the Northern: of both which, and likewise of the manner of the first conquering and subduing of them by the Spaniards, when time was, something shall be said in due place. 2. The Mexican, or Northern part of America, containeth these several Provinces, viz. 1. Estotiland, 2. Canada, or New France, 3. Virginia, 4. Florida, 5. Califormia, 6. New Gallicia, 7. New Spain, or Mexicana properly so called; and lastly 8. Guatimala, together with some other lesser Islands, so nearly adjoining to the Continent, that they are usually reckoned for part of it, by those which describe the Country; and therefore shall be mentioned in their several places accordingly, viz. as parts of the respective Provinces upon which they lie. The Peruvian, or Southern, part containeth these which follow, viz. 1. Castilia del oro, as the Spaniards call it, or golden Castille, 2. Nova Granada, 3. Peru, 4. Chile, 5. Paraguay, 6. Brasil, 7. Guiana, and lastly Paria, or new Andalusia, as some call it. The Islands which lie further off from the main Land, but yet reckoned commonly for part of the New World, by reason they were discovered, as hath been said, and for the greater part conquered and subdued with it, are chief those called 1. Los Ladrones, 2. the Islands of Solomon, which lie in the South Sea: and in the Northern, 1. the Caribee Islands, 2. St. John de Port-rico, 3. Hispaniola, 4 Jamaica, and 5. Cuba; of all which in their order, according to the method of the latest, and, as I presume, the exactest Cosmographers, viz. of our learned Countryman Dr. Heylyn, and his Author Laet: upon whom I must profess to rest very much in this part of my report, especially as to the site and position of Places. CHAP. II. Of Estotiland, and the several Provinces which it containeth. 1. THe first Province of the Continent of America towards the North, is called Estotiland; for what reason I must plainly confess, I cannot so clearly discover; unless perhaps our Neighbours the Duchess happened to have the first naming of it, and that it beareth any signification of its Easterly lying in respect of the other Provinces. It containeth all those Regions of the Mexican or Northern part of America, which lie furthest toward the North East: on which side, as likewise more directly Eastward, it is washed all along with the main Ocean, or North-Sea; having on the South Canada, or new France: Westward, and to the Northwest, it is not yet fully discovered: but supposed either to be joined to some parts of Tartary, or (which I think is the more common conjecture to be divided from it by the Sea: which some, presuming it to be but a narrow Sea, call the Streits of Anian, from a Province or part of the Asiatic Tartary, which beareth that name, and lieth upon it. On the North it hath a Bay, or large Inlet of the Sea, which the English call hudson's Streites from Capt. Henry Hudson an Englishman, who in the year 1610 is said to have sailed in this Sea no less than three hundred leagues Westward, in search of a passage that way to the Kingdoms of Catha and China; of which we have spoken already, and which was so much endeavoured in those times both by ourselves and our neighbours the Dutch: but without success hitherto. The whole Province containeth these particular Countries, if I may so call them, or Prefectships, as some others do, viz. First, Estotiland more properly so called. Secondly, Terra Corterialis. Thirdly, Newfound land, and Fourthly certain Islands near adjoining to the Continent, which they call Baccaleos. 2. Estotiland specially so called, is the most Northerly region of all America towards the East, lying betwixt the abovesaid Hudsons' Sreights, which it hath on the North, and Terra Corterialis on the South. The soil of the country is said to be reasonably good, and well stored with natural Commodities, I mean, such as are of necessity and may be expected in such a cold northerly quarter, as Flesh, fowl, and good store of Fish in the Sea. Among the Natives of the country there, and some Savage that live wild up and down in the Woods, and go naked, not withstanding the extreme cold: but for the most part, they are supposed at least to be more civil. The first discoverers of the country reporting of them, that they both sow corn, brew Beer and Ale, use Canoas' or little Boats at Sea, by which they trade with Greenland, Freezland, and other parts at one thousand or five hundred mile's distance from them. They are said likewise to have some use of letters, but of a Character proper only to their own Nation, and not understood by any other people beside themselves. Yea they talk likewise, as if they had some knowledge of the Latin tongue; and of certain Latin books in a Library of one of the Kings of the Country: wherein, if there be any thing of truth, (as I hold it not altogether impossible) 'tis likely, some people from the more Northerly parts of Europe, that understood the Latin tongue, might in times past be cast on shore, or suffer Shipwreck upon those Coasts; where being constrained to live and abide, they might leave some books, and other monuments of the Language behind them in the Country after their decease. However it be, this seems more certain, by the report and experience of some English, that the people are generally here found to be more ingenious, to have better judgement in things, and to be much more skilful in divers Mechanical arts, then usually in these other parts of America they were at first. Among other things they were observed to use a kind of Dart, or short Javelin, pointed with bright steel and very sharp: which being a kind of Weapon used only by the people of Java, and some other of the Islands of the East Indies, it is conjectured, that they have commerce one with another: which seems not altogether improbable. But as for the Towns, Cities and great Castles among them, which some speak of, and of the Temples, wherein they sacrificed men, (though that be an ancient and general custom among the Americans, and those of this Country barbarous enough to do it) yet the Reader perhaps will be willing to suspend his belief a while: as likewise he will, for the supposed Mines of gold and silver there: of which (at least as it may seem) the Northerly situation of the Country doth not well permit us to have such strong presumption. Of Brass and Iron, 'tis likely enough there may be good store, if the Country were searched. But as yet the knowledge thereof, especially concerning the more Inland parts; remains very imperfect. Some English Adventurers passing that way, have left names to certain Capes or Headlands upon the Northern Coasts of it, and that is all: the chief of which are these, viz. Cape Elizabeth at the entrance into Hudsons' straits Northward. Prince Henry's Foreland. Cape Charles. Kings Foreland with with divers others, more to the South. Cape Wostenholme and Digges his Island about the mouth of the Straight; where it opens itself and disembogues into a large and capacious Bay, called (as abovesaid) hudson's Bay, and dividing these uttermost Provinces of the Northern America into two parts, which some call the Eastern and Western point; as may be seen in the Maps. The people of the Country, that are any thing civilised, cloth themselves commonly with Beasts skins, and with the skins of the Sea-calves otherwise called Morses; which are a kind of Fish of an Amphibious nature, much abounding in those Northern Seas, of the bigness of a young Heifer, or Bullock of two years old, which they hunt and take in great numbers, especial where the Whalefishing is not so good; and draw a good quantity of oil from them, which they call Train-oile, as they do from the Whale. The flesh of them is counted reasonable good meat, of a taste somewhat like Pork: and on each side of their upper Jaw there groweth out a long tooth, or Tusk, crooked and bending downward, not unlike to that of an Elephant, each of them a Cubit long sometimes and more, of a substance white and very hard like Ivory; for which it commonly passeth. And it were well, if the deceit rested there, and went no further. For as it seems, there are some that vend it for Unicorns horn and attribute I know not what strange and sovereign virtues to it. An egregious imposture, of which the learned Doctor Brown doth likewise (as his manner is) acutely and kindly admonish us. lib. 3. chap. 23. of his Psudodox. Epidemio, above mentioned. 3. Terra Corterialis is a Province, or Country of this Northern part of America, lying Southward of Estotiland, and Northward of New-France or Canada, being so named from Gaspar Corterialis a Portughese Gentleman, who in the year 1500 or thereabouts first discovered these parts, and gave name to the Country; but did not much beside. For returning the next year after, with intention to make a further discovery, 'tis supposed he was shipwreck and drowned at Sea together with his company; of whom, as Osorius in his history of Portugal, witnesseth never any returned or were heard of: and the like misfortune befell his Brother Michael Corterialis the next year after; who setting out two Ships to search and inquire of, concerning the fortunes of his Brother Gaspar, perished likewise in his design, being himself lost and all his men: upon which disasters the Portugheses quite give over the Country, and the French succeed them, naming the Country New Bretain, in reference to Bretain in France, which it seems, was their native Country. This was about the year 1504 The soil of this Country is very lusty and good, for all sorts of grain generally, and yields a great advantage to the Husbandman, but not without good pains taking in the tillage and managing of it: For which reason it is called by some Terra di labrador, or the land that requires Labourers; in allusion perhaps to Terra di lavora, or the Country of Campania in Italy, so called from a like property. The people of the Country, of themselves barbarous and savage enough, are said to be civilised and bettered in their manners by the conversation of the French. They live much upon Fish, are excellent Archers, jealous of their Wives, and dwell for the most part in Caves under ground; being also much given to Soothsaying & Divining; further than which they seem not to have much knowledge, or sense of any thing that concerns religion. The Country was first of all discovered by Sir Sebastion Cabot, at the charges of Henery the seventh, King of England, as hath been said; but it was only discovered, and the design laid wholly aside, by reason of some domestic troubles, and a War which the King then had with the Scots: whereupon the After-comers took leave to enter. The Towns or places, which the French have built since, are chiefly, 1. Breast, 2. St. Marry, and 3. Cabo Marzo, as they call it; of which there is little more to be said. 4. Terra Nova, or Newfound land, the third part of this Northerly Province of America, is a great Island, lying on the South of Corterialis, from which it is divided by a Frith, or narrow Sea, which the French call Golf de Chastieux. This place is chief frequented for fishing; of which there is such plenty all along the Coasts of this Island, and likewise of Terra Corterialis adjoining to it, that the huge Shoales of Codfish do sometimes stay their Ships under sail: besides great store of other fish, both of salt water and fresh, as namely Herrings, Salmon, Thornback, Smelts, excellent Oysters, and Muscles that are said to have a kind of Pearl in them; but of what quality or value, doth not so well appear. The Land within is likewise reported to be a very good Country, plentifully stored with Deer and other sorts of Venison, Pheasants, Partridges, Swans, with variety of other good Fowl; lastly of a temperate Air and Soil, not barren: only the people of it are said to be few, and to inhabit chief the Western and Northwest parts of it. But this perhaps may be rather out of fear, and to avoid the conversation of Strangers; which at first they would not endure but fled at the sight of them, being themselves altogether Savage and wild. But since 'tis said, they grow more tractable, and will be hired, in time of year, by the Portugheses, and other Nations that fish commonly for Whales in the Bay of St. Laurence, and other places thereabouts, to help them in the opening of their Whales, boiling the fish, and drawing out the Oil; wherein they that will be got to it, are extremely diligent and ready to take pains. They are commonly of but mean stature, full eyed, somewhat broad-faced, and for the most part beardless. Their houses are only certain long Poles, set an end sloping upwards towards the top, where they are fastened together, and covered downwards with the skins of Beasts, having in the midst their hearth, or place to make fire upon. But that which is most remarkable about this Island, is the many and fair Havens which it affordeth on all sides for shipping: in which respect it is though, for the bigness, scarcely to be paralleled by any other Island or Place in the World: not indeed beautified with any great Towns, or stately buildings, as some are, but affording commodious and secure station for the tallest ships that come before it; the chief whereof are these: 1. La Roigneuse, or Rennosa, as it is called, six leagues Northward of the Cape Raye, which lieth at the Southeast angle of the Island; a place much resorted unto for fishing, from all parts. 2. Portus formosus, or the fair Haven, three miles Northward of the other; capable of great ships, and bearing at least four or five miles within Land, or more. 3. Thornbay, called otherwise by the Portugheses Enseada grande, or the great Bay, for distinction sake. 4. Trinity Bay, on the North of the Cape St. Francis, called by the Spaniards Baia de la conception. This is likewise a very large and capacious Bay, five miles over, where it is narrowest, having divers great Rivers falling into it, and some little Islands lying scatteringly up and down in it, yet safe, and affording very good Anchorage and riding for ships in most parts. 5. Bay Blanch, as the French call it, or Whitebay, on the North of the Cape or Promontory of St. John. On the South side of the Island, and Westward of Cape Raye, there is, 1. Port Trespass, an excellent and secure Harbour, having always a reasonable deep Sea, without shallows or Rocks. 2. Port St. Marry, six leagues distant from it. 3. Port Presenza, by others called Placenza, on the other side of Cape St. Marry, towards the West. 4. Port du Basques, or the Biscayners Haven; and lastly on the West side of the Island, after you have doubled Cape Raye, there is at George's Bay, all of them secure stations, large and of great resort. 5. Before this Island, right over against Cape Ray, at a distance of twenty four leagues or more, there lieth an huge Bank or ridge of Land, extending itself in length, out of the Sea, some hundred of leagues, if my Author mistake not; but in breadth not above four or five and twenty, when it is broadest: and in other parts much less, sharpening towards each end into a Conus or narrow point. It is counted one of the Marveils of the Sea; which round about it, at some distance, is very deep, and hardly to be sounded, especially betwixt the Bank, (for so they commonly call it) and Cape Ray, but drawing nearer it grows by degrees more and more shallow; insomuch that nigh the Land, there is not much more water than is necessary for the ships riding. It runneth out in length, as was said, from North to South, from forty one degrees of latitude to fifty two; and round about it there lie scattered a multitude of lesser Islands; which Sir Sebastian Cabot, when he first discovered, the place called by one common name Los Baccaleos, or the Islands of Codfish, from the great quantity of that sort of fish he there found: which was such, that they hindered the passage of his ships, and lay in such multitudes upon the Coasts, that the very Bears would come and catch them in their claws, and draw them to Land. This place, I say, with the rest was first discovered by Sir Sebastian Cabot, upon the English account; howbeit the matter happened to be laid aside upon the aforesaid occasions; till in King Henery the eight his time, it was revived again by Thorn and Eliot, two Merchants of Bristol, but without success: after which the Portugheses, French, and other Nations, resort to it and change the names which the first discoverers had given to the Bays and Capes thereabouts. But the English not relinquishing their pretensions of premier discovery and seisin, about the year 1583 Sir Humphrey Gilbert took possession of it again, in the name of Queen Elizabeth, and prohibited all Nations the liberty of fishing there, without the Queen of England's leave. But he being unhappily wracked in his coming home, the business was again discontinued for a time, viz. till the year 1608, when it was undertaken a new by John Guy, another Merchant of Bristol; and with so good success, that the Colony in a short time were well furnished with Wheat, Rye, Barley, and other grain of their own sowing, with Turnips, Coleworts, and abundance of other necessary things, not without some probable hopes of Metals, a certain and plentiful trade of Sables, Musk, and other rich Commodities, and such excellent good fishing, especially for Codfish and Ling, that 'tis said some Englishmen do ordinarily take two or three hundred of them in the space of three or four hours; which from thence they convey, as a sure and ready Merchandise, into most parts of Europe. CHAP. III. Of Canada and the Countries belonging to it. 1 CAnada, or New France, is a large Province of this Northern part of America, bounded Northward with Terra Corterialis abovesaid, and on the South with that part of Virginia which is called New England: on the East it is washed with the Ocean or North Sea; the Western borders of it being not yet fully discovered or known. It hath its name from the River Canada, which watereth the whole Province, running through the midst of it, and is counted one of the fairest and greatest Rivers of America; where yet it is suppposed there are the fairest and greatest of all the World beside. It hath its head or spring in those undiscovered parts of this Northerly tract, which remain yet unknown; and runs generally with a large and violent stream, having in it many Cataracts, or falls of the Water, as it were, from some Rocks lying in the channels which renders the passage of it up the stream extremely difficult, and downwards no less dangerous. In some places it swells and spreads itself out into large and huge Lakes, containing, some of them, one hundred miles in compass, and having divers small Islands scattered up and down in them: after which it is presently again reduced into a narrower channel, of a league or two leagues broad generally. Thus it runneth turning and winding up and down the Country, as 'tis supposed, some hundred of leagues from its head-spring; till at last having received into its channel many lesser Rivers of the Country, it empties itself into a great Bay, which they call the Bay of St. Laurence; being at the mouth no less thin thirty or forty leagues broad, as it is said, and one hundred and fifty fathom deep of water. The French Authors report, that it hath been actually searched for above one thousand two hundred miles and upward from the Bay: and that the Savages living thereabouts, do speak confidently, of certain Bays of Salt-water more towards the South; and of great vessels which they have seen that way: which, if true, must necessarily be from the South Sea. But I perceive not that any farther enquiry hath been made by them about it; as doubtless a business of so great importance would deserve, viz. to find such a commodious and easy passage into the South Sea, and thereby to the other Indies. Therefore I suppose those relations are not much credited. The Country on both sides the River, is reasonably pleasant and fertile, especially on the South or South-west of it; where it seemeth to be a little mountainous, the ground ascending, for the most part upwards from the River, and rising with many little hills, clad most of them with Vines, of which there is great abundance in the Country, and other trees, and divided frequently with other lesser streams, which at several places do all of them fall into the great River. In this Country the French hitherto, I suppose, have made the greatest discoveries of any other Nation; yet not the first, but following the tract of Corterialis and Sir Sebastian Cabot, that went before them. The whole Country containeth these particular Provinces, or subdivisions, viz. 1. New-France, more especially so called. 2. Nova-Scotia. 3. Norimbegua: and 4. some Islands adjoining. 2. New-France, specially so called, lieth on the North-side of the River Canada, somewhat what inclining towards the East; and on the South of Terra Corterialis: but in the Western, or more inland parts, the River divideth it in the midst, the French having seated themselves on both sides of it. The Country naturally aboundeth with Staggs, and other sorts of wild Deer, Bears, Marterns, Foxes, and Hares; of which last there is such plenty, that the French call one of the Islands, Isle aux Lieures, or the Island of Hares. They have likewise good store of Coneys: Fish and Fowl in abundance; only they complain the Winter is long, that the Snow lieth upon the ground sometimes till a good part of May be past, and that the Northwest wind, especially in Winter, blows very cold there, and brings abundance of Snow with it. The Country hath very much wood; but otherwise of a Soil not unapt for Corn, especially Pulse, and such like grain; of which it affordeth extraordinary increase. But the peculiar Commodity of the Country seems to be their Chains of Esurgnuy, as they call it, which some say is only a kind of shellfish of exceeding white colour; yet found to be of sovereign virtue for the staunching of blood: in which respect they make both Beads and Bracelets of them, and not only use them, but vend them also as a chief Commodity; though others, as Laet, out of the Commentaries of the Frenchmen themselves, seem to report otherwise, and to describe the use and making of Esurgnuy only as a piece of superstition among the Savages, about some dead men. The People, when the French came first among them, were altogether rude and barbarous, as the most part of them continue still; living generally without houses or any certain places of abode; go naked, save only that they have a little piece of some Beast's skin bound about their middle. Those about the Sea coasts live most upon fishing; which they practise in certain light boats, which at night they are able to draw to draw to Land, without much help; and but turning the bottom upward, they serve them for an house to sleep in. The Country affords good plenty of Maiz in many places, but it is said to be the women's work both to dig the ground and sow it; the Men giving themselves to no kind of labour, but only of hunting and fishing. Among many other bad enough, they are said to have one vile custom among them, which is, that the young Maidens, when they are fourteen or fifteen years old, have leave to prostitute themselves to all Comers; and that they marry not usually, till they have thus satiated themselves with promiscuous lust for the space of 4 or 5 years together: after which, notwithstanding they take husbands, and prove so extremely loving and constant (if a man could believe it) that they never marry twice, but after their rude manner mourn for their Husbands all their life long. They have some few Towns; the chief whereof are these, viz. 1. Hochelaga, said to be the seat and residence of a King of this Country, which at least some of the Natives acknowledge, and exceedingly reverence, carrying him sometimes in great pomp upon their shoulders, sitting upon a Carpet of Beasts skins. This Town, if there be any such (for it must be confessed, the reports concerning it are not so certain) is situate far within Land, at a distance of six or seven leagues from the River Canada; and is a kind of fortified place, encompassed about with a threefold course of Timber-ramparts one within another, of about two Rods high from the ground, with cross planks or pieces of Timber, laid out on purpose to hinder the scaling, or getting up, by an Enemy. Towards the top there is, as it were, a Scaffold or Gallery framed, from whence they may throw down stones (of which there is always good store ready) or what else they have to annoy the assailants. It hath one only Gate for entrance, and that likewise well fortified, after their manner. There are said to be in it fifty or threescore great houses, built, (as the manner of the Americans generally is, that use houses) in a square figure, each side being about fifty foot long or more, and sixteen or twenty broad, but not many stories high; and in the midst of the Court or void space, a place to make their fire, and do other necessary work about it. The Country round about this Town pleasant and good. 2. Stadac, or as some call it Stadacone, another Town of the Natives, not far from the Isle d' Orleans Westward. 3. Quebeque, another old Town, which the French, having first expelled the Natives, and made it a Colony of their own, have since named St. Croix. 4. Tadousac, a Town lying at the mouth of the River Saguenay, having a small Haven, but very safe, and capable of ten or twenty good ships. 5. Franceroy: This is little more than a Castle and Fort, built by Mounsieur Robeval, a French man, at his first landing there, about the year 1540 And lastly St. Lewis, a place which the French designed for a Colony, in the year 1611, under the command of Monsieur Champlain; but it came not to effect, by reason of the Iroquois, a Savage and warlike People on the Southside of the River Canada, who do often trouble and alarm the French in their Quarters, and particularly hindered this Plantation. 3. Nova-Scotia, or New-Scotland, is a part of this Province of America, so named by Sir William Alexander, a Scottish Gentleman, to whom King James gave it by Letters Patents, in the year 1621., being made afterwards Secretary of State for Scotland; and after that, by King Charles, Earl of Sterling. It containeth all that part of the Province of Canada, or New-France, which the French call Accadie, or sometimes Cadia, (which properly is only a Peninsula, or half Island lying thereabouts) together with so much of the main Land as lieth between the River Canada, and the Bay Francoise, that is, reaching from the River of St. Croix, upon the West, to the Isle of Assumption in the East. This was done presently after that Sir Samuel Argall, Governor of Virginia, had outed the French of all their possessions on the Southside of Canada, that is, such as lay within the bounds of Virginia and New-England, where they had not any thing to do; much less to molest and make-warre upon such people as lived quietly under the protection of the English. But the Patentee after sometime, finding that to plant and maintain Colonies, was no business to be undertaken by a single person, sold port-royal, which was the principal place he had there, to the French, and wholly discontinued his endeavours in the rest, which the French therefore have since possessed. The places of chief importance in this Country are, 1. port-royal above mentioned. This was first a Colony of French, planted there, by Monsieur de Montz about the year 1604. but being destroyed by the English from Virginia, about the year 1613. it was granted to Sir William Alexander; who as we heard, sold it back again to the French, and they took possession of it the second time, and upon another account. Howbeit, if report speak true, as the affairs of the world are always uncertain, it is now again very lately taken from them by some English, commanded by Major Sedgwick. It hath a reasonable good Haven belonging to it, of a mile broad and more within, and two miles in length: the mouth or entrance being somewhat narrower, but near upon a mile over. 2. St. Luke's Bay, so named by the Colony which Sir William Alexander sent thither; but by the French Port au Mouton, or Sheep's Bay. 3. Gaspe or Gachepe, another fair Port right over against the Isle of Assumption. 4. To the South-west of Nova Scotia, and Nothward of Virginia, lieth the Country of Norim begua, so generally called, and as it hath been thought, from a great City or Town in this Province, or from a River bearing the same name. But as for the first, later discoveries find none such; and as for the River that should be called Norimbegua; it is likewise swallowed up in that which is more truly called Pemtegovet: which is indeed a fair River running many miles together in this Tract, but not well navigable above twenty or thirty at the most, by reason of the Cataracts or great falls of water which it hath; and which are an inconvenience incident unto many other Rivers of the New World, and doth make them at several places unpassable. The mouth of this River is said to be eight or nine miles broad having many little mountainous Islands lying before and about it; one whereof the French call La Isle haute, from the great height which it seemeth to bear to them at Sea. Westward of this River Pemtegovet, at a distance of twenty or thirty miles there emptyeth itself another great River into the Sea, which they call Quinnebequi, but the English, as Laet reporteth, Sagadahoc: betwixt and about which two Rivers the chief and most known parts of this Country of Norimbegua lieth, saving only a small Southerly Tract upon another River which they call Chovacovet. The air of this whole Country is found to be of a very good temperature, and the soil, if it were used, supposed to be no less fruitful; especially towards the Rivers, and where it is not mountainous or overgrown with Woods, as it is in some parts; where yet it affords much good Timber, abundance of Walnut trees, and of other Nuts, Firre-trees, Beech, with much other necessary and useful wood: elsewhere there is as much good pasturage and very fair plains; only the Sea Coasts are said to be shallow and full of sands; so that the sailing near is generally accounted but dangerous; and which I suppose, may be some, reason why there occurs not upon these Coasts, any particular Ports or havens, which as yet Authors seem to have thought worthy of their report. 5. There are adjoining to these parts of Canada or New-France, certain Islands, which although they come not under any one common name, yet it seems most fit, that we should take notice of them as Appurtenances to this Country. The Principal of these are, 1. Natiscotec, or the Isle of Assumption, situate in the very mouth of the great River of Canada. It was discovered first in the year 1534. by Jaques Cartier a French man, and contains in length thirty leagues or more, but in breadth not much above seven or eight. The Island is for the most part very plain and level, and of a soil fruitful enough if it had Inhabitants: plentifully stored both with fowl and fish, having convenient roads but no very good harbours for Ships to stand and abide in. 2. Rameae. These are, as it were, a Fry of Islets, or lesser Islands, lying together in the great Gulf or Bay of Saint Laurence, on the Southside of Natiscotec; being a place much resorted to by the French, for the Morsefishing in time of the year, of which we have spoken something already. They are so numerous upon these Coasts, that a small French Bark, 'tis said will catch one thousand or five hundred of them in a few hours; and so large, fat, and unctuous withal, that of the bellies of five or six Morses, they make an Hogshead or more of Trane-oile, as good as that which they have of the Whale; beside the benefit of their flesh, which they say, especially if it be young, is as tender and sweet as Veal. The skins of them they dress, as we do our Oxe-hides; and they say, they are twice as thick and serviceable upon any occasion. 3. Brion, a small Island Southward of the Rameae, not above two or three leagues in length, and about so much likewise in breadth, but of a rich Soil and excellent good pasturage, though shaded in some places with many tall and lofty trees of several kinds; having another lesser Island neighbouring upon it, which they call Isle Blanch, or the white Island, of like fertility with itself. 4. Insula Britonum, or Isle Breton, called also sometimes the Isle of Saint Laurence. This lieth to the Southeast of the Isle Brion, of a Triangular form, containing about eighty leagues in compass, mountainous for a great part of it and rugged, but in the Valleys more fruitful and pleasant; having no Rivers, at least not any that are much known, but instead thereof, embraced much with arms of the Sea, and thereby not unlikly to be well stored with fish upon the Coasts of it. In the midst of the Country there is a great Lake, which contains within it many lesser Islands. The Woods well replenished with most sorts of Deer, a kind of black Foxes, and abundance of the American Birds, which they call Pengwins. The chief Port, or Haven of it is Newport, called by the French Port aux Anglois, because much frequented by the English in regard of the fishing. Lastly, there is the Isle de Sable, so called by the French, as 'tis supposed, from the Sands which lie so much about it, containing about fifteen leagues in compass, and distant from Breton-Isle not much less than twenty or thirty leagues; held to be of an unsafe landing, by reason of the said sands lying about it: and therefore though the planting of it hath been twice attempted by the French, and once by the Portugheses, yet the business never had success. The Inland parts of this whole country of Canada, are still in the hands of the Savages or Natives, and not much discovered further than to know the names of the people: the chief whereof that occur, are these, viz. the Iroquois, a stout and warlike people on the North-east of Norimbegua, often molesting the French. The Souriquois and Etechemins in the Country of Accadie, or New-Scotland, who are more their friends, and do help them sometimes against the Iroquois. Beside on the banks, and about the River of Canada, there are the Algoumequins, the Algoiugequins, Quenongebins, Attagopautans, and many other Montagnets of such harsh names, that we should be enforced almost to pass them over in silence, though they otherwise deserved to be named: only this we may observe in the general, of the Savages of these parts of America, viz. That as ignorant and barbarous as they are, yet they have made shift to discover the Factions, Emulations, and Enmities than are amongst the European People that come thither; and are able to make such advantage of it, by siding some of them with the one, and some with the other, that they all preserve their liberty by it: So that as yet the footing which either the French, English, or any other Nation have among them, seems rather to be for the security of their own abode and trading where they live, than to give them any absolute right of possession; much less any general command of the Country. CHAP. FOUR Of Virginia and the Countries thereto belonging. 1. VIrginia, so named by Sir Walter Raleigh, about the year 1584., in honour of our Maiden Queen Elizabeth, of famous Memory, is a fair Province of this Northern part of America; bounded on the North with Canada, on the East with the Sea called Mare del Nort, on the South with Florida; the Western confines of it being not yet known; but supposed, and perhaps not altogether improbably, to extend themselves as far as the South Sea. The more inland parts of the Country are mountainous and somewhat barren; but otherwise thick set with Woods, and those as well replenished with wild Beasts, Venison, and a sort of People, not much less wild and savage than Beasts: the Maritime parts more plain and fruitful. The whole Country extends itself from North to South, that is to say, from the Southermost parts of Norimbega to Florida, full ten degrees of latitude, viz. from thirty four to forty four, containing thereby inclusively six hundred common or English miles: being subdivided into three inferior Provinces or Parts, which are these, viz. 1. New-England, 2. Novum-Belgium, or Neiw-Nederlands, as our Neighbours call it. And 3. Virginia, properly so called: to which, because it is an English Plantation, and a part of this Western World, it shall not be amiss to add the Bermudae Islands. 2. New-England is that part of this Province of America which lieth next to Canada, or New France, by which it is bordered towards the North, Eastward with Norimbegua, on the South and South-west with Niew-Nederlande: the other borders, that is, directly Westward, remaining yet unknown. The Country lieth about the middle of the Temperate Zone, betwixt the degrees of forty one and forty four, being naturally of the same degree of heat with France or Italy, parallel to which it lieth in the Western Hemisphere; but yet these heats so moderated and allayed by the coldness of the adjoining Seas, that the Country generally is found very agreeable to English bodies. The Soil abundantly fruitful, not only of the natural Commodities of the Place, but likewise of all such as are transported thither out of England. Great store of Woods and Trees both for Fruit and Building; plenty of Deer; and of Turkeys, Partridges, Swans, Geese, Cranes, Ducks, and Pigeons, so great abundance, as serve the Inhabitants almost to excess. But the Commodities whereby they chief maintain their Trade, are rich Furs, many sorts of good Fish, some quantity of Amber, Flax, Linen, Iron, Pitch, Masts, Cables, yea and timber for Shipping. In a word, it is supposed by those which seem to understand the Country well, That there is little comes for England by the way of the Sound, but might be had from hence, at easier rates and less trouble, if the business were well considered. The Natives of the Country are said to be much better disposed, more tractable, docil, and apt to be persuaded to civility, than their Neighbours; especially when they are fairly dealt withal, and not provoked into distemper by rough handling. The Country on the Sea side replenished with very good Havens. They report, that in the space of 70 miles, there are no less than twenty or twenty five good and secure ports, some of them capable of five hundred or a thousand sail of ships, and fenced from the fury of winds and Sea, by the interposition of certain Islets, which, to the number of two hundred at least, are said to lie scattered up and down upon that Coast. The places where the English have chief seated themselves, are, 1. St. George's Fort; where the first Plantation was settled, at the mouth of the River Sagahadoc, in a kind of Peninsula or half-Island. 2. New-Plimouth, seated no less commodiously upon a large and spacious Bay, called by the Natives Patouxet. It consisted at the first building but of nineteen Families only, but is now improved into a handsome Town. 3. New-Bristoll, upon the Sea side also, but lying more Northerly than Plymouth. 4. Barstable. 5. Boston: And lastly Quillipiack, which by the name seems to have been some old Town of the Natives, who upon a great mortality happening among them, are said to have diserted these parts of the Country but a few years before the English came thither: It lieth upon a Bay called the Bay of the Massachousetts, and is at present possessed by the English. This part of Virginia was first discovered by Captain Gosnold, in the year 1602. Four years after that King James granted it by Letters Patents unto a Corporation of certain Knights, Gentlemen, and Merchants to be planted by them and managed to the best advantage of the Public: In which Sir John Popham, Lord chief Justice of the Common-Pleas, being one of the principal, by his encouragement, and chief also at his charge a Colony was sent thither in the year 1607, under the presidency of Captain George Popham, and Mr. Raleigh Gilbert: but the Precedent Popham dying the next year after, and not long after him the Lord chief-Justice likewise, who was the chief Patron of the work, the Colony returned home: and though afterwards it was attempted several times, yet never could they find success in their endeavours, nor be settled in any form, till the year 1620: When, by the building of New-Plimouth, and some more particular care had of the business, by several encouragements sent from thence to bring on others, and by reason of some domestic motives which persuaded many people to leave their Country and go that way, it is grown at last to a very probable and hopeful condition of good subsistence for the future, being, for many temporal respects, worthy of all favour and cherishing by the State. 3. Novum-Belgium, or Niew-Nederlandt, hath on the North-East New-England, on the South and South-West Virginia, properly so called; taking its name from the Netherlanders or Dutchmen, who began their Plantation there about the year 1614: The Country, as they said, being then void, and therefore free for any body that would take possession of it: Notwithstanding which pretence, they were scarce warm in their Quarters, when Sir Sam. Argall, Governor of Virginia, having first spoilt the French in Accadie, as we said, disputed the possession with these also. And although they pleaded Hudsons' right (who by Commission from King James, and upon an English account, had lately discovered those parts) and pretended they had not only bought all his Cards and Maps of the Country, but all his Interest and Right also, and had fully contented him for all his pains and charges in the discovery; yet the said Hudson, being an English man, and acting all that he did, by Commission from the King of England, upon debate it was concluded, That the Land could not be alienated after discovery, without the King of England's consent; especially it being but a part of the Province of Virginia, already possessed by the Subjects of England: So that they were forced to wave that title, and the Dutch Governor submitted his Plantation to his Majesty of England, and to the Governor of Virginia, for and under him: Upon which Terms, for a good while, they held it. Afterwards, upon confidence, it seems, of a new Governor sent from Amsterdam, they not only failed to pay the promised contribution and tribute, but fell to fortify themselves, and to entitle the Merchants of Amsterdam to an absolute Propriety and Dominion of the Country, independent of any other; building Towns, as New Amsterdam, raising Forts, as Orange Fort, near that branch of the Nordt River, which they call Hell gates. Complaint whereof being made to King Charles, and by his Ambassador represented to the States, they disown the business, and declare by public instrument, that they were not interessed in it, but that it was only a private undertaking, viz. of the West Indian Company of Amsterdam. Whereupon a Commission was granted to Sir George Culvert, made Lord Baltimore in Ireland, to possess and plant the Southern parts thereof, lying towards Virginia, by the name of Maryland; and to Sir Edmund Loyden to plant the Northern parts towards New-England, by the name of Nova-Albion: Which makes the Dutch the second time seem willing to compound; and for the sum of two thousand and five hundred pounds, they offer to be gone, and leave all they had there. But by advantage of the troubles in England, which then began to appear, and soon after followed, they not only go back from their first Propositions, and make higher demands, but also most mischievously and wickedly (as some report) they furnish the Natives with Arms, and teach them the use of them, as it may be thought, expecting to use their help, upon occasion, against the English. An Act questionless of very pernicious consequence, not only to the English Adventurers, who have since been much damnified and prejudiced by the said Natives in their Plantations, but also to the themselves; who, as 'tis reported, were the first, or with the first, that smarted by it: The Savages, being thus armed and trained, first of all falling foul upon them, destroying their Farm-houses, and forcing them to betake themselves to their Forts and Fastnesses: So that at present there is but little good account can be given further of the State of this Country. As to the nature and quality of the soil, it differeth not much from the parts about it; the temperature of the air and commodities of the Country being generally the same, which New-England or Virginia yields. And as for Towns and places of abode, it doth not appear, that either the English or Dutch have as yet set themselves much to building in this Country. What the English had done before our late troubles at home, it may be feared, is wholly ruined by the misfortunes which befell them there: And for the Dutch, although they make large reports of the Country, and challenge a huge Circuit of land under the name of the New-Netherlands, and title of the States; yet I suppose they have had their hands so full of other business of late, that they have not added much to what they had, when our troubles began; which was only New-Amsterdam, as they call it, and Orange-Fort, afore mentioned; nor is it so certain, whither they be Master of them at this day or no. In stead of Rivers, which this Country seemeth a little to want, there are many large and capacious Bays all along the Coast: the principal whereof are, that which the Dutch call Nassovius-Bay, sometimes the Nordt-river, which falleth by it into the Sea at May-port. 2. Hellgate, which is but a Channel of the great Nordt-river, so called by reason of its difficult and dangerous entrance; though within it affords a very safe road for shipping, and fifteen or sixteen fathom of water at the mouth. 3. Zuid-river, so called because it lieth more Southerly than the rest. 4. But Virginia properly so called, is in a better condition. This is an elder Daughter of England, & one of her first Plantations, which having endured diversity of fortunes, and struggling for a long time at the beginning with ill successes, is at last by the favour of Divine Providence arrived unto such a competent happiness, as that the Colony are said to live very comfortably and helpfully among themselves, and to give good hopes of perpetuating, and improving their condition to posterity. The Country hath on the North-east of it Niew-Nederlandt aforesaid, on the South-west Florida; the name of Virginia, which before was common to the whole Province, being, upon the Plantation of New-England and that other, restrained to this part of the Country only, which reacheth from the thirty fourth to the thirty eighth degree of Northern latitude. The Country somewhat inclined to heats; which yet are much moderated by those Constant Easterly winds, which they call Brise's, and by some other cooling blasts from the Ocean ever and anon. It is a Country generally well distinguished into Hills and Valleys: the first whereof are well clothed with Woods, and the latter with Fruits. The soil being so good, that 'tis said in many places, an acre of land well husbanded will return two hundred bushels, or twenty five quarter of good grain: rich in veins of Allom, as likewise in Pitch, Turpentine, Oil, plenty of sweet Gums, and several sorts of plants for Dyers use: not wanting many good Mines of Iron, Copper, etc. Timber and tall Cedar-trees in infinite abundance; much Cattle: Fish and Fowl of all sorts: no scarcity of Maiz among the Natives; on the mountains some Crystal is found, and on the Shore Pearls. To be short, excepting those metals of Peru and Mexico, (of which I hear not, that any discoveries as yet have been made in these parts) it seems not deficient in any thing, that may encourage or reward an industrious people. The Country not half peopled with Natives; and those that are there found, as much differing one from another in size, as in language and manners. There are some, whom they call Sasques-Hanoxi of such a vast bulk and stature, that they seemed, as it were Giants to the English themselves; others, whom they call Wigcocomoci, so little and low, that in company with the other they seemed but so many Pigmies: but the generality of them, it must be confessed, are taller and well limbed, though most commonly without beards. Their clothing is mantles of Deer-skins with something like an apron hanging before them. They paint their bodies and faces all over with figures of Serpents and other horrid creatures, ' as 'tis thought, only that they may seem terrible to their enemies, who are so wise as to fright them again as much with the same. These of Virginia are held to be crafty and revengeful, and not a little more industrious and active, than other Natives, especially towards the North. There is no Country in the world, for the bigness, better watered than this part of Virginia is, with many pleasant and fair Rivers: the chief whereof are these, viz. 1. Pawhatan, so named from a principal Roytelet of these parts, whose Territores are divided and wonderfully fertilized by this River, which runs a course of an hundred miles, navigable all the way, at least by smaller Vessels, and falls into the Sea with a mouth two or three miles broad. 2. Nansamund. 3. Pammanuke. 4. Toppaphanock, navigable one hundred and thirty miles. 5. Pawtunxet, of a deeper Channel than any of the rest, and affording variety of choice fish, with divers others. The English first settled their Plantation upon the Southside of a large and goodly Bay, called by the Natives Chese-peack, which thrusting itself a good way up into the Country, and receiving into its bosom many particular Rivers, yields a very safe station for ships, and is the only entrance into this part of the Country: The Capes or Points whereof are therefore well fortified, particularly Cape Henry, Cape Charles, etc. The Towns which the English have built, or do frequent in way of Trade, are chief 1. James-Town, so named by the first Adventurers, in honour of King James: it lieth on the South side of the Bay, and was first built in the year 1606, but since fortified with a Trench drawn round about it, and some pieces of Ordinance planted. 2. Henricopolis, or Henry's Town, so named from Prince Henry, then living, built in a very convenient place more within Land, about fourscore miles distant from James-Town. 3. Dales-guift, so named, because built and planted at the charges of Sir Thomas Dale, Deputy Governor of the Country, about the year 1610. There is also Ketoughtan, a Town of the Natives upon the Bay, where the English are said to frequent and trade much. And lastly Wicocomoco, a Town of Powhatans', one of the chief Roytelets of the Country, as hath been said, whom the English, at their first coming thither, courted much, and procured a Crown of Copper, with some other richer presents, to be sent him from King James, on purpose to oblige him: which yet they were hardly able to do. For although he professed likewise on his part very much love and affection to the English, yet partly by his procurement, as 'tis said, and partly through their own overmuch security, not with out some provocations given on the part of the English, there were, about the year 1621. not less than three hundred and forty Englishmen murdered by the Savages, unexpectedly falling in upon them, and with such violence and resolution, as that if a certain Native of the Country, become Christian, had not discovered the business a very little before to them at James-Town, their principal Fort and place of strength had been surprised, and the whole Colony almost at the mercy of the Savages. But it pleased God to prevent their utter destruction by that means: And since that time, I suppose they stand better upon their guard. 5. The Bermudas are a multitude of small Islands in the Atlantic or North-Sea, as at the Indies they call it, lying right over against Virginia, at a distance of four or five hundred miles. They lie from thirty to thirty two degrees of Northern latitude, in form of a Croissant, or halfmoon; being so called from John Bermudaz a Spaniard, who first discovered them. But the principal of them, and that which is most properly called Bermudaz Island, lieth at the lowest and most Southerly corner of them, in the latitude of thirty two degrees, and twenty five minutes. They are sometimes called the Summer Islands, from Sir George Summer; who, in the year 1609. in company of Sir Thomas Gates, and about one hundred and fifty persons more, sailing towards Virginia, hardly escaped a terrible shipwreck upon these Islands: the ship, which they were forced to run on shore, being lost, but the men and much of her lading, by God's great mercy, saved by their Boats. They found the place altogether desolate, inhabited neither by Man nor Beast, save only some Swine in the Woods; but of Fowl such infinite plenty, that they would take a thousand of some one sort as big as Pigeons, in 2 or 3 hours; with these and the Swine they found there, which were very large and fat, for the most part of the time they stayed, and with variety of fish they sustained themselves happily, till they had built a new Ship and a Bark, sufficient to waste them and their Company over to Virginia. They found likewise divers sorts of fruits in the Islands, very pleasing and good: abundance of Mulberry trees and Silkworms. Palmitos, Cedar-trees, and others; on the Sea coasts some quantity of Pearls, Ambergreese, and other good Commodities, an Air generally so temperate and agreeable to their constitution, that they rejoiced not a little in their misfortune, which had cast them upon a place so likely to be advantageous to themselves and the Nation: as by their earnest procurement it hath since in part proved: it being at this day one of the chiefest Plantations of the English: and though as yet they seem to trade only in Tobacco, as likewise Virginia is said to do; yet it is not through any defect either in the one Country or the other, as if they afforded no better Commodities, but rather through the fault and unskilfulness of the Planters, who busy themselves only in those ordinary and easy Comedies, and neglect the improvement of better, viz. that of the Silkworms and of making Silk. The first Colony was sent thither in the year 1612, under the command of Captain Rich. Moor; which prospered so well, that in a few years the whole Island, (viz. the principal one) where they do chief inhabit, was divided into canters, or Hundreds, as we may call them, and to every Hundred a Burrow or chief Town assigned, and the Government settled entirely according to the Laws of England. In the year 1623. there were no less than three thousand reckoned to be there, ten good Forts erected, and about fifty pieces of Ordinance planted upon them: although the place itself is so naturally fenced with Rocks and little Islands lying about it, that the Inhabitants, in that respect only, seem to contemn all dangers from without: it being almost impossible, without particular knowledge of the passages, for a Vessel of but eight or ten Tuns to come safely into Harbour: and yet with such knowledge there is both easy passage and secure station for the tallest ships. CHAP. V. Of Florida. 1. SOuthward of Virginia, somewhat towards the West, lieth the large and spacious Country of Florida, ennobled hitherto rather by the great pains which the Spaniards have taken, and the ill successes which they have met with in the discovery and search of this Province, than by any thing else they have discovered in it answerable to their desires. On the East it hath the Atlantic Ocean, or Mare deal Nordt. On the South and some part of the West, the Gulf of Mexico; and on the rest of the West, part of New-Gallicia, and some other Countries, not yet perfectly known. It was first of all discovered by Sir Sebastian Cabot (as hath been said) at the charges of the King of England, about the year 1497; but afterwards more throughly searched into by John de Ponce, a Spaniard, in the year 1512, and by him named Florida, because he first landed upon it on Palm-Sunday, which, as they say, the Spaniards use to call Pascha de Flores, or Pascha Florida. The Country lieth in the same parallel with Castille in Spain, and is supposed to be of a near temperature with it, both for Aire and Soil: only this of America is supposed to be somewhat the more fertile and lusty, as not having as yet been worn out with Tillage and use, as the other hath. They have great plenty of Maiz in this Country, which they both sow and reap in less than four Month's space; and which is somewhat more observable, among People otherwise barbarous, it is not counted among them any man's private possession; but laid up in public Granaries and Barns out of which it is orderly distributed at all times to particular persons and Families, according to their necessity. It's well stored likewise with divers sorts of Fruits, both proper to the Country, and common to other parts; especially with a kind of Plum of a rare colour and taste, Mulberry trees, Cherry trees, Chestnuts, Grapes, etc. Beasts they have in abundance, both wild and tame, with no less plenty of Fowl. Many huge Forests and lesser Woods, well replenished with good Okes of the largest size, lofty Cedars, Cypress, and Bay trees, with extraordinary plenty of that wood which the Americans call Pavame, and the French Saffasras, the bark whereof is said to be very Medicinal in sundry Diseises, especially for the Stone, and all obstructions of Urine, Winde-Colick, and others; and therefore much used by the Apothecaries. They have also another sort of wood called Esquine, not unknown in other parts, affirmed to be of sovereign and present remedy against the Lues Venerea; a Malady which the Indians are said to be generally, and not seldom very foully subject unto: yea they say, that the Spaniards from the Indies first brought it into Italy and other parts of Europe; where formerly it was either not at all or at least not much known. 'Tis likewise thought, that the Country is not altogether without Mines of Gold and Silver, especially about the mountains Apalatei, as they call them, though neglected by the Natives, till the Spaniards came and rifled so strangely for Gold in the other Provinces; which probably might make the Natives of this Province to conceal theirs, when the Spaniards were among them; and still to forbear the searching after it (in case that indeed they have any) only that they may not be troubled with such Guests. But for Emeralds, Turquoises, and other fine Stones, it is certain, the Country hath many, of great worth and beauty: but the plenty of these make them cheap at the Indies, and to be thought not worth the searching after. The People of this Country are somewhat of the largest size and stature, in respect of other Americans generally, yet well proportioned withal, going for the most part naked, only with some skin of a Stag, or other Beast, tied before them. Their hair black and let to grow; so that in many of them it hangs down as low as their thighs. Cunning they are said to be, and great dissemblers; stomachful, and much given to revenge: which is the cause that they are seldom, but in war, one with another. One thing, they say, there is peculiar to this Country of Florida, viz. that it breeds abundance of Hermaphrodites, more than any other part of the world beside: whom they likewise use most hardly, making them carry their burdens and luggage like Beasts, and putting them to all kind of Drudgery. 2. The Country is generally plain and level, having few or no mountains at all in it, save only the Apalatei, supposed by the Natives to have rich Mines of gold in them, and which the Spaniards saw, but had not time nor other necessary accommodation to stay and search them; by reason they were so much wearied and wasted with a long March, before they got thither, and found the People so stout and obstinate thereabouts, that in stead of entertaining them with their Hens and Fowl as other places had done, they were welcomed with blows, and made to return, leaving not a few of their best Soldiers behind. Rivers there are many, and those very large and commodious, as namely Rio Secco, or the dry River, so called by the Spaniards (as some think) because they could find no gold in it. 2. Rio Grande, or the great River. 3. Ligeris. 4. Garunna. 5. Sequana, etc. These last, so named by the French, who, after the Spaniards, for some time had, but never held any long possession of the Country. There are also Rio de Flores, Rio de Nieves, Rio de Spirito Santo, lesser streams, yet all of them with the rest, falling at several places into the great Lake of Mexico; and some of them, not a little haunted by the Caymans' or West-Indian Crocodiles, a Creature, as hath been said before, dangerous both at Sea and Land. The Country hath not yet been so well discovered, much less conquered or subdued by those who pretend themselves to be Masters of it, as to be distinguished into any certain Provinces. The Natives, who as yet hold possession and command of it for the most part, are themselves generally sorted into certain Tribes or great Families; all which are governed severally by a chief of their own, whom they call Paracoussi; and by reason thereof, are almost continally in feud and war one with another. The Provinces or parts of the Country, that I find any way mentioned by Authors, with any account at all of their situation and bounds, are only these, viz. 1. Panuco. 2. Colas: And 3. Tegesta, or Florida, properly so called. The first lieth on the borders of New-Spain, beyond the Bay called de Spirito Santo. The second near the Point or Cape called Cape Florida. The third being that long Peninsula or half Island which pointeth upon the Isle Cuba, and streatcheth itself out North and South an hundred leagues or more in length; but is not in breadth above thirty where it is largest, and in many parts much less: well known by the Cape called Los Martyrs, which looketh (as it were) into the Isle Cuba, and the River of the Holy Ghost, with three other goodly Bays, which open and empty themselves into that of New-Spain, or the Gulf of Mexico. 3. The Towns and places most known in this Province, are Saint Helen's, seated on or near unto a Promontory of the same name, where this Country bordereth on Virginia. 2. Fort Charles, or Arx Carolina, built and so named by the French in the reign of Charles the ninth their King, but afterwards ruined by the Spaniards. 3. port-royal, a well frequented Haven, at the mouth of a river which beareth the same name. More within land there is, 1. Apalche, an old Town of the Natives, formerly a place of great resort; now a poor thing of about some forty or fifty Cottages: and yet as poor as it is, Pamphilus Narvaez a Spaniard; at the time when he searched the Country, found the Natives not willing to part with it. For though he took it from them, it was not without some resistance, and they quickly recovered it again: and at 2. Aute, another old Town of theirs, nine days march from the other, they overtook him, and fell so resolutely upon him, that he left not a few of his best Soldiers dead upon the place, and was content himself to march quietly away with the rest. 3. Ochalis, a Town consisting of about 5 or 600 Sheds and Cottages likewise of the Natives. 4. Vittacuche a Burrow of two hundred Houses. There is also on the Eastern shore of this Peninsula St. Matthewes, a place possessed and well fortified by the Spaniards; and Saint Augustine's on the same Shore, but lying somewhat more Southerly than the other, at the mouth of a River called likewise Saint Augustine's. This latter was taken and sacked by Sir Francis Drake in the year 1585. who took out of one only Fort, called Saint john's, no less than eighteen pieces of Brass Ordinance, and twenty thousand Florins in ready money, which was intended for the pay of the Garrison. 4. This Country is not much inhabited either by Spaniards or French, though both successively have had it in possession: For Ponce a Native of Leon, as hath been said, first discovered the Peninsula upon Palm-Sunday, 1512. but did no more than only scour along the Coasts, and give some names to the Promontories, Rivers and places of note which he met with. After him, Vasquez de Ayllon with some Ships from Hispaniola fell in with the more North-east parts of the Country towards Virginia, but did no more than get some few of the Natives, (and that treacherously, as some say, having first invited them on shipboard, to dinner and upon pretence of traffic with them) with whom he presently returned for Spain. If it were so, his practices did not prosper with him; for a few years after, returning again with a stronger supply of men, and provision to make a further descovery of the Country, one of his Ships was cast away upon the rocks, in the same place viz. before the Cape Saint Helena, and two hundred of his men murdered by the Natives before his face upon their landing. Nor had the voyage of Pamphilus Narvaes' before mentioned, any better success in the year 1528. For venturing too fare up into the Country, viz. to Apalche, as was said, (which was a full months march from the place of his first landing) out of hopes of some great Treasures there to be found, though at first he made shift to master some of their petty Towns, yet finally he lost both himself and most of his men. Lastly the expedition of Hernandes a Soto in the year 1543. though more famous than any of these, yet proved as fruitless as the rest. He began his March in the year 1538. and continued it till 1543. overrunning the country with a little Army of three hundred and fifty horse and 90 foot, subduing the Paracoussi, or petty Princes, where he came, to the Crown of Spain, and compelling them to send in their Turkeys, Hens and other Fowls, for the victualling of his running Camp, every day: till at last finding his hopes of gold frustrate, and a good part of his Army wasted, and the rest much weakened with travel, struck with grief, and (as some say also) with a fever he died in the midst of his journey, and the remnant of his company, under the command of Ludevico Muscoso his Lieutenant, with much difficulty recovered Mexico at last. Upon so many unsuccessful attempts, the Spaniards seem to leave the Country; whereupon the French enter, sent thither by Gaspar Coligni Admiral of France in the year 1562, but they were such as the Spaniards liked not to have so near them: wherefore immediately upon the landing of a second supply in the year 1565 at Charles Fort upon the River port-royal above said, the Spaniards set upon them both by Sea and Land, force their Ships violently upon the rocks, sack the new Town, and put the whole Colony to the sword (scarce one man escaping) together with Ribault himself, who was Commander in chief for the expedition. There were above six hundred French slain in this Action, and all their hopes in Florida thereby utterly extinct. Since that time the Spaniards have better fortified those places of the Peninsula, viz. Saint. Matthews and Saint Augustine's abovesaid; together with the Castles of Saint Philip and Saint Jage in the more northerly parts of it. But it is like Aesop's dog in the manger, rather to keep out others, than that they make any good improvement of the Country themselves: and therefore if they were beaten out, and sent to attend their Mines and Sugar-mills elsewhere, it may seem but just. The Country is a large and goodly Province of America, of a fertile and good soil generally, yet neither peopled with Natives, nor used in any sort as it ought, to the honour of God and the advancement of public good. What reason or justice therefore can it be, that the Spaniards, only by the advantage of a Fort or two upon the Coasts, should pretend to be Lords of the whole land? and neither improve it themselves, as it ought to be improved, nor permit any other Nations, that are willing so to do? 'Tis supposed indeed, they keep it as a reserve of Treasure to themselves, that when they have leisure, or that their Mines at Potozi, or other places fail, they may make a further search about the Apalatti of this Province; of which there are confident reports that they have Mines; and though success hitherto hath not answered their endeavours much, yet they despair not in due time to find them, upon an absolute conquest of the Country and a more thorough search. And truly their policy and great providence seems not easily to be condemned: but in the mean time, if any other Nation upon just grounds shall happen to step between and prevent them, they have but little reason to complain, or to count themselves injured. 5. There lie over against the Country of Florida westward, or south-west certain small Islands, which because they are but small ones, and lie so near the Continent, Geographers sometimes describe as a part and appertaining to the Continent. They are called by a general name the Leucayae Islands, and have not much to be spoken of them. The chief are first Las Tortugas, or the Tortoises, which are seven or eight little Islands lying together at the South-west point of the Peninsula called Cape Florida, right over against the Port Havana of the Isle Cuba; from which they are distant about five or six leagues; and by their lying so scattered up and down in the Sea, as they do, they make the passage from thence to Havana not a little dangerous. Secondly Los Martyr. These are three great rocks, rather than Islands lying to the Southeast of Cape Florida, and covered for the most part with a whitish sand and a few bushes growing on them. They seem at a distance to bear a resemblance of men impald, or bound to stakes, as the Martyrs in Primitive times usually were; which occasioned the Spaniards so to name them. 'Tis very dangerous to come too near them; but to have sight of them is of great use to men at Sea: For by passing these rocks, and leaving them to the Southeast, they certainly know, that they are now entered the Streits, not of Magellan, which lie many thousands of leagues further Southward, (of which we shall speak in due place) but of Bahama; that is, that they have left the Ocean, and are fallen in among those many Islands, which do, as it were Barricado and block up the Eastern Coasts of America towards Nombre de Dios and Terra firma, as they call it; through which the passage to the Continent is sometimes dangerous, by reason of contrary winds; and always such, as it requires the skill and care of an experienced Pilot to conduct the Ships well thither. Thirdly, Bahama, lying westward of Cape Florida, famous for nothing but only for giving name to the Streits so called, which run betwixt the Peninsula of Florida and it, with such a violent course and torrent, that although it be above sixteen miles broad, yet many times neither wind nor Oars can prevail against it. Fourthly, Guanahani, the first piece of American ground that was discovered, and named by Christopher Columbus Saint Saviour's, or Salvador, as hath been said. CHAP. VI Of Califormia. 1. CAliformia in the general containeth all those Provinces of the Northern part of America, whither discovered or undiscovered, which lie westward of Florida, Canada and Virginia, and to the Northwest of New-Gallicia, up to the Streits of Anian, or that Sea, which is supposed to divide the Continent of Tartary from America: but more especially taken, it comprehends only that large Peninsula or Demy-Island (as it seemeth to be) which stretcheth itself from North to South, to a vast length, on the West side of Mar Vermiglio, as 'tis commonly called, and sometimes the Bay of Califormia. They that take it in ihe first and largest sense, describe under the name of Califormia these four particular Provinces, viz. 1. Quivira, 2. Cibola, 3. Califormia, properly so called, and 4. Nova Albion. 2. Quivira takes up the most Northern and unknown part of America towards the West, reaching as far as the supposed Strait of Anian aforesaid (if there be any such) or else joining to the Continent of Tartary. It is likewise the barrenest and least fruitful part of all the West-Indies, especially for Corn. Cattle it hath great store, and pasturage good; the Country being for the most part plain and level, and nothing else but pasturage: The Natives few and Savage; living in Hoards, or great Companies together, after the manner of the Tartars: to whom they are Neighbours; and, as it is not improbably thought, of their race: They cloth themselves (viz. the Men) most commonly in that kind of Ox's hide which we described before, chap. 9 under the name of Taurus Mexicanus: The Women with little else but their hair; notwithstanding the Country, especially for one half of the year, is eucessively cold. Their , though they be much less than the ordinary Kine of Europe, are the chief sustenance and employment of the Natives; by pasturing of huge Herds whereof from place to place the People live, and maintain a Traffic with other parts. Yet some of them inhabit Towns; the chief whereof, as yet discovered, seem to be these, viz. Acus, or Acuco, as some call it, a small Town, but seated in a strong defensible place, having some small quantity of Cotton growing about it. 2. Tignez, a Town seated upon the banks of a River, bearing the same name, and inhabited, it seems, by a stout and resolute People, and whom the Spanish, coming among them in the year 1540, had much ado to Master. They endured a siege for the space of six weeks together; and at last finding themselves so strongly begirt by enemies, that there was no means of escape, but by death or yielding up themselves, rather than they would fall alive into their hands, they first buried and spoiled all such Treasure as they had (which were chief Saphires, and a few other Gems that the Country afforded) and after that setting fire on their household stuff, they took their Wives and Children with them, and made a desperate sally out upon the Spaniards; wherein, although they were most of them slain, trod under the horse feet, or drowned in passing the River, yet was it not without some loss to the Spaniards themselves: Nor would those few that were left behind deliver up the Town, till it was fired about their ears, and that they could no longer abide in it. 3. Cicuic, another small Town four day's journey distant from Tignez. The Country about this place, although generally it be all good pasturage, and maintains abundance of , yet is it so open and plain, that for almost one hundred miles together the Spaniards in their march hither from New-Spain found neither stone nor tree, nor any thing else that could serve them for a Landmark: so that they were forced, as they marched along, to raise up heaps of the Country Cowdung, to serve them for direction in their coming back: which was not long after. For, not finding the Commodities they sought for, and fearing to be surprised by Winter in those cold Countries, where they had no kind of accommodation, they made somewhat a hasty retreat: leaving only behind them some few Religious men, of the Order of St. Francis, whose desires to do the People good by converting them to the true knowledge and worship of Almighty God, procured them not long after, the Crown of Martyrdom; being murdered all of them save one, by the Natives, and he not without much difficulty escaping their hands. 3. Cibola lieth more Southward of Quivira, betwixt it and New-Gallicia to the North and North-East: On the West it hath Mar Vermiglio, or the Bay of Califormia. The Air of the Province indifferently temperate, especially if compared to the sharp frosts and colds of Quivira. The Country, for the most part levelly and plain, as Quivira is. Few trees at all in it, except here and there some woods of Cedars: which yet do abundantly supply the Natives both with Timber and Fuel. The ground affords plenty of Maiz, and some small white Pease; of both which they usually make bread. There is great store of Venison, and a kind of Sheep (as they say, and as it should seem by their Fleece) as big as some little Horse or Oxen; some of their horns weighing forty or fifty pound. But perhaps, by some mistake of Authors, this Beast may be no other than the Taurus Mexicanus afore described: whose hair is extremely thick and shaggy, and of which they make cloth, as of wool, as hath been said. There are also Lions, Bears, and Tigers in this Province, in such numbers, than the People of the Country are not a little troubled with them, and would gladly destroy them, if they knew how. The People are generally well limbed, tall of stature, and seem to be a little more ingenious than their neighbours of Quivira: yet they go naked many of them, only covered before with Mantles made of skins: which are many times painted, and that with such curiosity and Art, as do sufficiently argue, that neither themselves nor their neighbours of Quivira, from whom they have them in traffic, do make them; but that they are the Merchandise and Commodities of some other Nations, perhaps of Cathay or China, who, by the Northwest Seas, do trade with the Maritime parts and People of Quivira. 4. This part of the Country hath been reasonably well searched by the Spaniards, but as yet nothing discovered so considerable as to persuade them to stay in it. That which seems most observable, is the great Lake Tonteac, situate almost in the midst of the Province; upon which, or near unto it, they found seven or eight old Towns of the Natives, some whereof contained four or five hundred of their Cottages or little houses, and were fortified also with Ramparts, and other works of defence; so as the Spaniards could not become Masters of them but by force and storming them: in the attempt whereof Vasquez Caronado himself, their Commander in chief, was twice beaten down with stones, by the Natives; yet at last carrying the place, he found in it good plenty of Maiz indeed, which was some refreshment to his Army, but nothing else: whereupon having named the place Granada, in memory of the Viceroy of New-Spain, who sent him upon that expedition, he departed. In his return homeward he fell upon a certain Country, which he named Tucayan, of which his company report great matters: as first of a certain River called Huex, on the banks whereof, in the space of twenty leagues or thereabouts, there stand no less than fifteen good Burroughs well built, and furnished likewise with stoves or hothouses, against the cold, as in other Countries of Europe: as also of a very fruitful and pleasant Valley, which therefore they called Aroya de Corazones, of another gteat Town and Territorie thereto belonging, called Chichilticala: and lastly of the Valley of Nuestra Sennora, or our Lady's dale, in the South parts of the said Territory; all of them described for such rich and delicious places, that some take them for the Campi Elisii of America: especially seeing the Spaniards were never known to visit them the second time; the discoveries which have been made since, being only of the Northwest parts of the Country along the coasts of Mar Vermiglio; and this no further than only to give name to certain Capes or Promontories which they met with, as namely 1. Porto de St. Clara, near to the mouth of the River which they call Rio del Nordt. 2. Las Playas. 3. St. Michael. 4. Lago del oro, which bordereth on Quivira: And lastly El Rey Coronado, Eastward of that. 5. Califormia, specially so called, is by many thought and described to be but a Peninsula or half Island, by reason that the Bay which divides it from Quivira and New-Gallicia, towards the North runneth much narrower than it doth Southerly: which made them think, that somewhere or other at the North it was joined to the main-Land of America. But later discoveries have found it to be a perfect Island, and altogether separate from the Continent. For about the year 1620 some Adventurers beating upon those coasts Northward, accidentally, and before they were ware, fell upon a Strait, the waters whereof ran with such a Torrent and violent course, that they brought them into Mar Vermiglio, whether they would or no, and before they knew it: and by that means discovered that Califormia was an Island, and that the waters which were observed to fall so violently into that Sea, towards the North, were not the waters of any River emptying itself into the Bay from the main-Land, as was formerly thought, but the waters of the Northwest Sea itself, violently breaking into the Bay, and dividing it wholly from the Continent. It lieth North and South, extending itself in a vast length, full twenty degrees of latitude, viz. from twenty two to forty two; but the breadth nothing answerable. The most Northern point of it is called Cape Blanch: that to the South, Cape St. Lucas, memorable for that rich and gallant prize which Captain Cavendish, in the year 1587., being then in his voyage about the World, took from the Spaniards near to this place. As for the Island itself, it is not at all inhabited by the Spaniards; whether it be, that they want men to furnish new Plantations, or that they find no matter of invitation and encouragement from the Country; or perhaps that the access thither be not so easy. For 'tis reported to be wonderfully well peopled by the Natives; and that there were found only upon the coasts and along the shore of Mar Vermiglio twenty or twenty three Nations, all of different languages. The Country abundantly well stored both with Fish and Fowl, as appears partly by the Natives; who take an huge pride in making themselves gay with the bones of the one, with which they load their ears, and sometimes their noses also: and with the feathers of the other, which ordinary People wear only sticking about their waste; but great persons, and such as will be fine indeed, beset their heads strangely with them, and have commonly one bunch of them bigger than ordinary hanging down behind them like a tail: Having no knowledge of the true God, they worship what the Devil will have them, that is, the Sun; attributing to it only, the increase of their Fruits and Plants, healthful Seasons, and most of the other good they enjoy, or are sensible of. Their government is said to be only Economical, each Father ordering the affairs of his Family apart, without subjection to any other superior; yet so well managed, that they live in good peace one with another; not without many good Laws and Customs, viz. That they allow but one wife to one Man, That they punish Adultery with death, That they suffer not Maids to talk or converse with Men, till they be married, That Widows may not marry, till they have mourned at least one half of a year for their Husbands deceased, and divers others of like nature: which perhaps if the truth were known, do more properly belong to the Natives of Utopia or New-Atlantis, then to these of Califormia. 6. The places therein, as yet most observed, are only upon the Sea Coasts, viz. the Capes St. Clara and St. Lucas; the one at the Southeast of the Island, looking towards New-Gallicia; the other at the South-west, looking into the Sea and towards Asia. 2. St. Cruse: This is a large and convenient Haven, not far from Cape St. Clara. 3. Cabo de las Playas, more within the Bay. 4. St. Andrews, another convenient Haven upon an Island of the same name. 5. St. Thome, an Island at the mouth of the Gulf, or Bay, of about twenty five leagues in compass, rising Southerly with an high mountainous point, under which is a convenient road for shipping, and twenty five fathoms of water. On the other side of the Island, towards the main Sea, there is first St. Abad, a good Haven, and almost surrounded with a pleasant and fruitful Country. 2. Cape Trinidado. 3. Cape de Cedras. 4. Puebla de las Canoas', from the abundance of those little Boats which the Americans generally use, and do call Canoes; whereof perhaps some store is made there. 5. Cabo de Galera, and some others. 7. Nova-Albion is only the more Northerly part of this Island, reaching from the thirty eighth degree of latitude, up towards the North as far as Cape Blanco, first discovered by Sir Francis Drake, in his Circumnavigation of the World, in the year 1577, and by him named Nova-Albion, in honour of England, his own Country, which anciently bore that name. They found the Country exceedingly well stored with Dear, grazing up and down the Hills by thousands in a company: The Men generally go naked all over, the Women using only a piece of a mat, or some such thing instead of an Apron. Their houses built only of Turf and Osier; yet so wrought together, that they served very well to keep out the cold: in the midst of it is their hearth where they make their fire, and lie all round about it together, upon several Beds of Bulrushes. What their Towns are, or whither they have any, is not yet discovered. When the English first landed in those parts, under Sir Francis Drake, the Natives of the Country immediately presented themselves to the General, bringing him fine presents of Feathers, and some K●lls of Network made of Rushes: and the news of their arrival being spread up into the Country, it was not long before the King himself came and gave them a visit. He was a person of goodly stature, clothed all over with certain Conie skins of that Country, the fur whereof is exceeding smooth and fine, and the only Robe of Nobility there. He had many other tall men attending on him, and one that went before him, bearing somewhat instead of a Mace; at which there hung three Crowns, by so many chains; the Crowns were made of Feathers, the Chains of Bone; both of them very ingeniously wrought. After these followed a great multitude of the common sort of People, but none of them without his present of something or other, even to the very Boys. The King would needs have the Crowns put upon the General's head, and the Chains about his neck; to which he consented: and by that Ceremony promised, in the name and behalf of the Queen of England, from whom he said he came, to take them into his protection. So after many other civilities given and returned betwixt them, the King at length departed, and Sir Francis with his men returned to their ships; having first erected a pillar upon the place; on which he fastened the Arms of England, with the Queen's name and his own, to remain as a monument of his being there, and of the surrender which was made of that Country to the Queen of England. CHAP. VI Of New-Gallicia, and the Provinces thereto belonging. 1. NEw-Gallicia is the most Northerly Country of all America, that is inhabited to any purpose by the Spaniards. Here 'tis true, they are scattered up and down in all the parts of it; but it is at a huge distance, and for the most part only where the Mines are. It is bounded on the East and to the South with the Kingdom of Mexico, or New-Spain: on the West with the Gulf or Bay of Califormia. Northward, for so much as is yet discovered, with Quivira and Cibola; lying between eighteen and twenty eight degrees of Northern latitude, that is, from La Natividad, a Port so named by the Spaniards, in the confines of New-Spain, to the most Northerly borders of Cinoloa, a part of this Province; containing, as is supposed, not much less than three hundred leagues in length, and in breadth much more; and whereof not a tenth part is either used or frequented by the Spaniards: The Air is generally here very temperate, inclining rather to heat than cold, and subject now and then to sudden storms of rain and great claps of thunder; which yet do not hinder, but that the Country is held to be reasonably healthful, and the people observed to live generally to a good old age. The Soil, by reason of the Climate, would be a little inclining to drought, but that beside the frequent rains which it hath, it is constantly moistened with fresh morning dews; which make it for the most part wonderfully fruitful, almost beyond belief: yielding for every bushel of Wheat that is sown threescore; and of Maiz two hundred for one: beside great plenty of Sugarcanes and Cochineel; both which, notwithstanding the Spaniards are said to neglect in some sort, employing themselves wholly about richer Commodities. For the Country affords them good store of Mines, viz. of Sylver and Brass; but of Gold or Iron, not many as yet have been found: the Rivers plentifully abounding with Fish, and the Woods with Venison and some other wild Beasts. The Country generally more mountainous than plain, frequently shaded with Woods and whole Forests of the statelyest Pine trees and Oaks of timber that are to be seen. The People are said to be somewhat of a wavering and inconstant disposition, apt to take offence; and though civilised in some measure, and made Christians by the Spaniards, yet oftentimes upon some light distaste given, they seem willing to return again to their Woods and Barbarism. The reason whereof in part is conceived to be a natural slothfulness and unwillingness unto any kind of labour in this People; which they labour most of all to avoid, and are so wise, that they never will be brought to it, but upon good wages: but on the contrary, given to sports very much, viz. singing, dancing, and drinking out of measure; in so much as 'tis thought, if it were not for their beloved liquor, they would hardly be persuaded long to take either the care or the pains of Husbandry. They are of stature reasonably tall, dwelling both in Towns and Villages; being distinguished into certain Clans or Tribes; each whereof is governed by one Chief, but all of them subject to the Judges and Officers of the King of Spain. It contains in it these inferior Provinces, 1. Cinoloa. 2. Couliacan. 3. Xalisco. 4. Guadalaiara; all of them on the Western shore. 5. Zacatecas. 6. New-Biscay: and 7. New-Mexico, more within Land. 2. Cinoloa is the most Northern part of New-Gallicia, bounded on the West, with some part of the Gulf or Bay of Califormia: On the East with a long ridge of Mountains, which they call Tepecsuan: On the North with Cibola; and with Couliacan on the South. The Country, beside the general fertility of the whole Province of New Gallicia, yields great store of cotton-wool, by reason whereof both Men and Women here are better apparelled, for the most part, than elsewhere the Americans are. Exceedingly well watered with Rivers, which descend from those mountains Tepecsuan, not above thirty or forty leagues distant from the Sea; and which, with the variety of their streams and Meandrous glidings, do divide the Country into many and good pastures, which are likewise stored with abundance of Kine, Oxen and other . The chief towns of the Spaniards are, 1. St. Philip and Jacob, seated towards the Sea side, on the banks of a fair River, some thirty or forty leagues distant from the town of Couliacan. 2. St. John de Cinoloa, an ancient Colony of Spaniards, settled there by Francisco de Tharra, in the year 1554, which is all they have in this Country; except some few old Forts of the Natives, which they found, after their manner, poorly furnished; but have since repaired them for defence against the Natives of those parts, which as yet remain unreduced. 3. Couliacan lieth Southward of Cinoloa, coasting all along the Bay of Califormia, which it hath on the West. On the East it hath New-Biscay: and on the South Xalisco. The Country not defective in any kind of necessary Provision, more especially aboundeth with Fruits of all sorts: But the Spaniards look only at the Mines; of which they have some few in this Country. The People were generally clothed with Garments of cotton-wool, when the Spaniards came first among them, but yet never a whit the more modest; being exceedingly given to Venery, and that in a more shameless and beastly manner, than many other Americans were, that go naked. The Spanish Towns are these, 1. Hiustula, seated on the banks of a fair River, distant about a day's journey from the Sea. 2. Quinola. 3. Quatrabarrios', an old Town of the Natives, but new named by the Spaniards. 4. El Leon, an old burrow. 5. Couliacan, the chief town of the Province. 6. St. Michael, in the Valley of Arroba, two leagues distant from the Sea, in a rich and plentiful Country both for Corn and fruit, and built by Nunnez de Gusman in the year 1531, after he had burnt the Towns, and destroyed a great part of the Natives, inhabitants of the Country. 4. Xalisco, or Galesco, as some call it, is bounded on the North with Couliacan: On the South with some parts of New-Spain: On the East with the Province of Guadalaiara; and on the West with the Gulf or Bay of Califormia. The Country chief fertile in Maiz and Mines of Silver; not altogether so apt for herbage and pasture, as some other Countries about it. The People were Cannibals, before the Spaniards came among them, and did eat Mans-flesh; were much given to quarrelling and contentions among themselves; but by this time 'tis supposed, are reasonably well reclaimed both from the one and the other. In this Country, beside many other goodly streams, is the great and famous River Barania, on the banks whereof are seated most of their principal Towns, viz. Xalisco, which gives name to the whole Province, and to a large Promontory or Foreland on the Western coasts, which shoots itself out into the Bay of Califormia, right over against certain Islands which the Spaniards call the Three Maries. This was an ancient City or Town of the Natives; but sacked and taken from them by Nunnez de Gusman, in the year 1530. 2. Compostella, now the chief City of the Province, and a Bishops Sea. 3. La Purification, a small Town on the Sea side towards the confines of New-Spain. 4. St. Sebastian's, in Chiametla, so called from the River upon which it is built; having rich Mines of silver round about it; and therefore made a Colony by Franciscus de Tharra above mentioned, in the year 1554. 5. Guadalaiara, is bounded on the West with Xalisco; on the South, and South-west with New-Spain; on the North with Zacatecas. A Country exceeding pleasant, and rich in all kind of Commodities, but especially in its Mines of silver: Well watered with the River Barania, which runneth through the midst of it, and with divers other streams: Yielding abundantly, both Wheat, Maiz, and some other grain. In a word, there is nothing said of the properties of New-Gallicia in general, either for Soil, Climate, or People, but is peculiarly verified of this Province. The chief Towns whereof are, 1. Guadalaiara, which gives name to the whole Province about it. It is seated on the banks of the River Barania, in a most delectable and sweet Air, and a rich Soil; by advantage whereof it is become the Metropolis of New-Gallicia, honoured with an Episcopal Sea, which was translated thither from Compostella, in the year 1570, with the Courts of Judicature, and with the Residence of the King's Treasurers for that Province. 2. St. Maria de los lagos, a town thirty leagues Eastward of Guadalaiara; being a Frontier place, and built on purpose to secure the Country against the Chichemecae, which are a barbarous and unreduced People of the North-East parts of this Country; who harbouring themselves in Caves under ground in the thickest of huge Woods and Forests, do oftentimes issue out and make foul spoil in the Country where they come; and would do much more harm, if it were not for this Garrison. 3. Del Spiritu Santo, built by the Founder of the other two, viz. Nunnez de Gusman aforesaid, in a part of the Country which they call Tepeque. 6. The Zacatecas, as they call them, are bounded on the South with Guadalaiara: on the North with New-Biscay: on the West with Couliacan, and some part of Xalisco: and on the East with New-Span. The Country, especially the more Western part of it, very rich in silver Mines, no Province of this part of America richer; but not so apt either for Wheat or Maiz. 'Tis a Country that would please some rich Miser well, that could live only with the sight of his money: But the Eastern parts of it abundantly stored with all sorts of Fruits; the Woods every where replenished with Deer; the Fields no less with Corn, and every tree almost giving entertainment to some Bird or other. The towns are, 1. Las Zacatecas, forty leagues distant from Guadalaiara, and four-score from Mexico, but neighboured with most rich Mines; and therefore both Garrisoned and also well peopled by the Spaniards: 'Tis supposed there are no less than five hundred Families of them in the Town and about the Mines. 2. St. martin's, twenty seven leagues distant from Zacatecas, and as rich a place; having a Colony of four hundred Spaniards at least. 3. St. Lucas de Avinno. 4. Erena, lesser towns, but both of them rich and seated in the midst of excellent Mines. 6. Nombre de Dios, in the most Northerly part of all this Country, sixty eight leagues distant from Guadalaiara, and founded by the aforesaid Francisco de Tharra; who having subdued and quieted the Natives, and thereby gained to himself the Government of these Countries, granted the propriety of some silver Mines both to the Spaniards and Natives; and by that means drew so many of them thither, that in a short time it became the chiefest and best Peopled town of the whole Province. 7. Durango, in the Valley of Guadiana, eight leagues distant from Nombre de Dios. 8. Xeres de Frontera, a place built on purpose for the repressing of the Chichemecae aforesaid, and other Savages that infested the borders of Guadalaiara, in the regency of the Marquis of Villa Manrique. And lastly St. Lewis, built by Alonso Pacheco, in that part of the Country which is called Vxitipa, and Peopled by him with a Colony of Spaniards; being distant about twenty leagues from Panuco in New-Spain, to which the whole Country of Vxitipa once belonged. 7. New-Biscay hath on the South the Zacatecas; on the West the Country of Cinoloa. Northward it is bounded with New-Mexico; the Eastern borders of it looking towards Florida, not yet well discovered; so called by the Spaniards only from its neighbourhood to New-Gallicia. It is, as the other Provinces, exceedingly rich in silver Mines, and hath some also of lead: which serve principally, as some say, for the refining or purging of the other Metal. The people generally of a stout and resolute disposition, and with much difficulty submitting to the yoke: yea the Spaniards themselves confess, there remain yet to this day four great Towns unreduced, though they lie, as it were, in the middle way, betwixt the Zacatecas aforesaid, and the Mines and Town of St. Barbara of this Province. The Spaniards call them Las quatro Ceinegas, or the four Quagmires, as lying perhaps in the Marshes, or in some fenny and lower parts of the Country. The towns which themselves hold are 1. St. Barbara, famous for the rich Mines about it. 2. St. john's, equal to the other, and not above three or four leagues distant from it. 3. End, the most Northerly town which the Spaniards have in this Country, distant about twenty leagues from the other. These be all Colonies of the Spaniards, and built on purpose for securing the Mines. 7. New-Mexico (as 'tis called for distinction sake) is bounded on the South-west with New-Biscay; more directly Westward with some parts of Quivira: the Countries Northward of it, not yet discovered: Eastward it extends itself as far as Florida. This is, without comparison, the largest Province of all New-Gallicia, having been searched and discovered by the Spaniards above one hundred, some say above two hundred leagues directly Eastward and to the North-East: and they report wonders of it, if we may believe them, at least in respect of what was generally found in these Northern parts of America at their first discovery; as namely, that they have Towns fairly and well built of Lime and Stone, houses of four stories high, and most of them provided with stoves for the winter season, as well as any in Europe: The streets fair and broad, and the People as curious and expert in divers Arts and Manufactures, as any of theirs. More particularly they tell us of a town called Chia, of the Province of Cuames, so big, that it is said to contain eight several Market-places. Another called Acoma, a great Town, but seated on the top of an high Rock, without any ordinary way of access to it, but by a pair of stairs, hewn out of the hard stone; or else by certain ladders which the Inhabitants let down and take up as they please. And likewise of a third, which they call Conibas, containing, as they say, no less than seven leagues in length, & about half as much in breadth, seated upon a Lake, but scatteringly built, and much of the space taken up with mountains and many fair Gardens, in the midst of which the Town standeth. This is certain, that the Country, to which they give the general name of New-Mexico, is of a vast extent, reaching from the Mines of St. Barbara in New-Biscay Eastward and to the North-East above two hundred leagues already discovered, but doubtless taking up no small part of those Countries which are sometimes assigned to Florida, if not of the confines of Virginia also. The first discoverer of this Country was one Augustino Royaz, a Franciscan Friar, about the year 1580, by whose report and encouragement Antonio de Espeio, a Native of Corduba, but then dwelling at Mexico, raised, at his own charges, a Band of an 150 Horsemen, and with a competent number of Slaves, Beasts of carriage, and other necessaries, undertook the business, and discovered many Nations, as the Conchi, Tobosi, Passaguates, Tepoames, Quires, and divers others; still marching on till he arrived at a great River, which he named Rio del Nordt. Here he made some stay and caused the Country on each side of the River to be called Nova-Mexicana, and a City to be built, which he likewise named New-Mexico. It is seated in the 37 degree of Northern latitude, and distant from Old-Mexico four hundred leagues. The name whereof is since changed into that of St. Foy; but the dignity of the place improved: being at present the Metropolis of that Province, a Bishop's Sea, the ordinary Residence of the Governor, and hath a Garrison of about two hundred and fifty Soldiers in it, which both commands the Country and secures their Mines, of which they have some in the towns hereabouts: the chief of which towns are, 1. S. Antonio de Senecu, the first Town which they have upon the Nordt River. 2. Socorro, so named by the Spaniards from the relief which they found there both for themselves and Horses, being almost starved with a long march. 3. Pilabo. 4. Siviletta; all of them old towns, but new named by the Spaniards. 5. St. john's, built some years after the first discovery of the Country by John D' Ognate, a Spaniard, who in the year 1599, or thereabouts over-ran the Country a second time with a greater Army, yet pursuing the tract of d' Espeio, by which means, having gathered together an infinite mass of treasure, he found no better way to secure it, than by building this town. CHAP. VIII. Of New-Spain, and its Provinces. 1. THe Kingdom of Mexico, or New-Spain, was formerly, that is, before the Spaniards conquered and dismembered it, much larger than now it is; for as much as it comprehended the whole Province of New-Gallicia, and reached from the furthest point of the Peninsula of Jucatan Southward; as far as New-Biscay and the confines of Califormia Northward: containing in length seven hundred leagues or more, and about half as much in breadth. But since the conquest by Hernando Cortes and his followers, the whole Country of New-Gallicia is taken from it, and made a distinct Government, or Audiencia, as the Spaniards call it, of itself. The Natives of the Country are of the race of the Chichimecae, a savage and wild sort of People of the Province of New-Gallicia, especially in the parts of New-Biscay, living in Forests and in deep caves under ground; whose posterity do still at this day much trouble and annoy the Country thereabouts; notwithstanding all the endeavours of the Spaniards, and the Garrisons which they keep in those parts on purpose to destroy them. About five hundred years ago or more, according to the account of the Mexican Annals, divers Hoards or Swarms of these Chichimecae, weary, it seems, of their Woods and subterraneous dwellings, issued out into the more open Air, and fell down in huge multitudes into these Southerly parts of America, which are now called Mexico and New-Spain: not all at once, but at several times, and under several names, viz. of the Suchimilci, Chalcae, Tepanecae, Tlascaltecae, and others; who subduing or driving out the People they found in those parts, seated themselves in their room: And though at first every Nation or Company of them, as they came, seized upon some Province apart by themselves, and held it, as it were, in Sovereignty to themselves, without acknowledgement of any dependence or subjection to their Neighbours, or those that were there before them; yet in tract of time, and by fortune of the Wars, which they made one upon another, they all fell under the Government of one King, viz. the King of Mexico: which was the chief City of the Province. This Kingdom, at the time that the Spaniards first discovered the Country, was governed by a Prince, named Motezuma; one, who by his valour and good success in the wars, had in a few years of his reign, before the Spaniards came thither, subdued the better part of a hundred Cities and great Towns to his Dominion; and held in actual submission to his Government, and tributary to him, no less than thirty several Casiques or petty Princes; every one of which paid him Tribute, and were able upon occasion to bring into the field an hundred thousand men. He is said to have been, for his person, a wise and good Prince, just, affable, and tender of his Subjects good: but by reason of some heavy exactions, which his own power and the practice of his Ancestors before him, gave him the confidence to impose upon the conquered People, a great part of his Subjects lived but unwillingly under his obedience, and rather by constraint than otherwise: being also further exasperated against him by one barbarous custom, which the Mexicans frequently used, viz. the Sacrificing of men. Their manner was, whensoever they had any solemn occasion of doing honour to their Devil-god Vitzilopuchtli, as they called him, to send out an Army of men from Mexico, into some of the subdued Provinces, (in case they had no enemies nearer hand) and to fetch in as many men as they thought good, to be sacrificed; whose flesh likewise afterwards they did eat in a solemn Banquet. This being a business of their Satanical Religion, and Motezuma a Prince extremely superstitious and devoted to the service of his gods, it is said, that he sacrificed commonly, one year with another, twenty thousand men, and some years, upon extraordinary occasions, not less than fifty thousand: So great and grievous a Tyranny, by the just judgement and permission of Almighty God, for their great and unnatural sins, did the Enemy of Mankind exercise upon them. He was likewise much given to Women; but it was only to such as were counted his Wives; of which he is said to have had no less than one hundred and fifty with child by him at one time. 2. Cortes, that fortunate Spaniard, who first conquered this rich and mighty Kingdom, soon discovered the discontents and ill affections which a great part of Motezumas People bare towards his Government; and resolved to make his advantage of it. Wherefore, being already landed in the Island Acusamil, or Cozamul, as 'tis often called, and having gained his first battle at Potonchan, and after that another at Cintla, where, with a handful of men (not above five hundred in all) some horse, and a few pieces of Ordinance, he defeated an Army of forty thousand Indians, he quickly obliged those of Zempoallan and Tlascaella to take part with him against Motezuma; and by their means divers others: as likewise they did, assisting him both in his first march towards Mexico with a competent number of Men, and at the siege and taking of it, with an Army of an hundred thousand: In recompense whereof, they enjoy at this day many great Immunities and privileges above the rest of the Americans, and in a manner equal to those of the Spaniards themselves. Motezuma was so frighted with the success of Cortes, and with the revolt of so many of his own Subjects from him, especially upon his gaining a third battle, and sacking of the rich town of Chololla, that at the first he freely admitted him into Mexico, and soon after without much contestation, acknowledged himself Vassal to the Emperor and King of Spain; presenting him in the nature of a Tribute, as much gold as amounted to one hundred and sixty thousand Castlins or pieces of Castille, which are said to be nine shillings and seven pence a piece of common money. Notwithstanding, not long after, upon some differences growing betwixt the Spaniards and People of Mexico, and that a Governor of Motezumas in the Country, named Qualpopoca, had put some Spaniards to death, Motezuma was confined to Cortes his house, and for the more security of his person, a pair of Gives or Fetters put upon his legs; although he utterly disclaimed the fact of Qualpopoca, and caused him with his Son and some others that were complices in the business, to be publicly burnt for it in the Market place of Mexico, and that by the sentence of Cortes himself. The Mexicans, provoked with the injury and indignity offered to their King, in the midst of his Royal City, and in the sight of his People, begin to mutiny and take Arms for the rescue of their Prince. They besiege the Spaniards in their house, together with Motezuma, and press so hard upon them, that the Fetters are taken off, and Motezumas help used for the allaying of the tumult, and quieting the People: and although they keep him still under guard, yet they permit him to command and dispatch all affairs, as freely as if he were at liberty; to be attended by his Noblemen and other Servants, in the full State and dignity of a King; only he went not abroad but some guard of Spaniards were with him. 3. About this time there were certain ships come to Vera Crux, which was a new Port town of this Country that the Spaniards had built since their coming thither, and had landed near upon a thousand men; which was an accident that had like to have spoiled the design of Cortes and all his Company at Mexico: these men being sent by James Velasquez, Governor of Cuba, expressly against Cortes and his men, upon pretence that they acted not conformably to the Commission which they had received from him; and gave him no account of their proceed: which in a great part was true. For it must be confessed, Cortes and his men finding themselves to have fallen upon an adventure that was certainly rich and good; and having got such footing and interest in the Country already, by their success and victories, and chief by their confederacy with so many of the Natives and People of the Country revolted to them, did almost at first▪ by a general consent, renounce their Commission and dependency upon Velasquez, and professed to act immediately from and for the King of Spain. What pretences they had for such a resolution, seemingly at least irregular, is not so well known. What ever they were, they proceed in it, and the whole company, (excepting only some few who yet went along with the rest) choose Cortes anew for their Commander in chief, and appoint likewise, by common consent, all other Officers of Justice, both Civil and Military, among themselves: and to give the better colour at Court to their proceed, they send Portocorrero and Monteio, two of their principals, into Spain, with a rich and huge present, to the Emperor, both to make report of the State of the Country, and to procure immediate Commission from his Majesty, to proceed: after which they advance towards Mexico, as hath been said. Velasquez, at Cuba, understanding their proceed, laboured to intercept both their Messengers and Present, but could not: and therefore sent Pamphilo Narvaez with eleven ships, and about nine hundred or a thousand men, to apprehend Cortes and oppose his proceed. This happened about the time that the differences were but newly calmed betwixt the Spaniards and the People of Mexico; and though it obliged Cortes to leave the City in a wavering and unsettled condition, yet he took such order, that Motezuma still remained under the guard of the Spaniards, as before, assisted with some thousands of their friends of Tlascalla; and he himself taking the rest and some few Spaniards along with him, with undaunted courage and resolution, marched against Narvaez. And such was his good fortune, that not only Narvaez became his prisoner, without much bloodshed, but likewise all his Men joined with him in his design, through the favour of the Chancery, or supreme Court of St. Domingo, and by the procurement of the Licentiate Vasquez de Ayllon, a Judge of it, who was sent with Narvaez to accommodate the differences. 4. With this recruit Cortes marches back again to Mexico; but at his coming finds things in a very bad condition. For the Mexicans were now in an absolute Rebellion, and made open war against the Spaniards; had blocked up those in the City, together with their friends the Tlascaltecans, and either stopped up or possessed themselves of all the Avennues by land or water: so that it was some time before Cortes could get in with his forces. But at last by advantage of the night, in which the Mexicans never use to fight, nor yet to keep any very good guard, he found a passage, and made shift to bring in his forces, to the great rejoicing and encouragement of his men within, who were very hard put to it by the numerous Mexicans, and pressed to yield themselves, and deliver up Motezuma. But upon his coming they took heart again; and he with his fresh Companies sallying out upon the Citizens, easily set them at further distance. But yet their numbers were such, and so infinitely surpassing his, being called in from all parts of the Kingdom not revolted, and their resolution such to destroy or starve the Spaniards, as they would neither admit, nor so much as hear of any terms of Accommodation; which Cortes proffered them divers times: their general cry being nothing else, but Get you hence, deliver up the King; and calling them Enemies, Thiefs, Robbers, and what not? and truly the condition of the Spaniards was such, and the Mexicans had them so much in their power, if not to kill, yet at least to starve them, by reason of their infinite numbers, which daily increased, and by being so much Masters of the City both by land and water, and having broken down all, or most of the bridges, by which only there was passage out of it, that the Spaniards would gladly have been gone, if they durst: but they knew, their but offering to leave the City would be their destruction. Mexico is built, like Venice, upon the water, in the midst of an huge Lake, having three only ways to enter it by land, which are upon three several Causeys, of a league, two leagues, and half a league long; and of but little breadth: on all other parts it is surrounded by the Lake, which by sundry and large Channels enters and waters the City in all the quarters of it; where they have draw-bridges to pull up and let down at pleasure. At these passes the Spaniards knew very well they should be overpowered by their enemies; who by this time were grown so resolute and hardy, that they seemed not to fear or regard death, but in fight would run desperately in multitudes even upon the mouths of the Ordinance: and doubtless but for the Horsemen, which staved them off, they would in a short time have rendered them in a manner useless, and have choked them up (as it were) with their own dead bodies. In this hurly-burly and distress the Spaniards, whither by force or otherwise, procured Motezuma (who was yet in their power) to appear above upon a Gallery, or flat of roof the house, upon a pretence, that he should offer some terms of accommodation from the Spaniards, and to show himself to be well: But it was in a place where the stones and arrows flew so thick from the enraged multitude below, that Motezuma himself received a wound, by one of them, in his head, so unhappily, that within a few days after he died of it: as they say, who would not have the Spaniards thought to have murdered him; as the Mexicans say they did, with divers other Noblemen, and some of his Children, the very night they fled. However it were, not long after his death, out of extreme necessity, and chief for want of Victuals, the Spaniards were forced to leave the City in the night time, and with the loss of four hundred and fifty of their men, who were slain or taken prisoners at the passing of a drawbridge; the rest making a heavy retreat to their friends at Tlascalla. There is standing at this day in Mexico, upon the place where so many of them were killed, a certain Hermitage, which they call Los Martyrs, or the Hermitage of the Martyrs; but very improperly, saith mine Author, their own Countryman: for what reason I shall not here inquire. 5. This retreat of the Spaniards out of Mexico happened to be upon the tenth of July after midnight in the year 1520, which the Spaniards at Mexico call the doleful night. Nevertheless the undaunted Cortes, being got, though with huge difficulty and trouble, by reason of the pursuit of the Mexicans for a good part of the way, to his sure friends of Tlascalla, neither lost his courage, nor gave over his resolution of yet gaining Mexico: especially the way being now laid open, and sufficient occasion given, by the death of Motezuma, and the provocations of the Mexicans themselves, to make himself absolute and sole Lord of the place. Wherefore having sent for, and procured a competent supply of fresh Soldiers from St. Domingo, or Hispaniola, Almeria, Cuba, and other places, being in all nine hundred Foot, eight hundred Horse, and seventeen pieces of Ordinance, he joins himself with the Auxiliary Forces of Tlascalla, which were no less than an hundred thousand men, armed with Bows and Arrows: and with this Army marches again towards Mexico, and besieges it both by Land and Water, viz. with the help of thirteen Vergantines, or Galliots, which he had built upon the Lake, and six thousand Canoas', or little Boats, which his friends and confederates had procured him. By which means, and by his Army on Land, in a short time he cut off all Provision from the City, and after a siege of full three months or more; and a most stout and obstinate resistance made by the People within, in which they are said to have lost above a hundred thousand men, beside those which perished by famine, sickness, or otherwise, he took it by force upon tuesday the thirteenth of August 1521, sacked it first, and then burned it to the ground: yet afterwards he caused it to be rebuilt again, far more beautifully than at first it was; as in due place we shall further see. They speak not of above fifty Spaniards slain during the whole siege, six horses, and not many Tlascaltecans. In this manner, and with so little charges to the Conqueror, there fell to the Crown of Spain the richest and goodliest Kingdom (one of them) of the whole World, viz. the Kingdom of Mexico, which the Conquerors presently named New-Spain; and in reference to which name, the Catholic King hath ever since styled himself in the plural Hispaniarum Rex, or King of both Spain's: and all by the valour, prudence, admirable resolution, and happy conduct of Cortes; who was at first but a private Adventurer in the American Plantations and discoveries, though otherwise a Gentleman of a good Family in Spain, born at Medellin in the Country of Estramedura. The Emperor Charles the fifth, who was then also King of Spain, for his great services endowed him deservedly with many great and rich Territories in the Provinces of Tlascalla, Mechoacan, and other parts thereabouts, made him Marquis of the Valley, viz. of Guaxata, (which is his chief Title) a rich and flourishing Province of that Country, Captain General, or Commander in chief, of all the Military forces of New-Spain, and General Discoverer of all the Maritime parts and Coasts of America towards the South-Sea, assigning him in propriety the twelfth part of whatsoever should be discovered, to him and his Heirs for ever: But denied him the Government of Mexico out of reason of State; though 'tis said, he much desired it. 6. The bounds of this Kingdom at present are thus. On the East it hath a large Arm of the Sea, which they call the Bay of New-Spain, or the Gulf of Mexico: On the West it hath some parts of New-Gallicia and Mare deal Zur: On the North the rest of New-Gallicia, and part of Florida: and on the South Mare del Zur again, and part of Guatimala. It extendeth itself in length from the furthest point of Jucatan Southeast, to the borders of New-Gallicia Northward, above one thousand Italian miles; and in breadth from Panuco to the South-Sea, about half so much. It lieth wholly under the Torrid Zone; nor is it a Country generally so mountainous or high seated, as some others of America are, but for the most part levelly or low; yet is it so fanned, for three parts at least of four, by the cooling blasts off the Sea, and the heats otherwise so moderated with frequent rains, which it hath constantly three months in the year, viz. June, July, and August, that the Air is rendered thereby exceeding temperate and agreeable, and the Climate not unhealthful, especially to temperate bodies, and such as be never so little used to it. A goodly Country it is, of inexhaustible wealth and riches; whether we regard the Mines of Gold, Silver, Brass, Iron, etc. of all which it hath many, and very good; or the Fruits of the Earth, abundance of , plenty of Corn and Grain, or any other Commodities and endowments of Nature; which serve for the enriching of the World. Among other things it affords good store of Cassia; the fruit whereof is a thing well known and much commended by the Apothecaries for its use in Physic, especially for Purgations, and removing of all obstructions of phlegm, choler, etc. Such store of Balm, Amber, all sorts of Gums and precious Liquors, as no Country in the World is better furnished with matter of excellent Perfumes and Physic, than the Kingdom of New-Spain is; abundance of Coco-nuts, and such plenty of that excellent Dye, called Coccinele, that 'tis said, no less than five or six thousand Arrobes of Spanish measure (which make above five times so many English Bushels) are yearly transported thence. Good plenty likewise both of Wheat and Maiz, with Barley and Pulse of all sorts: All kind of garden Herbs, Roots and Plants in so great abundance, and so admirably thriving, that 'tis scarcely to be believed. Whole Woods and Forests, as it were, of Oranges, Limmons, Citrons and other such fruit, as hath been said. Some Cherries; but of Apples, Pears, and Figgs, etc. beyond measure. The Natives of the Country very ingenious in divers Mechanical Arts, especially in making of feather-Pictures; a piece of curiosity, wherein they are held to be incomparably, or rather inimitably excellent; and so industrious at it, that although the Americans generally be not a People over much addicted to any kind of labour or study, yet at this they will sit a whole day together, without either meat or drink, only out of a natural affection they have to the work, and a desire to be excellent in it. The Country indeed affords them great variety of Birds, and other Fowl, of most rare and exquisite colours; which is a great advantage to their skill, and helps much to the accomplishment of their work. They paint likewise very curiously upon their Cottons; and are held to be generally the best Goldsmiths in the world; of most perfect skill in the purging and refining of all sorts of Metals, but especially of Gold and Silver. And yet in other things so strangely stupid and ignorant, that when the Spaniards first appeared among them on Horseback, 'tis reported, not a few of them took the Horse and Man both for one Cteature; and when the Horse neighed, they would inquire very seriously, what he said. There be likewise many fair Lakes in the Province of New-Spain; but the principal are those of Chapala and Mexico: the former of which is in the more Northern parts of the Kingdom, towards the borders of New Gallicia, and is chief famous for the abundance of good Salt that is yearly made and transported thence. The other of Mexico is the largest and goodliest (one of them) in the World, of circular form, and containing, as some say, little less than nine hundred miles in comp●●s, environed with the main Land, the Peninsula or Cape of Florida, Jucatan, and the Island Cuba; having two only passages in and out, and both of them well fortified: the one betwixt the point of Jucatan, and the Isle Cuba, where the tide violently enters; and the other betwixt the said Island and the Cape Florida, where it goeth as violently out: upon which Gulf the King of Spain hath always some good ships in readiness for all occasions; and by them 'tis supposed, he doth more assure his Estates in those parts of America, than by all his Garrisons beside. The whole Kingdom of New-Spain is subdivided into these inferior Provinces, viz. 1. Panuco. 2. Mexicana. 3. Mechoacan. 4. Tlascalla. 5. Guaxata. 6. Chiapa: and 7. Jucatan. 7. Panuco is the most Northerly Province of New-Spain, by some called Guasteca, bounded on the East with the Gulf of Mexico: on the West with Vxitipa, a Country of New-Gallicia: on the North with some undiscovered Countries of Florida, from which it is divided by the River of Palms; on the South with Mechoacan and Mexicana. It is called Panuco from a River of that name; which running from the mountains Tepecsuan in New Gallicia, and, dividing New-Biscay from the Province of Zacatecas, passeth through the midst of this Country also, and at last emptieth itself into the Gulf. The Country is reckoned to be about fifty leagues in length, and not much less in breadth; of a fruitful Soil, having some Mines of gold in it, and once very Populous, till Hernando Cortes and the Spaniards, about the year 1522, dispeopled it by their cruelty. The chief towns now remaining and inhabited by the Spaniards are, first St. Lewis de Tampice, a Colony of Spaniards situate on the Northern bank of the River Panuco, at the very mouth of it; where it hath a very large Haven, but so barred with sands, that no ship of any great burden can enter or abide in it with safety; and yet the River otherwise so deep, that Vessels of five hundred tun, might sail up threescore leagues at least within land, and thereby visit the rich Mines of Zatatecas on the one side of it, and of New-Biscay on the other, at pleasure, and without fear of much opposition. 2. St. Stevan del Puerto on the South side of the same River, eight leagues distant from the Sea or Gulf of Mexico; at present the Metropolis or chief town of the Province, built by Cortes, in the place where stood old Panuco, which was likewise the Metropolis or head town of the Natives, before the Spaniards burnt and destroyed it. 3. St. Jago de los Valles. This is a Frontier place, and enjoyeth certain speciar Immunities and some fair possessions also foe defence of the Country against the Savages. It is twenty five leagues distant from St. Steven del Puerto, lying in an open or Champain Country, and is fenced about with a wall of Earth. 8. Mechoacan hath on the North-East Panuco; on the East Mexicana, properly so called, on the South part of Tlascalla; on the West the main Ocean, or Mare deal Zur; and last of all more directly Northward Xalisco, which is a Province of New Gallicia. The name signifieth in the American language, as much as a Fish Country; & so it is, having many fair Lakes and Rivers in it abundantly well stored with good Fish. The Country so exceedingly pleasant and healthful, that 'tis usual for sick persons of other Provinces to come hither to recover their health, only by the benefit of a good Air. The Soil so abundantly fertile of all sorts of grain, that of four measures of seed, it hath been often observed, they have reaped the next harvest more than so many hundred measures of the same grain. Very well wooded; and by reason of its many Rivers and fresh springs equally rich in good pasture: and beside great plenty of Medicinal Herbs and Plants. It affordeth good store of Amber nigh the Sea Coasts, Mulberry-trees, & consequently Silks; much Honey, wax and divers other Commodities, both for necessity and pleasure. The People of the Country are generally tall, of a strong active body, and a good wit, especially in comparison of other Natives: not unskilful in divers curious Manufactures; and the most excellent Feather-Picturers, aforementioned, are said to be found in this Province. They seem more generally inclined to the humours and customs of the Spaniards, than many other Americans; and received the preaching of Christian Religion, when time was, with much willingness: so that the Country is now entirely Christian, and divided into several Parishes. There are said to be in it one hundred and fifty Towns or Burroughs (beside many scattered Villages) most of which have free Schools erected in them, for the training up of youth in Christian Religion, good literature and Arts; and few of them without an Hospital for the sick, of which towns the principal are such as follow, viz. Zinzoutza, the seat of the ancient Kings of Mechoacan. 2. Pascuar, a City forty seven leagues distant from Mexico, once a Bishop's Sea, but now removed to Valladolit. 3. Valladolit, the Metropolis or chief City of the Province, since the Episcopal chair was removed from Pascuar thither. It lieth upon a great Lake, equal almost for bigness to that of Mexico, and is about seven leagues distant from Pascuar, towards the East. 4 St. michael's, a good town, forty leagues Westward of Mexico, and in the way to the Zacatecas, but lying in a road that is somewhat dangerous, being not a little infested with Savages on both sides of it. 5. St. Philip's. 6. La Conception de Salaya, 17 leagues distant from Valladolid, and a convenient stage for Travellers; being indeed, with the two last mentioned, built chief for the defence and securing of the Country against the Savages. 7. Guaxanato, a Town on the borders of Panuco, where there are very rich Mines of silver. 8. Leon, another Town likewise of very rich Mines, twenty four leagues distant from Valladolid, and threescore from Mexico. 9 Zamorra. 10. Villa de los Lagos, and others. Towards the Sea there is, 1. Acatlan, but two miles distant from the Coast, and a small town; yet by reason of a safe and very good Harbour which it hath for shipping, a place of no little trading. 2. Natividad, another well known and convenient Haven upon Mare del Zur, pertaining to this Province, and from whence they usually set sail for the Philippine Islands. 3. St. Jago de buena Speranza, so called by the Spaniards, perhaps from the abundance of good Pearls they found upon this Coast. 4. Colyma. 5. Zacatula, and some others. This Province, as we said, was at first a distinct Kingdom of itself, yet subordinate and tributary to that of Mexico; the King whereof named Tamgaivan Bimbicha (as Laet reporteth) at the first coming of the Spaniards thither, after the conquest of Mexico, voluntarily submitted himself to them, and was baptised. Nevertheless afterwards, upon a pretence of I know not what Treason intended by him against them, and which the Spanish Writers themselves professedly think to have been feigned▪ by command of Nunnez de Gusman, Precedent of the Chancery of Mexico, he was most inhumanely burnt alive, and the Spaniards seized upon his Kingdom. 9 Mexicana, specially so called, is bounded on the East with the Gulf of Mexico; on the West with Mechoacan: on the North with Panuco, and some parts of New-Gallicia; and on the South with Tlascalla: so called from Mexico, which is the chief City of the Province, and of all America beside. A large and rich Country, containing not much less than one hundred and thirty leagues both in length and breadth; and if it yields any thing to Peru in the plenty of gold and silver, 'tis certain, it much excels it in many other commodities: as namely in all sorts of Fruits, abundance of , plenty of Corn and Grain; in all which the advantage which this Country hath, not only of Peru, but of all the other Provinces of America beside, is well known: not to speak any thing of the great plenty and variety of good Fish, which both the Rivers and Lakes of this Country afford, which is very great: insomuch that the very tribute of the one Lake of Mexico is said to yield an Income of above twenty thousand Crowns yearly, one with another. The People of the Country are generally industrious and active, especially since the Spaniards came among them; rich Merchants, if they apply themselves to it; and they say likewise good Soldiers, when they are trained and employed that way. The chief towns and places of the Province are, 1. Mexico, both anciently and at present the Metropolis and Capital City; being the seat of an Archbishop, and the ordinary Residence of the Viceroy and chief Governors of New-Spain. Formerly it stood like another Venice, upon the water, being built upon certain Islands within the Lake, and interlaced in all the quarters of it with divers pleasant Currents, both of fresh and salted water. But the old City being destroyed by Cortes, as we said, it was rebuilt by him more upon the firm Land, almost upon the banks of the great Lake; (for there are two of them, the one of salt-water, the other of fresh; which continually ebb and flow into one another, & contain in the compass of the whole, about thirty leagues or more: upon which there are thought to be not less than forty or fifty thousand Canoas' or little Boats continually plying from one Town to another;) and in the midst of a fair Plain, or Champaign Country, containing likewise, as some say, not less than sixty or seventy leagues in compass, and environed with mountains of so great height, that the tops of them are said to be continually covered with snow. At present it is thought to be one of the richest Cities of the World, abounding (if reports be true) in all kind of voluptuous gallantry and bravery, even to excess: It is supposed to contain about six or seven miles in compass, and to consist of above an hundred thousand Houses or Families▪ whereof not the tenth part Spaniards: but those that are, be all Gentlemen, I mean as to their garb and manner of living; for they live most splendidly in all respects, both for diet and apparel. For the first, we have spoken so much already of the general plenty of all things in the Kingdom of New-Spain, that pertain to this part of pleasure, that it is not to be doubted: and for the second this may be some instance, viz. that it is no extraordinary matter to see an Hatband and Role all of Diamonds, in some ordinary Gentleman's Hat; and of Pearl among the common Citizens and Tradesmen. The Coaches (which most Gentlemen keep) almost covered with gold and silver, richly beset with precious stones, and within ordinarily lined with cloth of gold, or the best China silk that can be gotten: of which Coaches, in time of year, at the Alameda, as they call it, which is, as it were, the Hide Park of Mexico, and a place made of purpose for recreation and delight, a man shall observe not seldom, above a thousand or two thousand Coaches, full of Ladies and Gallants coming thither only to take the air and their pleasure, both the one and the other attended with a numerous train of servants and Mulattos of both sexes. In la Plateria, which is but one only street in Mexico, nigh to the Vice-Roys Palace, in less than half an hours space, with the turn of an eye, you may see millions of wealth in Gold, Silver, and precious Stones, in the Goldsmiths and Jeweller's shops thereabouts. In a word, there is nothing hinders Mexico from being the most absolute City in the World for delight and bravery, but only two inconvinces to which it is subject. The one is the danger of the Lake; with the Infalls whereof it may seem to be almost continually threatened, and in the year 1629, did actually suffer a very great calamity: the waters breaking through the banks, and drowning a great part of the City, with the destruction of much People, and the loss of all their goods entirely, through the avarice (as is supposed) of the Viceroy that then was, and some other of the King's Officers, who diverted the money that should have been employed, for the fortifying and repairing of the banks, to their proper uses. The other is from the Nature of the Soil and ground itself, on which the City standeth; which is found to have a tincture of of salt-Nitre in it, somewhat strong; and the winds partly from the Lake itself, and partly from the Hills about it, raising the dust of this earth constantly every evening, for many months of the year together, so violently, that the Air is even darkened therewith for some time: the Inhabitants are much annoyed by it, and made subject to divers Hypochondriacal pains and infirmities, and sometimes killed with it, especially such as either cannot or care not much to avoid it. The City lieth about 60 leagues or one hundred and fifty miles distant from the Atlantic or North Sea; from whence by the Port of St. John D'Vllua, or Vera Crux, (which are the usual landing places) there is a fair and easy march to Mexico, by the Cities of Xalapa, Perotta, Puebla de los Angelos, and Tlascalla, all of them open and unfortified places (as likewise Mexico itself is) and the Country round about very rich and well accommodated with all things. The second town of this Province is Tescuco, an ancient and fair City seated upon the same Lake six or seven leagues distant from Mexico, to which it yields not much either for beau-or bravery. 3. Quitlavaca, a City built wholly upon certain Islets within the Lake, and therefore called sometimes by the Spaniards Venezuela, or Little-Venice, having one only passage by Land to it, over a Causey of flintstone half a league or more in length, and about sixteen or twenty foot broad. 4. Vztacpalapa, a City of ten thousand Households or thereabnuts, six leagues distant from Tescuco, and about twenty from Mexico. 5. Mexicaltzingo a Burrow of four thousand Households. 6. Cuyacan, of six thousand: All these are seated upon the Lake. Further from the Lake there is Chololla, a great City and a rich place, not much inferiourto Mexico. Anciently this City was, as it were, the Sanctuary of the Mexican Kings, and the chief place of their barbarous and inhuman Superstitions, where yearly not less than five or six thousand Indian Children of both sexes were sacrificed to Vitzilopuchtli, that is, to the Devil. It was likewise the chief burying place of all the Mexican Nobility, whose Tombs and Monuments there afforded the Spaniards at their first rifling of them, an infinite mass of Treasure; and yet not half so much, as by report, they both desired and expected. 2. Mastitlan, a Town pleasantly seated upon the top of an huge mountain, in the midst of most delicate Groves and shady Woods round about it, and reckoned to contain not less than thirty thousand Inhabitants in all, dwelling either in the City, or upon the sides of the Mountain. 3. Autepecque, this is a Town belonging to the Marquis de Valle, who is of the Posterity of Cortes, and said to be seated in the most delicious place of all New-Spain. 4. Acapulco, a Town seated upon the South-Sea, or Mare deal Zur, yet belonging to this Province. It is a Haven Town and one of the most frequented upon the South Sea, situate upon a large and capacious Bay of about a league broad at the entrance, and affording many convenient stations and Docks for shipping. At the bottom of the Bay Westward lieth the Town, with a strong Castle very opportunely built both for the command and security of the Port, well walled and fortified with Bulwarks, and having a constant Garrison of four hundred Soldiers in it, or thereabouts. The reason whereof I suppose may be chief this, viz. that from this Port there is the greatest traffic and intercourse held betwixt the East and West-Indies, together with the Philippine Islands. The Country hath many rich Mines of silver in it, and some of Gold: the chief of which first are by Herera reported to be these, viz. 1. those of Puchuca, fourteen leagues distant from Mexico. 2. Of Tasco, twenty four leagues distant. 3. Talpuiana. 4. Cultepeque. 5. Zacualpa. 6. Zupanguo, and divers others. 10. Tlascalla is a Province of New-Spain, which extendeth itself entirely from one Sea to another, viz. from the Atlantic to Mare del Zur, with which it is bounded on the East and West parts; lying otherwise and for the most part betwixt the Provinces of Mexicana last spoken of, and that of Guaxata which followeth; containing in length, viz. from one Sea to the other, not much less than an hundred leagues, and in some places fourscore in breadth; but towards the South-Sea growing much narrower. It is a Country exceedingly plentiful both of Corn and , full of rich pasturage, and so plentifully stored with Maiz, some Wheat, and other Grain, that it is counted, as it were, the Granary of America. The People of this Country, when the Spaniards first landed among them, lived in the form of a Commonwealth or Free State, refusing to be subject to the King of Mexico, with whom they had almost continual War; and upon that account, as hath been said, assisted Cortes in the Conquest of the Kingdom: and without whose help 'tis most certain, he had never been able to do any thing. They enjoy therefore many special Privileges and Immunities, more than other Americans do. They pay no tribute but only an handful of Wheat yearly for every person, in way of acknowledgement and otherwise living under the protection of the Spaniards, wholly in the form of their ancient Government. The whole Province is said to contain two hundred good Towns and Burroughs, and more than one thousand Villages, all of them exceedingly populous, and supposed to contain in the whole above a million and half of Natives, beside Spaniards, who have some few Colonies in the Country for securing of it. The chief Towns of the Province are, 1. Tlascalla itself, which denominates the whole Country as the Metropolis of it. It is a fair town, and commodiously seated in the midst of a large and fertile Campaign of threescore miles in compass. It consisteth of four large and beautiful streets or quarters, and in the midst of them where they all meet, hath a Piazza, or Market place, equal to that of Mexico, and able to receive twenty or thirty thousand persons conveniently to buy and sell in it. 2. Puebla de los Angeles, or the City of Angels, a town built by Sebastian Ramirez, a Churchman, and he that was the first precedent or chief Governor of Mexico, under the Crown of Castille. It was built in the year 1531, almost in the road way from Vera Crux to Mexico; and seated in a very delicate and fertile Country, and of a good Air. It is a Bishop's Sea, and valued at twenty thousand Ducats of yearly Rent; the City itself supposed to contain about fifteen hundred Families; where there is abundance of excellent cloth made, and for fineness not yielding to the best of Spain. 3. Zempoallan, seated upon a River of the same name. 4. Napaluca. 5. Guaxacingo: all of them great and ancient towns of the Natives. 6. Segura de la Frontera, a Spanish town, built by Cortes presently upon the Conquest of Mexico, for the securing of the confines, as the name importeth. 7. Vera Crux, a town built by Cortes and his Companions, at their first landing; and where afterward, by a stratagem, and out of a resolution either to Conquer or die in the Country, he caused all his ships to be burnt, that his Soldiers might not so much as think of returning back from whence they came. The town was at first built five or six leagues up within land; but the place being found not to be so healthful, the Inhabitants in a short time deserted it, and seated themselves upon a Bay of the Sea right over against St. John D'ullua. 8. Medellin, another Spanish town, built likewise by Cortes, in memory of his own birth place; which was Medellin, a small town of Estramedura, a Province of Spain. Lastly, St. John D'ullua, a noted and the most usual Port to all this Province, and likewise to the City of Mexico itself, from the North Sea: but of difficult entrance, especially to such as are not well acquainted with the passage, or want Guides; by reason of certain Rocks and quicksands, wherewith the mouth of the Haven is said to be barred: but within, the station is more safe. It hath likewise two strong Bulwarks or Forts raised, on either side of the entrance one, to defend the passage. 11. Guaxata hath on the North the Bay of Mexico; on the South Mare del Zur; on the East Jucatan and Chiapa, which is one of the Provinces of Guatimala; on the West Tlascalla. The Country extendeth itself upon the South Sea about an hundred leagues in length, but from the Sea to the borders of Tlascalla one hundred and twenty: Eastward not above half so much; having a good Air, and a Soil no less fruitful, especially in Mulberry trees, and a great abundance of Silks, which the Country affordeth more than any other Province of America beside. Nor is it less rich in Mines of gold and silver; there being scarce a River in the whole Country, but the sands of it are said to be tinctured more or less with that yellow Metal. It yields likewise great plenty of Cassia and Cocchinele, two rich Commodities: and the People generally, if they would takes pains, might be the wealthiest, 'tis thought, of any other in America: but whether it be through any voluntary contempt of Riches, or through any natural sloathfullness, as yet they seem to pine in the midst of plenty, living, for the most part of them, little better than from hand to mouth; nevertheless exceeding liberal of what they have, especially to such as bear the habit of Religion, and attend the service of their Souls; maintaining in a plentiful and good manner, as 'tis said, no less than one hundred and twenty Convents of Religious Men, of several Orders, in this only Province; besides Hospitals, Schools for the training up of Youth, and other places of public Charity. It is subdivided into many particular Provinces; which, because they are many and but small, in comparison of some other, we may call Wapentakes, or Hundreds, rather than Provinces: the principal whereof are these that follow, viz. 1. Misteca. 2. Tutepecque. 3. Zapoteca. 4. Guazacoalco. 5. Gueztaxatla: and 6. the Valley of Guaxata, from whence Cortes, after the Conquest of Mexico, had his title given him by the Emperor, Marquis of the Valley. It is the richest and most pleasant part of the whole Province, extended in a continued tract together full sixteen leagues or more, lying about fourscore Southward of Mexico, and wanting neither Mines of gold and silver nor any other of the prime and best Commodities of the New-World. The towns of principal note inhabited by the Spaniards in this Province are, first Antequera, in the Valley aforesaid, a stately City, and beautified with a fair Cathedral Church, built with pillars of the finest Marble, of great height and bigness. 2. St. Ildephonso. 3. St. Jago, commonly called St. Jago of the Valley Nexatapa; yet is itself a City fairly seated upon a Hill. 4. Del Spirito Santo, a town built by Gonsalvo Sandovall, in the year 1526, distant not above three leagues from the Gulf or Bay of Honduras. 5. Aguatulco, otherwise called Guatulco, a noted and convenient Haven, or Port-town upon the South Sea, yet pertaining to this Province: A rich place by reason of the trade from Mexico to Peru, and from Peru to Mexico, which passeth all through this town. There are reckoned of the Natives of this Province not less than six hundred and fifty Burroughs and Villages, and in them above an hundred and fifty thousand persons that pay tribute; beside Women and Children, and Spaniards in great number. 12. Jucatan is a Peninsula, or half-Island, encompassed for the most part with the Sea; save only to the South-west, where it is joined to Guaxata: it's farther and more Easterly point looking towards Cuba. The whole Province contains in compass nine hundred miles or more, the Air somewhat hot, and the Soil not altogether so fertile in all Commodities, as some other parts of New-Spain are: yet are the People therefore more industrious living for the most part by Handicrafts and Trades, and much more willing to take pains than their Neighbour's. They report some special things of this Province of Jucatan, as namely, that the People of the Country used generally, and long before the Spaniards came thither, a certain Ceremony of Religion, not much unlike to our Baptism, and which they called by a name that in their language signified Regeneration, or a second Birth; that they observed it so diligently, that few or none among them omitted to initiate themselves by it, believing, that thereby the Seeds and groundwork of all goodness was laid in them, and that they were fortified by it against the assaults and molestations of evil-Spirits: That after they were three or four years old, till they came to twelve, they usually thus washed and baptised themselves; and that none were permitted among them to marry, that were not first initiated after this manner: That they chose likewise a solemn day upon which to do this; and fasted (at least the Father and Mother of the party to be initiated) always three days before: and that a great many of the Natives had a Tradition, or general report among them, that of ancient time this Province of Jucatan was possessed and cultivated by a certain People which came thither from the East, after a tedious long wandering and many hardships endured at Sea, having escaped the hands of their Enemies only through the power of God, or the Deity they worshipped; who helped them, and made them to pass securely, even through the waves of the Sea. All which, if true, seems not a little to confirm the report which goeth for current in the Welsh Chronicles, of one Madoc ap Owen the son of Guineth, a Prince of that Country, who is said to have fallen upon a fare Country this way in his travels; which he liked so well, that having secured to his Companions their safe abode there, during his absence, he returned himself into Wales for more Men; and that he transported thither as many as he could carry in ten Barks full laden. This he is said to have done about the year of our Lord 1170. But neither he nor any of his Men were ever heard of since; and the success of the expedition, it seems, little enquired after by the Welsh. However the relation seems not altogether incredible, or beyond belief. The chief towns of the Province are, 1. Merida, in the Navel of the Country, and the seat of the Governor, twelve leagues distant from the Sea on either side. 2. Valladolidt, thirty leagues distant from Merida. 3. Campeche, a great town consisting of about three thousand households or more, when first conquered by the Spaniards; who found such Monuments of Art and curious industry in it, as did clearly argue, that the place had been once possessed by some People that were not barbarous. It is now called St. Francisco, and was surprised in the year 1596 by Captain Parker, an English man, who took the Governor himself and some other persons of quality prisoners, and carried them away with him, together with a ship richly laden with gold and silver, beside other Commodities of good value. 4. Tabasco, by the Spaniard now called Villa de Nuestra Sennara de Victoria, and commonly Victoria only, in memory, as 'tis thought, of the first great victory which Cortes obtained over these People at the battle of Potonchan, as hath been said. 5. Cintla. 6. Potonchan. 7. Salamanca. All along the Coast of this Country there lie certain Islands, some within the Bay or Gulf called Honduras, pertaining to the next Province, as 1. La Zarza. 2. La Desconescida. 3. Vermeia. 4. Los Negrillos; and some without it, as 1. Zaratan. 2. Pantoia. 3. De Mugeres, or the Island of Women; so named by the Spaniards, who at their first discovery of these parts, for a long time together could meet with none but Women. The chief of them is called Acusamil, commonly Cozamul, and is fifteen leagues in length, and about five broad, and was, as it were, the thoroughfare, or common road of the Spaniards when they first discovered the Countries of New-Spain. For first here landed Ferdinando de Corduba, after him John de Griialva, and others; and last of all, the fortunate Cortes. It is now called St. Crux. CHAP. IX. Of Guatimala. 1. GVatimala is the last general Province of this Northern part of America, and brings us down to the Isthmus or neck of Land, which, as we said, joineth the Northern and Southern parts of the New-World together. This Country, viz. Guatimala, is bounded Northward with the Peninsula of Jucatan abovesaid, and part of the Gulf or Bay of Honduras; on the South with Mare del Zur: on the East and Southeast it hath Castilia aurea: and on the West New-Spain. The length of it lieth upon the coast of Mare deal Zur, and is said to be little less than three hundred leagues; but the breadth not half so much in any place, and in some very narrow. It is generally a fertile and good Country in all respects, but especially abounding in and good Pastures: being subdivided into six inferior Provinces or Countries, which are, 1. Chiapa. 2. Verapaz. 3. Guatimala, specially so called. 4. Honduras. 5. Nicaragua: And lastly, 6. Veragua. 2. Chiapa is bordered on the West with New-Spain; on the East with Vera paz: on the North with Jucatan: and on the South with Mare del Zur. It is a Country much shaded with Woods, and those replenished with many fair and goodly trees, of divers sorts and of the largest size, as Oaks, Pines, Cedar, and Cypress trees; besides others which yield them a good kind of Rosin, precious Gums, etc. It hath likewise good plenty of Cocchinele: but as for Mines either of gold or silver, I observe not much to be spoken; the Country is supposed to afford some, but hitherto no great search hath been made; possibly for want of Labourers to work in the Mines. The only inconvenience which the Country seemeth to lie under, is the abundance of Serpents, or Snakes which it breedeth: there are some of them said to be twenty foot long or more; and do not a little infest the Natives: who yet are not without a general Antidote or Remedy which the Country likewise naturally affordeth: which is nothing else but the leaves of some of their trees dried to powder; of which they make a plaster of sovereign efficacy, as 'tis said, against their venom; and otherwise generally good for any old and inveterate sores. The places of more principal note in this Country inhabited by the Spaniards, are 1. Ciudad Real, pleasantly seated in the midst of a round Vale or Plain, and almost encompassed with Hills round about it, in form of an Amphitheatre; at the foot of one of which, standing in the midst of the rest, the City is built. It is a City specially privileged by the Kings of Spain; of a pure and temperate Air, and the Country about plentifully abounding both in Corn and Fruit. 2. Chiapa, which giveth name to the Valley aforesaid; it is a Bishop's Sea, and famous, if but for one of its Prelates, viz. Bartholomaeus de las Casas, of the Order of Preachers, who was Bishop of this City, and his memory justly precious among the poor Americans at this day, for his Charity towards them, and for the stout and zealous opposition which he made against the Spaniards cruel and inhuman deal with the Natives at the beginning of their Conquests: by which at last, notwithstanding much difficulty and resistance made by interessed persons of the other side, he procured them liberty, and an Edict from the Emperor in favour of them; whereby they were declared to be Free People, and not Slaves; and the Spaniards forbidden to use them any longer as such, or to force them to any kind of labour against their wills, or otherwise than by agreement with them, which liberty they enjoy to this day; and though the Spaniaiards are said to give them very small wages in some places, and for their work in their Sugar Mills (which is no small labour) not above five royals or two Shillings six Pence a week, for the maintenance of themselves, their Wives and Children, yet by reason, it is with their consent, and in a Country where all things are plentiful and cheap: their condition is much better than it was, and the favour which that good Bishop did them, never to be forgotten. It is at present a great City and populous, and lieth almost in the middle way betwixt the Cities of Mexico and Guatimala. 3. St. bartholomew's. 4. Tecpatlan and some others belonging to the Natives. 3. Vera paz, or the Country of True peace, was so named by the Spaniards, as they say, because it was never conquered by the Sword, but reduced to obedience only by the preaching of the Dominican Friars. It is bounded on the West and South-west with Chiapa; on the East with some part of Guatimala, and Honduras, and on the North with Jucatan, It Contains about thirty leagues length, and almost as much in breadth, being a woody and mountainous Country for the most part, yet well distinguished with Valleys and lower ground. It is thought to be a little too much subject to rain, which 'tis said to have for nine months of the year almost continually; by reason whereof the Country, being otherwise hot, is much annoyed with a kind of Mosquit, or great sort of Gnatts, which spoil the fruit very much, and are otherwise not a little troublsome to the people. The chief Commodities of this Country, are first a kind of Amber, which some call liquid Amber, which drops from divers of their trees, and is said to be a Commodity very precious and of much use. Mastic, Sazaparilla, China wood, and divers other Medicinal woods, which it affordeth in great plenty. But as for any Towns or places of much Traffic or note, inhabited by the Spaniards; I find not any named, save only St. Augustine's; near unto which, there is said to be a Cave and Fountain within ground, which converts the water that falleth into it, out of several lesser Springs, into a kind of Alabaster, or stone perfectly white, and fashions it likewise into pillars, statues, and other artificial forms very curiously, as Laet reporteth. 4. Guatimala, specially so called, hath on the West the river Xicalapa, which divides it from Vera paz. On the East it is bounded with the Country of Nicaragua, on the North with Honduras, and on the South with Mare del Zur. The Country by reason of its Neighbourhood with Vera paz, not altogether clear of Mountains, but otherwise well watered with Rivers, and enriched with fair and fruitful Valleys, which afford not only good pasturage, and many great herds of , but likewise good store of Wheat, Maiz and other fruits of the Earth. Great plenty of cotton-wool, generally both here and in the other Provinces, viz. of Vera paz, Chiapa, etc. some medicinal woods likewise and liquors; and absolutely the best Sulphur of America. The people generally tractable and well dispoed, both in point of Religion and Civil Government. The Towns of chief note are, 1. Guatimala, otherwise called St. Jago de Guatimala, the chief City of the Province, situate upon the banks of a pleasant River, and in all respects convenient but for the Neighbourhood of two Vulcan's (as they call them at the West-Indies) that is, of certain Mountains, which cast fire and smoke out of them more or less continually, and with which, about the year 1586. it was almost buried with ashes and Earth, which the one of them, for the space of six months together, continualled belched out in such fearful quantity, that many people were slain, and the City received much damage by it. There are many of these Vulcan's in several parts of America, as namely at Arequipa in the Kingdom of Peru, at Puebla de los Angeles, in the Province of Tlascalla abovesaid; a Mountain of so great height, that they are said to go little less than thirty leagues, turning and winding, before they can reach the top of it, and others in several other places. They are generally Mountains of great height, and running sharp upwards, but at the top containing some quantity of plain and level ground; in the midst whereof is the pit or hole, out of which abundance of smoke and fiery ashes are vomited almost continually, and so deep, that they are supposed for the most part to reach to the very bottom of the Mountain. Some of these Vulcan's cast forth neither fire nor smoke, yet are clearly seen to burn at the bottom with a quick fire, and which is so extremely hot, that it instantly melteth Iron, or any other Metal that is cast into it; as by experience hath been found. For some, conceiving that the matter which maintains these fires, within the bowels of the Earth so long together, can be nothing else but melted Gold, have endeavoured several times to extract and draw it forth in certain Vessels of Iron and Brass, which they have caused to be let down into the bottom of the Vulcan or pit, by long Iron chains made on purpose, but as we said, the extreme heat and force of the fire below, always melted them, before they could be drawn up again, and by that means hath hitherto rendered all such attempts frustrate. 2. St. Salvador forty leagues distant from Guatimala Eastward, and seated upon the River Guacapa. 3. Acaputla, a Town of the Natives situated at the mouth of the said River, and is, as it were, the port Town to St. Salvador. 4. Trinidad, a Town of great resort, being the general Empory and place of Traffic, for all sorts of Commodities, betwixt the people of New-Spain and Peru. 5. St. Michael's two or three leagues distant from the Bay Fonseca, upon the South Sea. 6. Xeres de la Frontera, in the Confines of this Province, towards the borders of Nicaragua. 5. Honduras hath on the South Guatimala abovesaid, on the West a certain Bay or Arm of the Sea, which they call Goulfo dulce, from the aboundace of fresh waters which run into it from all parts: On the North and North-east the Atlantic Ocean; and somewhat to the Southeast Nicaragua. It contains in length viz. from East to West, coasting along upon the Sea, about one hundred and fifty leagues, and in breadth fourscore. The Country rich both in Corn and Pasturage, being said to be very much advantaged that way, by the constant overflowings of the Rivers, which it hath very many, about Michael-mass time, and which the people order so well, that they water their very Gardens, and exceedingly fertilise the whole Champaign, or lower parts of the ground by them. The Country is not thought to be without some good Mines both of Gold and Silver: but the Natives so little covetous of wealth, and the Spaniards, it seems, so much busied elsewhere, that as yet no great discoveries have been made, save only about Gracias a Dios, and some few other places, where there are good Mines. The chief Towns of this Province are, 1. New-Valladolidt, anciently called Commayagua, seated in a pleasant and fruitful Valley upon the banks of the River Chamalucon, forty leagues distant from the Sea. 2. Gracias a Dios, thirty leagues distant from Valladolidt▪ Westward, made a Colony of Spaniards by Gabriel de Roias' in the year 1530, for defence of the Mines thereabouts, against some Savages that were not then reduced. 3. San Pedro, a place of great wealth and traffic, and the usual residence of the Farmours of the King's customs for this Province. 4. Puerto de Cavallos, ten leagues distant from San Pedro, so called from the abundance of Horses, which in a great tempest and storm at Sea, the Spaniards were forced to cast over board at this place. It is one of the most noted Havens of these parts, and naturally strong, yet so ill guarded formerly, that the English twice pillaged it, viz. in the year 1591., under Captain Newport, and in the year 1596, under Captain Shirley. What the state of it at present is, I cannot say, only that it is a good inlet into a rich Country. 5. St. Thomas de Castille, eighteen leagues distant from Cavallos, another strong place, and to which, they say, the Colony of Puerto Cavallas was lately transpoted. 6. Truxillo, a Town pleasantly seated betwixt two Rivers at the foot of a Mountain, not far from the Cape de Honduras, which at this Town first gins to show itself, running far out into the Sea; from whence the shore still withdrawing itself, as it were more inwards, all along the Coast of this Province, till it joineth with Jucatan; there is made a very spacious and goodly Bay, called commonly the Bay of Honduras, otherwise Golfo dulce, as we said, having many good and secure stations for shipping. 7. St. George de Olancho, so called from the Valley of Olancho, in which it is seated: a rich part of the Country both in Mines and otherwise; insomuch that the Governors of this Province and these of Nicaragua, more than once fought for the possession of it in the field; and it was some time before the King of Spain could determine the Controversy betwixt them. 6. Nicaragua is a Country of this Province bordered Northward with Honduras; on the East with the Atlantic Ocean and part of Veragua; on the South with Mare deal zur; and on the West with Guatimala, being called by some the new Kingdom of Leon. It hath few Rivers in it; the want whereof is supplied by the benefit of a great Lake, in the midst of the Country, called by the Spaniards Laguna de Nicaragua, containing, as is supposed, above one hundred in leagues compass. It emptyes itself by the Port of St. Juan into the Atlantic or North Sea, but reacheth as far as the South or Mare deal Zur, at least within a very few leagues; and from whence some Spanish Captains are said to have made a passage, though with much difficulty, into the Lake, and from thence to the North Sea. It is abundantly well stored with good fish, but withal much haunted with Crocodiles; and the Country about it so plentiful in all things, especially , cotton-wool, Sugars, and all kind of Fruits, that the Spaniards commonly call it Mahomet's Paradise; the People said to be the most Hispaniolized of all other Americans since the Conquest, both in behaviour, apparel, manners, etc. The chief Towns are 1. Leon de Nicaragua, a Bishops Sea. 2. Granada, both of them seated upon the Lake very commodiously, yet distant one from the other fourteen or fifteen leagues at least. 3. Segovia, thirty leagues distant from Granada, having some veins of silver about it. 4. Jaen, a town almost at the end or mouth of the Lake, from whence, by a long Channel of about three or four leagues, it disembogues or emptieth itself into the Sea, at the Port St. Juan. 5. Realeio: This is, as it were, the Chattam of America, being a place on the South-Sea, where the King of Spain hath all his ships built, that are built of American timber, and inhabited by few or none but Shipwrights, Mariners, and men of that profession. 6. Nicoya, a town that giveth name to a little Territory, which some reckon as a distinct part of this Province by itself. 7. Avarines. 8. Cartago, forty leagues distant from Nicoya, and lying, almost in the midst of the Isthmus or Streit of Darien, equally distant both from the North and South Sea; on both which it is said likewise to have a convenient Port or Haven for shipping. 7. Veragua is bounded on the West with that part of Nicaragua, which some call Casta ricca, & make a distinct Province of this Country, being indeed a very wealthy part of it: on the East it hath the district, or Country of Panama, being otherwise washed on all sides by the Sea. It hath its name from a River of great note in this tract, by which it was first discovered. The Country is for the most part Mountainous, and the Soil outwardly but barren, but recompensing all defects with the abundance of its more inward wealth. I mean in the richness of its Mines; of which it is said to afford many, and so inexhaustibly rich and good, that the Spaniards here know no end of their wealth; although, by reason of the stoutness and untamableness of the Natives, it were a long time, and they met with no small difficulties, before they could make themselves masters of the Treasure. The chief Towns they have here are, 1. La Conception, lying at the mouth of a River so named, and the seat of the Governor. 2. La Trinidad, upon the banks of the same River likewise, but more down towards Port Beleno, and about six leagues Eastward of Conception. 3. St. Foy, twelve leagues more to the South, where the Spaniards melt their gold, and cast it into Bars or Ingots. 4. Carlos, a town they have upon the Coast of Mare deal Zur. 5. Philippina, another on the West of Carlos; both of these well seated upon a large and capacious Bay: before which there lieth a fry of certain little Islands, to the number of thirty or more, which the Spaniards are said to have wholly dispeopled long since, by forcing the Natives over into the Continent, to work in the Mines; as usually they did before the Emperor's prohibition: but now they use Slaves or Negroes, which they buy for that purpose from Guiny and other parts. CHAP. X. Of Peruana; or the Southern part of America. 1. THe Country of Peru, understanding by it all that part of America which lieth on the South of Darien, is generally resembled to the form of a Pyramid reversed; the Basis whereof, that is (as I conconceive) the more Southerly parts of it towards Magellanica and the Streits, extend themselves largely both East and West, becoming more sharp and strait towards the North, and those parts by which it is joined to Mexicana: in the whole it is supposed to contain a circuit of seventeen thousand miles at least, and is watered with four of the greatest Rivers of the World, beside abundance of lessers streams, which issuing from the Andes and other Mountains of the Country, do run from all parts both into the North and South Sea, much fertilizing the Countries through which they pass. The four principal are these. 1. Orellana, otherwise called the River of Amazons. This riseth in the Province of Peru, and runneth a course of little less than five thousand miles, discharging itself at last into the North Sea, through a channel as some say, of threescore leagues broad, and yet with such a violent current or stream, that it is said to keep its natural colour and taste almost thirty miles in the Sea. 2. Orenoque, a River of the Province of Guiana, whose head or spring is not yet discovered, it is said to be Navigable a thousand miles together by the tallest ships, and no less than two thousand by Pinnaces and smaller Vessels, and dischargeth itself likewise into the North Sea by sixteen several channels or mouths, making thereby several Islands, some whereof are said to be of good bigness, and to lie at a distance of one hundred miles or more one from the other. 3. Maragnon, a River of a yet larger course than any of the former, being, as 'tis said, no less than six thousand miles from its head, which is out of the Andes in Peru, to its fall, which is likewise into the North Sea; about Cape Blanco, by a channel of seventy leagues in breadth. 4. Rio de la Plata, otherwise called Paraguay, a River of two thousand mile's course, and falling, as the rest, into the North Sea, by a channel of threescore miles over, and about thirty four degrees Southward of the Line, towards Magellans' Streits. This Southern part of America containeth these particular Provinces following, all of them wealthy and large, viz. Castilia aurea, or Golden Castille. 2. Nova-Granada, or the new Kingdom, as they call it. 3. Peru, specially so called. 4. Chile. 5. Paraguay. 6. Brasil. 7. Guiana: And 8. Paria; with some lesser Islands adjoining to all or most of these Provinces, and commonly reckoned as part of them. CHAP. XI. Of Castilia Aurea. 1. CAstella del oro, as the Spaniards call it, or golden Castille, taketh up all the rest of the Isthmus or strait of Darien, which hath not been yet spoken of, being bounded Eastward and to the North-East with the Atlantic Ocean, and on the West with Mare del Zur, and some part of Veragua: Southward it hath the new Kingdom or Granada. It is called sometimes Terra firma, because it was one of the first parts of firm Land which the Spaniards touched upon, after they had passed so many Islands, as seemed, for some time, to block up and bar them from the Continent of America. It is subdivided into these inferior Provinces or Countries, viz. 1. Panama. 2. Darien. 3. Nova-Andaluzia. 4. St. Martha: And 5. the little Province De la Hacha. 2. Panama, commonly called the District or Circle of Panama, is bounded Eastward with the Gulf or Bay of Vrraba, by which it is separate from the rest of the Continent of this Southern part of America: on the West it hath Veragua, one of the Provinces of Guatimala; being on both the other sides washed with the Sea. It is supposed to contain in length from Cartagena and Popayan, to the confines of Veragua, about fourscore or ninety leagues; in breadth not above threescore in any part: and where it is narrowest, viz. betwixt the City of Panama and Nombre de Dios, if measured by a right line, not above six or seven over from Sea to Sea. It lieth almost under the Equinoctial line, but a few degrees Northward of it, and therefore somewhat hot, and by the neighbourhood of both Seas, subject to a foggy and gross Air, in comparison of some other parts; so that it is not counted generally so healthful a Country, especially for strangers, and in the Summer time. The chief towns and places which the Spaniards inhabit here are, 1. St. Philip, otherwise called Porto Bello, from the good Haven adjoining to it. A strong town and at present the staple of Trade betwixt Panama and Spain: the Haven fortified likewise with two strong Castles: notwithstanding which, it was both surprised and well pillaged by the English, under the Command of Captain Parker, about the year 1601, and the Governor himself Pedro Melendez taken prisoner. 2. Nombre de Dios, so named by Didaco Niquesa, a Spanish Adventurer, who being driven by distress of weather, and ready to be wracked, bad his Men here get on shore en Nombre de Dios (that is, in God's name.) The town was very well seated for Commerce and Trade at the beginning, and enjoyed it for a good while; but the place being found something less healthful, and otherwise obnoxious to Enemies at Sea, the Trade and chief Inhabitants are since removed to Porto Bello, or St. Philip aforesaid, as to a more fortified and securer place. 3. Acla, a Town upon the same Coast, but lying Southeast of Nombre de Dios. 4. Nata, commonly called St. Jago de Nata, situated on the West side of this Province, upon Mare del Zur, or the South Sea, about thirty leagues distance from Panama, towards the borders of Veragua. 5. Panama, the chief City of the Province, being also a Bishop's Sea, who is Suffragan to the Archbishop of Lima, and the ordinary residence of the Governor and Courts of Justice for these parts. It is seated likewise upon the South Sea, and so near, that at high water, the ships are said to ride even under the walls. Through this town the wealth both of Peru and Spain passeth once every year: from Spain by Nombre de Dios and Porto Bello, from whence whatsoever Merchandise or other Commodities come from Spain, are transported to Panama by Land, and from thence by Sea to all the parts of Peru; and by Panama, whatsoever comes from Peru, to be sent into Spain. It hath commonly a strong Garrison of Soldiers in it, and is doubtless a place otherwise well fortified, being of so great importance. Lastly La Crux Real, a few leagues distant from Panama, and for the most part inhabited by Negro. 3. Darien hath on the North the District, or Circle of Panama; on the South the new Kingdom of Granada: Eastward it is bounded with the Gulf of Vrraba abovesaid, and some part of the River Darien, which giveth name to the Province: and to the West with the South Sea; of a more temperate Air by fare than that of Panama, and a Soil so admirably fruitful and lusty, that they say Melons, Cucumbers, and generally all other Fruits of the Garden are ripe and fit to gather within twenty days or less, after their first sowing. The chief and indeed only Town of this tract is Darien, called anciently by the first Founders of it St. Maria Antiqua, and by others the Antique of Darien; being one of the first Towns that were built by the Spaniards on the firm Land. 4. Eastward of Darien and the Gulf of Vrraba lieth the Country of New-Andaluzia, as some call it, though that name be likewise (and perhaps more truly) attributed to the Province of Paria hereafter to be spoken of: on the East it hath the Country called St. Martha: on the North the main Ocean; and New-Granada towards the South. It is for the most part a Mountainous Country, and full of Woods, which, they say, yield abundance of Rosin, Gums, and some very good Balsams. But the Plains, by reason of much rain, to which the Country is subject, especially for some times of the year, of but a spewy and cold Soil. The Spaniards, at their first coming, found it a rich Country, not so much from the nature and profits of the Soil (though it be said to have some Mines in it, and those of Gold) but by reason of a certain opinion, and respect, which the Americans of these parts are generally said to have born towards this Country, insomuch that they would be brought and buried therein from other places very remote; and according to the custom of the Country, not without good store of Gold and other Jewels, according to the quality and condition of the Person that was buried: of which the Spaniards soon gained intelligence, and in ransacking the Graves and Monuments of the Dead, are supposed to have found an infinite Mass of Treasure: But those Mines are long since exhausted. The places of chief impotance here are, 1. Carthagena, situate upon the North Sea in a sandy Peninsula or half Island, well built, and for the bigness of it, of good wealth and riches; as the English well found under Sir Francis Drake, in the year 1585., when they took the place, and having pillaged it, carried away, beside abundance of Treasure; no less than two hundred and forty brass pieces of Ordinance. It is counted one of the best Havens belonging to the firm land of America. 2. Tolu, by the Spaniards now called St. Jago, twelve leagues distant from Cartagena; a place memorable for the excellent Balsam which is brought from thence, & commonly called the Balsam of Tolu. 3. St. Crux de Mopox, a neat Town, seated a little above the confluence of the two Rivers St. Martha and Magdalene, which water this Province. 4. Baranca de Nolambo, a place of great Traffic, especially for all Commodities of the new Kingdom of Granada: it standeth upon the banks of the Magdelene River, and about six leagues distant from the Sea. 5. Buena Vista, otherwise called St. Sabastian de Buena Vista, a Town commodiously seated upon a rising ground not far from the Gulf of Vrraba or the Sound of Darien, about a league and half from the Sea: and lastly Villa de St. Maria, thirty leagues southward of Cartagena. 5. St. Martha, so called from the chief City of the Province, is bordered on the West with New-Andaluzia; on the East with Rio de la Hacha; on the North with the Ocean, and on the South with New-Granada. It is about threescore and ten leagues in length, and not much less in breadth; a mountainous Country likewise for the most part, and the ground not much commended, but only for some fruits of the Ordinary growth of Spain, viz. Oranges, Lemons, etc. which thrive here very well. The air upon the Coasts very hot, but more within land as extremely cold, viz. upon the Mountains. The Country is well watered with Rivers, the chief whereof is Rio Grande, as they call it, or the great River of Magdalene, which rising in the Mountains of New-Granada, falleth down into this province, & empties itself into the Sea, betwixt the Cities of St. Martha and Cartegena, though at a distance of ten or twenty leagues from either, with a double stream, and such a violent course, that as Acosta testifies, it is counted not a little dangerous, to attempt the entrance of it sometimes, viz. when the Tide and the stream are contrary. The chief Towns are, 1. St. Martha, seated upon the Sea coast, having a safe and very convenient Haven belonging to it, and well defended from the winds by the advantage of an high Mountain, lying almost right over against it. It is no great Town but rich, for the bigness: at least it was found so when Sir Francis Drake surprised it, in the year 1595. What it was the year following, when Sir Anthony Shirley called there, and in the year 1630, when the Dutch took it, I cannot say. 2. Tenariffe on the banks of the Magdalene, forty leagues distant from St. Martha. 3. Villa de las Palmas, twenty leagues southward of Tenariff. 4. Ciudad de los Reyes in the Valley of Vpar, and upon the banks of a large River called Guataporta, which a little below this Town falleth into the Magdalene. It is a Frontier place, and but ill neighboured by reason of certain unreduced Savages inhabiting the Mountain Tayrone, and those other Mountains of this Province, which the Spaniards call las Sierras Nievadas, because their tops are perpetually covered with Snow. 5. New-Salamanca, in the same Valley of Vpar, famous for its Brass Mines. 6. Ocanna and others. 6. Rio de la Hacha is the name of a little Province lyinging on the North-East of St. Martha, washed on all other parts with the waters of the main Ocean, or with the Gulf or Bay of Venezuela. It taketh its name from a small Town called de la Hacha, about a mile distant from the Sea, having no convenient Haven, but otherwise seated in a soil very rich and fertile, not only of all sorts of Fruits and and Plants, especially such as are brought from Spain, but likewise in many Mines of Gold, Gems of great size and value, and many excellent Salt Wiches, as they call them. It is eight leagues distant from Salamanca aforesaid, and eighteen from Cape Vela the most westerly Point, or Foreland of the Bay of Venuezuela; and with the rest, had the hard hap to be surprised and pillaged by the English with Sir Francis Drake in the year 1595. 2. Rancheria six leagues Eastward of la Hacha, inhabited chiefly by Pearl-fishers, or such as get their living for the most part by fishing for Pearl; which was wont to be good on these Coasts. 3. Tapia and some others. CHAP. XII. Of New-Granada. 1. THe new Kingdom of Granada, as 'tis commonly called, was for the most part both discovered and conquered by Gonsalvo Ximenes, about the year 1536, and with so good success that in less than a years space, the whole Country was quietly settled under the Spaniards government, and the Captain with his Small Company had made shift to gather together such a mass of Treasure, as may seem almost incredible, viz. from the Reguli, or petty Princes of those Countries, whom he had either destroyed or made Tributary. Laet casteth up the sum thus, one hundred ninty one thousand, two hundred ninty four Pesoes of absolute fine Gold, thirty seven thousand of Gold less fine, and eighteen thousand of the coursest sort of all. Of Emeralds great and small eighteeen hundred, besides abundance of other rich booty. The Country is bounded on the North with Castilia aurea aforesaid; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with Venezuela; the Southern parts of it being not yet well discovered, by reason of certain huge and unpassable Mountains, which block it up wholly on that side, save only where a passage is kept open into the Province of Peru, specially so called. It containeth in length about one hundred and thirty leagues, and not much less in breadth, being for the most part a very healthful Country, and abounding in Mines of the best sort of Metal, beside others of Brass and Iron. It is subdivided into these two Provinces, viz. Granada, specially so caland 2. Popayana. 2. Granada, specially so called, is a Country of a very temperate and good air, neither subject to much heat, nor to extremity of cold: the reason of this may seem to be its nearness to the Line, from which it is distant Northward but a very few degrees. The Country exceeding fruitful both of Corn and , affording rich pasturage, and many great herds of , many good Mines, as well of Gold as other Metals; and in that part of it which is called Tunia, as great plenty of the fairest sort of Emeralds. Some parts of it are woody; and among other sorts very good, both for Timber and Fevel. there is one which the Natives call Guaiacum, a medicinable wood, and of sovereign use, they say, for those that are subject to the Lues Venerea, and such like Maladies. The People of the Country generally tall of stature, and of a strong constitution, but much more given to sport and pastime, than to any kind of labour or industry. The Towns and places of chief importance are, 1. St. Foy, commonly called St. Foy de Bagota, which was the old name of this Province, and to distinguish it from another St. Foy in the Country of New-Mexico, as was said. It is the Metropolis and Capital City of this Province, an Arcbishops' sea, and the ordinary residence of the Governor; built by Gonsalvo Ximenes a Spaniard Native of Granada in Old-Spain, upon the Lake called Guatavita, and is inhabited at this present by above six hundred Families of Spaniards. 2. St. Michael, twelve leagues Northward of St. Foy, and a well traded Town. 3. Tocayma, situate in the territory of the Paunches, which are a certain barbarous People of this Country, not yet perfectly reduced, and possessing not the worst part of it. It is fifteen leagues distant from St. Foy, towards the North-East, being situate on the banks of Pati, a small River, a little above its confluence into the Magdalene. 4 Trinidad, seated on the banks of another River, called Zarbi, in a convenient place and good Soil, and the Country about it richly abounding in Veins of Crystal, Emeralds, Adamants, Chalcedonies, and other Gems of good account. 5. Tunia, a strong Town, built very advantageously for defence on the top of an hill, & is both a Garrison and place of retreat against the Savages, which sometimes infest this Tract, and also well traded Empory. 6. Pampelona, 60 leagues from St. Foy to the North-east; a rich place both for Mines of gold, which it affordeth, and also for great herds of , which the Country breeds and maintains. 7. La Palma. 8. Merida, the furthest Town of this Province Northeastward towards Venezuela. On the Southeast there is only St. Juan de los Lanos, or St. John of the Plains, fitfy leagues distant from St. Foy, but seated in a rich Angle of the Country, and where there are good Veins of gold. 3. Popayana, the other part of this New-Kingdome, is bordered on the West with part of Granada last spoken of; from which the River St. Martha divides it for the most part. On the North it hath Nova-Andalusia or Cartagena; on the West Mare del Zur; and on the South Quito, or rather some unreduced Countries lying betwixt them both. It extends in length above one hundred leagues from North to South, but in breadth, viz, betwixt the River St. Martha, and the South Sea, not much above forty or fifty. The Country is said to be a little too much subject to rain, yet not so, but that the fertility of the soil answers the industry of the Inhabitants in most parts very well. The places of chief note in it are, 1. Popayan, situate on the banks of a fair River, but not named, and in the midst of a Plain, in a place of great wealth, and enjoying a good air. It is a Bishop's Sea, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor of the Province. 2. Antiochia, otherwise called St. Fide. s de Antiochia, on the borders of New-Andaluzia, and about one hundred leagues from Popayan. 3. Caramanta, seated likewise on the banks of the River St. Martha. 4. St. Anne in the Cantred, or Hundred of Anzerma, a Town neatly situate upon the side of an hill betwixt two Rivers, and in the midst of a Plain no less pleasant and fertile. 5. St. Jago de Arma, so named from the Teritory in which it standeth, rich and famous for its Mines of Gold, which it is said to have many and very good. 6. New-Carthago twenty leagues distant or more from St. Jago. 7. Bonaventura, situate on a Bay of the South Sea, bearing that name. A small Town, but of great intercourse and trade, especially for conveying the Commodities of New-Spain unto Popayan and other places of this Province. 8. Timana, fourscore leagues distant from Parayan, and seated at the Foot of the Andes toward the East. 9 St. Juan de Pasto, so called from its situation in a Valley of rich pasturage. 10. St. Sabastian de la Plata in the Southeast confines of this Province, so named from the Mines of Silver, which are found thereabouts. 11. Almaguer. 12. Madrigal, I should say, both of them situate in a barren soil, but that no soil may be counted barren, that bears Gold. CHAP. XIII. Of the Kingdom of Peru. 1. PEru, in the Southern part of America, was anciently a great and mighty Kingdom, as Mexico in the Northern, and fell under the power of the Spaniards much after the same manner, that the Kingdom of Mexico did, viz. through the dissensions and differences among the People themselves: The manner and occasion briefly thus. Huayna Capac, the last Inca, or King of Peru, had, beside many others, two Sons which he chief loved; the one by a lawful Wife his near Kinswomen, called Huascar: the other by a Concubine named Atabalipa; betwixt whom, at his death, he divided his Kingdom; settling the one, viz. Atabalipa, at Quito, and making him King of all the Provinces belonging to it, and which, for the most part, himself had conquered; and the other, viz. Huascar, at Cusco, making him King of Peru, and of the Provinces about it, at a distance of five hundred leagues one from another, thereby leaving to either of them a Dominion large enough, if reason could have satisfied ambition. But Huascar rested not long content, disdaining that a Bastard-Brother should share so much with him in his Kingdom, contrary to the more just interest of some of his other Brothers, and to the custom of the Incas his Ancestors, who always ruled as Monarches, not admitting any division of their Kingdoms. Hereupon differences and emulations arise betwixt the two Brothers; Atabalipa, King of Quito, is commanded to appear at Cusco, both to assist at the Funeral solemnities of Huayna Capac their Father, and to do homage for his Kingdom; which he doth not refuse: only desireth the King his Brother not to oblige him to come so far, and through Countries so unsafe, without an attendance suitable to a King, and that might secure his journey: which pretence of his was not thought unreasonable. So he brings along with him an Army of thirty thousand men; which, through the negligence and too much security of Huascars Officers of War, was permitted to come so near Cusco, that with it, after some Battles fought, he taketh prisoner Huascar himself, King of Peru, puts to death all the Incas, or Children of the Blood Royal, that he could get into his power; and in this manner, for some time, holds the Kingdom, though not without much difficulty, by reason of the hatred which the people generally bare towards him, for his cruelty towards the Royal Progeny; and the opposition which divers of Huascars Captains made against him in several parts. 2. Things being in this condition at Cusco among the Natives, the Spaniards that were at Panama, having rested there full fifteen years since the Conquest of Mexico, without making any further discovery upon the South Sea than the Islands of Pearls, which lie not above sixteen or seventeen leagues off from Panama, resolve, about this time, to make some further search of the Continent by Sea. The business was undertaken chief by one Francisco Pizarro, born at Truxillo in Spain, a Man of but mean parentage and fortune, but yet a good Soldier, and Diego Almagro, a rich Merchant of Panama. At first they met with many difficulties and discouragements in the Design; Pizarro being full eight months at Sea, sailing of that course, which now, having better knowledge of the Country, they easily dispatch in fourteen or fifteen days, his men some of them dying, and others deserting the service, though with the apparent hazard of their lives: so that at eight month's end he found himself only with fourteen Men in a poor Island, and in the most destitute condition that could be. Yet being himself of an undaunted courage and resolution, and those few men he had with him of the same mind with himself, they all resolved rather to die than to give over the Design. So putting again to Sea, they fall at last into the River of Tumbez, which in a few days brings them to a town and fortified place called likewise Tumbez where they found Inhabitants and a place most agreeable to their desires, viz. where they found good plenty of Gold; for which, not being in a condition to fight, they were content at present to seem Merchants; and so for a few petty Commodities which they had brought with them, of no value, 'tis said they received of the Natives the full quantity of thirty thousand pesoes of pure gold; which revived their spirits not a little. Whereupon finding the Country to be good and likely to afford much Treasure, they return back again to Panama, make declaration of the Country they had discovered, and solicit for further licence to subdue and conquer it. Which having obtained, Pizarro, with four other of his Brothers, stout and resolute men like himself, a competent number of ships, and about two hundred Soldiers, prosecute the Design, and appear at Cusco with their little Army, just at the time that the differences there were hottest, and that Huascar the King was newly become prisoner to his Brother Atabalipa: who, although at first he seemed to contemn the small numbers of the Spaniards, and count them little better than madmen, that would venture so fare into a strange Country, no better provided than he took them to be, and upon such an extravagant pretence, as that seemed to him, which they told him was the cause of their coming; yet after a while, having heard the noise of their Ordinance, and a little tasted how sharp their Swords were, he was content to become prisoner himself. The Spaniards at first treated him well, and put him in such hopes of liberty, that out of confidence to gain it, and that he might enjoy the Kingdom, though tributary to the Spaniards, himself alone, he caused his Brother the King Huascar to be put secretly to death, and dissembled the matter to the Spaniards, as if it had been done against his will; which, they intending other matters, did not much examine. To obtain his liberty, he offered the Spaniards to give them the room wherein they were, filled up with gold and silver as high as a Soldier could reach with the point of his sword; and, as some say, performed it, at least the greater part of it: Yet were the Spaniards so fare from granting him liberty, according to his expectation and their promise, that not long after they took away his life, most basely strangling him in prison, after they had received him, as 'tis credibly reported, above ten millions of gold and silver together: upon pretences indeed of Treason, and some dangerous plottings against them, by Atabalipa and his People; (a criminal piece of Treason doubtless, for a poor Prince, injuriously imprisoned, to endeavour his liberty, and his subjects to assist him the best they could!) Notwithstanding which, the Spanish Writers themselves do generally dislike the Fact, and some of them with detestation enough. God, the righteous Judge, (saith mine Author Lopez Vaz) seeing this villainous Act, suffered none of those Spaniards to die by the course of nature, but brought them all to evil and shameful ends. Which was very true: for although upon the death of Atabalipa, the Spaniards held themselves for Masters of the Country, and Pizarro quickly obtained of the Emperor to be made a Marquis; yet long it was before the Indians could be wholly subdued, Mango Inga, the Brother of Atabalipa making a stout and sharp resistance for a good while together, defeating the Spaniards in three or four several encounters (in which Diego and John Pizarro brothers to the Marquis were slain) and twice taking the City of Cusco from them by force. And when at last he happened to be overcome, and driven to fly to the Mountains, the Conquerors, viz. Almagro and Pizarro, to whom the Emperor had given the command of the Country in several, fall out among themselves, chief about the bounds of their respective Dominions, Civil Wars ensue betwixt them: in which first of all Almagro is taken prisoner by Pizarro, sentenced to death, and executed without mercy; and not long after Pizarro himself murdered in his own house, by a Bastard son of Almagro named Diego; who thereupon had the confidence to take upon him the government, and to encounter the Licentiate Vacca de Castro, the Emperor's Commissioner, in the open field; where being worsted and taken, he afterward lost his head at Cusco. After this, Blascus Nunnez Vela being made Viceroy of Peru, and governing somewhat severely, Gonzales Pizarro the fourth Brother, rebelleth, with many Spaniards with him; against whom Vela Nunnez, the Viceroy's Brother, is sent; but to little purpose, being taken prisoner by the Pizarrists, and put to death. This so incenseth the Viceroy, that himself in person marcheth against the Rebels, but to his own ruin. For a Battle being fought in the fields of Quito, the hated Viceroy had the ill hap to be made prisoner, and by Carvaial, Lieutenant to Pizarro, presently, without further process, caused to die, in revenge, as 'tis supposed, for his brother, whom the Viceroy, among many others, had lately sentenced to death. Pizarro after this defeats Centenus, another General of the Emperors; but was at last, by the Governor Gasca, defeated himself, taken prisoner, and beheaded for his Rebellion, together with Carvaial his Lieutenant, and divers other of his Complices: so that there remained now of all the five Brothers Pizarri, only Ferdinand alive, who, as some report, was sent prisoner into Spain, by the Emperor's Commissioner; others say, that his Brother the Marquis sent him thither with the process concerning Almagro's death. However, certain it is, that in Spain he died a prisoner. Martin de Alcantara, half-brother to the Marquis, was murdered with him in the Marquess' house; Garcia Alvarado was stabbed to death by one of the Almagrists; and what became of Pedro Baldivia, with some others, shall be showed in the description of Chile. Thus perished, by the just hand of God, and through their own mutual dissensions, ambition, and covetousness, those first Coquerors of Peru, viz. Pizarro and his Companions; none of them all leaving so much as a good name behind him: and of their issue little is spoken. The Marquis himself is said to have had a son by a sister of Atabalipa, whom they call Donna Angelina, but he died young; and whether he were legitimate or no, it may be doubted. But the Factions of the Pizarrists and Almagrists being extinct, by the diligence and moderation of succeeding Governors, the affairs of Peru came by degrees to be better settled, & the People, either willingly, or by constraint, were persuaded to acknowledge the Spanish Government, and to live quietly in most parts of the Country. 2. The Dominion of the Kings of Cusco, which in some sense, and by some writers upon occasion, is called the Kingdom of Peru, was extended by the last Inca, or King, Huayna Capac, from North to South above one thousand leagues together, comprehending not only a great part of the Province of Chile towards the South, but also the New-Kingdome of Granada and divers other Provinces to the North: but Peru properly so called, containeth little more than half so much, viz. six hundred leagues in length, and about fifty or threescore in breadth; except only in some places, as in the Country of Chac●poyas, where 'tis thought, it may be one hundred leagues over from the Andes to the South Sea. It is bounded on the East and North-east with that vast ridge of Mountains which they call the Andes: on the West it is washed with Marc deal zur; on the North it hath the Country of Popayan; and on the South Chile. It is commonly divided into three parts, which they call the Plains, the Hill-country, and the Andes. The Plains are that part of the Country which lie along upon the Sea Coast, being for the most part a mere level without any Hills at all. The Sierra, as they call it, or Hill-Country is that part of Peru, which is partly mountainous and partly plain, fertile and well inhabited in both. The Andes are so high, rocky, and inaccessible, that they are scarce inhabited at all but by Savages, save only upon the skirts of them. The Plains from the Sea shore to the Hill-Counsry, are for the most part about ten leagues over or broad, upon which it never raineth all the year long. The Hill-Country is commonly twenty leagues in breadth where narrowest; and from September to April hath rain, the rest of the year generally being fair weather. But on the Andes, which take up all the rest of the Country of Peru, it raineth almost continually all the year long. In the Hill-Country, Their Summer gins in April, as is said, and ends in September; but in the Plains, it gins in October and ends in May. So that in the space of one day a man may taste both Summer and Winter; be scorched with excessive heat in the morning, and yet well nipped with cold before night. The Andes generally are covered with thick Woods and wild Forests; the Hill-Country for a great part naked and open; the Plains in many places sandy and dry, and would be much more scorched with heat, than they are, but for the neighbourhood of the Sea, which affords them many cooling gales from the South and South-west winds; whose property, although it be naturally in other parts to be tempestuous, to bring rain and foul weather, yet here there is nothing but Serenity and fair Sunshine days all the year long, although these winds blow almost without ceasing upon the Country, and no other at any time, whereas the Sierra or Hill countries have wind from every coast, and such as bringeth all sorts of weather with it, Rain, Hail, Frost, Snow, great claps of Thunder, etc. The Country affordeth not so much of the breed of Europe as some other Provinces of America; but instead of these, both the Woods and Pastures are replenished, with great multitudes of the Vicugnes and Pacos above mentioned, which are of no less profit & service. The Pacos here are said to be as big as some young Heifer of two years old, bearing a fleece like Sheep, and their flesh no less pleasant than the Mutton of Europe. But the great wealth of this Country lies out of sight, in the bowels of the Earth, viz. in those rich and, as they may seem, inexhaustible Mines both of gold and silver, which, as 'tis well known, this Country of Peru affordeth, more than any other Province of America beside. The People are said to be, at least exteriorly, of greater simplicity than some other Americans, both in point of behaviour and judgement, yet of good courage in the wars and fearless of death: They are noted also to be dissemblers, and not always to declare their minds truly and plainly; and which is worse than all, to have been given over to that foul sin of Sodomy; in so much that their Women were generally found to be of small esteem with them, to be used no better than slaves, and most cruelly beaten by them upon every light occasion. For both which (their unnatural filthiness and inhumaninity) if it pleased the Divine Justice to deliver them into the hands of those who used them likewise cruelly, who can deny but that the Judgements of God were just, and that they received such recompense for their works, as the Apostle saith Rom. 1.13. was meet? The Country is generally divided into three Juridical Resorts, as they call them, or Courts of Appeal, which are Quito, Lima, and Charcas: but the particular Provinces, as they are commonly observed by Geographers, said to be six, viz. 1. Quito. 2. Los Quixos. 3. Lima. 4. Cusco. 5. Charcas.: And 6. Collao. 3. Quito is the first Province of Peru towards the North, or the new Kingdom of Granada, with which on that side it is bounded; having on the West Mare del Zur; on the South Lima, and on the East Los Quixos. It lieth in a manner right under the Line; the Soil reasonably fertile, and well stored with , especially with the Pacos or Peruvian Sheep; having plenty also of Fish and Fowl; good store of Cotton-woll, in which the People of the Country are especially industrious, make a Cloth or Stuff thereof, equal almost to silk for fineness. Much Tobacco, Guaiacum, Sarzaparilla, and other medicinal Plants. The chief Towns are, 1. Caranguez, anciently a Royal City, where stood a sumptuous and stately Palace of the Kings of Peru, now almost deserted. 2. Ottavallu, another place of the same dignity, and the same condition at present with Carangues. 3. Quito, commonly called S. Francisco de Quito: It is a City built by the Spaniards, at the foot of a certain ridg of Mountains, which it hath on the North and North-West side of it, and are said by Laet, to cross the whole Country of Peru quite over from the South to the North Sea. It is inhabited by five hundred Families of Spaniards at least, beside Natives and well fortified and might be thought a town very well seated in all respects, but for the neighbourhood of a Vulcan, which at times annoyeth it very much; as namely in the year 1560, when it vomited out such abundance of flaming cinders and other sulphurous matter, as had it not been for a shower of rain unexpectedly falling, would have much damnified, if not destroyed, the place. 4. Tacunga fifteen leagues distant from Cusco. 5. Rhiobamba, forty leagues distant from that. 6. Thomebamba. 7. Cuenza, threescore and four leagues from Quito on another road, but environned on all sides with Mines both of gold and silver, brass, iron, and likewise some veins of sulphur. 8. Loxa, sixteen leagues Southward of Cuenza, and seated pleasantly betwixt two Rivers, in the midst of the rich Valley or Plain called Guixibamba. 9 Zamorra, twently leagues Eastward of Loxa. These are all Towns inhabited by Spaniards, and lie more within land. Towards the Sea, and upon the Sea coasts, there is first Puerto Vieio, so called because it was the first Town the Spaniards possessed on this Continent; a place of no very good Air, and therefore not much frequented. 2. Mantu, another Sea Town, and of good resort, by reason of the Trade which is here chief driven betwixt Panama and Peru. 3. Guaiaquil, or St. Jago de Guaiaquil, a famous and well frequented Empory, seated upon an arm of the Sea, not far from the mouth of the said River Guaiaquil. 4. Castro, a Colony of Spaniards towards that part of this Province which some call Provincia de las Esmauldas, or the Land of Emeralds. 5. St. michael's, the first Colony which the Spaniards built in this Country, called by the Natives Piura. 6. Payta, a small Town, yet neighboured by a safe and well frequented Haven, guarded against the winds by the point St. Helena on the North; and on the South with Punta Piura; yet burnt by Captain Cavendish in the year 1587., and the rich Island Puna near adjoining, ransacked and pillaged. 4. Los Quixos lieth South and to the Southeast of Quito, being bordered more directly Eastward with a part of the Province of Guiana, called by some El dorada, or the golden Country: on the South it hath Lima and Cusco. Of the Country itself there is not my thing observed that may seem peculiar: The chief Towns are, 1. Baeza, built in the year 1559 by Ramirez de Avila, eighteen leagues from Cusco. 2. Archidona, twenty leagues to the Southeast of Baeza. 3. Avila. 4. Sevilla del Oro. All of them Colonies of Spaniards. Then is there in the Sierra, or hilly part of the Country more towards the Andes, 1. Valladolidt. 2. Loyola. 3. St. Jago de las Montannas'; all Colonies likewise, that you may know the Country hath something in it worth the looking after. 5. Lima, called also Los Reyes, hath on the East Collao and some part of Cusco; on the North Los Quixos; on the West Mare del Zur; and on the South Charcas. The Country extendeth itself in length upon the Coasts of the South Sea two hundred and fifty, some say full three hundred leagues in length, viz. from the Cape del Aguia Northward, on the borders of Quito as far as Arequipa towards the South: the soil reasonably fertile in all things, as being much more equally divided into Hill and Plain Country, and much better Peopled than some other Provinces. The places most observable and important in it are, 1. Miraflores, as the Spaniards call it, a well seated and wealthy Town in the Valley of Zanu, five leagues distant from the Sea, where it hath likewise a good Haven or Port. 2. Truxillo, two or three leagues distant from the Sea, the Haven whereof is said to be large but not so safe. The Town itself is seated upon the banks of a pleasant River in the Valley of Chicama, consisting of five hundred Families or more, the Air very healthful, and the Country thereabouts as fruitful and good as any of these parts of America, especially abounding in Corn, Sugarcanes and . 3. La Parilla, twenty leagues Southward of Truxillo in the Valley called Santa, and well neighboured with rich Mines of silver lately discovered. 4. Arnedo, seated among the Vineyards of the Valley of Changay, ten leagues from Lima northward. 5. Lima, by the Spaniards commonly called lafoy Ciudad de los Reyes, or the City of Kings, so named because Pizarro who built it laid the first stone on Twelfth day, 1553, which they call The Feast of the Kings. It is seated in the Valley of Lima, one of the fruitfullest parts of all Peru, and so neatly built, that all the chief streets of the City open upon a fair Marketplace, or Piazza, of such a large square, that upon the sides thereof are built, in a stately and convenient manner the Cathedral Church and Palace of the Archbishop, the Vice-Roys Palace, and Courts of Justice, with the Exchequer or public Treasury, the Town-House, or place where the City Magistrates meet and hold their Courts, the public Armoury or Magazine, and divers other fair buildings of the Nobility and better sort of Citizens. The whole City is environed round about with most delicate fields and pleasant gardens, and scarce a Citizen's house within, but by the opportunity of a River which runneth by it, is well supplied with water. Briefly, as it is the Metropolis of Peru, that is, the chief and principal City for Authority and Dignity, so is it likewise the chiefest for delight and wealth. 6. Cullao, this is the Haven or Port Town to Lima, and but two leagues distant from it: A Town of six or seven hundred Families, all or most of them Seamen; and not a house in it but is well provided of Cellar-room and Stowage for Merchandise, which is there received from all parts, both coming from and going to the Sea. It was, with Lima itself, surprised by Sir Francis Drake, in the year 1579, and their Cellars searched as well as could be done in so short a time: whereupon, since it is said to be fortified with two strong Bulwarks, a wall of earth, and about thirty piece of Ordinance planted on the Works. 7 Pachacama, four leagues Southward of Lima, memorable chief for Pizarros good fortune here, who is reported to have found in one only old Temple of the Natives, the quantity of nine hundred thousand Ducats of gold and silver, beside what his Soldiers are supposed to have seized on and conveyed away before he came. 8. Guarco, a Colony of three hundred Spaniards, sixteen leagues to the Southward of Pachacama, rounded with the best fields for Wheat in all Peru. 9 Valverde, a great Town inhabited by five hundred Spaniards, and though at sixteen leagues distance from the Sea, yet well traded and rich: The Valley wherein it lieth, and from which it taketh its name, affording the best Vines of America. 10. Castro-Verreina, threescore leagues distant from Lima to the South East. It lieth in the Valley of Chocolocha, and is a rich place, by reason of the good Mines of silver which are about it, and the abundance of the best sort of Tobacco. 11. Arequipa, a pleasant and delightsome town in the Valley of Quilca, one hundred and twenty leagues distant from Lima Southward; of a temperate and fresh Air, a flourishing Soil, and the Town very rich and frequented; by reason that through it much of the silver of Potozi and divers other Mines thereabouts, that is designed for Spain, passeth yearly to be shipped for Panama, at a Haven belonging to this Town, though at a distance, as some say, of 10. or 21. leagues. 12 Caxamalca, more within land towards the North; a place chief memorable for the imprisonment & murder of Atabalipa, the last King of Peru, whom the Spaniards overthrew and took prisoner near to this place, and afterwards used as hath been said. Lastly 13. Leon de Guanuco, so called from the Territory wherein it standeth, a rich and pleasant place, being anciently a Palace of the Kings of Peru, very magnificent and stately, now likewise much beautified with Houses both of the Spanish and Peruvian Nobility, some Convents of Religious men, and a College of Jesuits. 6. Cusco is the fare greater part of the Province of Peru, containing generally all the Sierra or Hill Countries, and those parts of the Andes likewise which lie Southward of the little Province or Cantred of Guanuco, being coasted Westward and to the Northwest with Lima; Eastward with Los Quixos, and some part of Guiana; and on the South with Charcas, enjoying for the most part a temperate and good Air, neither overheated with the scorching Sun in the day, nor damped with any cold mists or dews in the Evening, as some parts of the Plains of Peru are; but well watered with many fresh Rivers, which make the Valleys and lower grounds of it good pasturage, and to maintain great Herds of . The Woods especially stored with the Coca, whose leaf is counted so restorative as we said Chap. 7. and with much excellent Venison. The principal Towns and places of Trade in it are first Bombon, situate upon a Lake called Chinchacocha, said to be ten leagues in compass, begirt round about almost with hills, and neighboured with many other lesser but pleasant Villages. 2. Parcos, once a Palace Royal of the Inca's, seated on the top of a little hill encompassed with other Rocky and higher Mountains on all sides. 3. Guamanga, called by the Spaniards St. Juan de la Vittoria, a fair and well built City, and an Episcopal Sea, threescore and ten leagues distant from Lima Eastward. 4. Bilcas, another Palace of the Inca's, now a good Town of the Natives, and situate, as is supposed, in the very midst of the Country of Peru. 5. Guancavelica, a new Town raised from the condition of a very poor Village, to a place of very great importance and traffic, only by the Mines of Quicksilver, of which we spoke Chap. 11. and which were first discovered there in the year 1566. It is now inhabited by two thousand Spaniards at least, and twice as many Natives. 6. Cusco, the chief City of the Province, and anciently the seat of the Kings of Peru, one hundred and twenty leagues or more distant from Lima, to the Southeast, begirt round about with Mountains, and the City itself seated upon a rugged and unequal Soil; yet anciently very magnificent and beautiful; it being the custom of the Incas or Puruvian Monarches, that every one of their Nobility should build themselves a Palace in that City where the Palace Royal was. The Incas Palace here was justly counted one of the wonders of the World: it was built on the top of a very high Mountain, on the North side of the City, walled round about, and for the most part of it, with three several walls all of massy stones, and those of such huge stupendious bigness, yet most exactly laid together and fitted one with another, that the Spaniards, considering the Indians had neither Instruments of Iron, or any thing else to polish and fashion them, nor Engines to draw them up to that height, nor so much as Carts to fetch them from the Quarries and places where they were found, which was eight or nine leagues distance, and over no small Rivers, said plainly, 'twas the work of the Devil, and not of Man, to lay them there: which seeming a thing not so easily to be supposed, I must, for my part, as plainly confess, 'tis a Problem somewhat above my capacity at present to resolve, viz. how it should come to pass, that not only here, but in divers other parts of the Country, where the Incas and their Nobility had their Palaces, such evident Monuments of absolute Art and Skill should be found among a People so absolutely ignorant and unacquainted with Art, as the Americans were reported to be. It is now quite demolished, and converted to private dwellings; only the walls are permitted to stand, as well to testify the greatness of the ancient structure, as because the stones thereof (as mine Author Laet reporteth) are so hugely ponderous & big, that the Spainards' know not well how to remove them, and perhaps dare not venture upon it. Many other Monuments there were of the Incas Magnificence & greatness, as beside their Temples which were very stately and rich. Those public Cawseys or highways, paved and laid with stone, which the Incas, with incredible cost and pains had caused to be made from Cusco to the utmost Confines of their Kingdom, as large as it was, only for the ease and commodity of the people; they all meeting at Cusco from all quarters, like so many lines from several parts of the Circumference, and Concentring in the midst of the City, upon a Piazza or Marketplace, one of the fairest in all Peru. The wealth which the Spaniards found here is not to be estimated; all the Vessels, and utensils, of what sort soever, belonging to the Incas Palace, being said to be of perfect Silver or Gold; all the Rooms and Chambers of the Palace wainscoted and ceiled with Gold; beside an infinite number of Birds, Beasts, Fowls, Serpents and other creatures, carved and wrought all of Gold or Silver. Nor was it otherwise in due proportion, in the Palaces of the Nobility: all were found inestimably wealthy and rich: And yet 'tis thought, what they found above ground, was nothing, in comparison of that which they met with in the ransacking of Cellars, Vaults, and other subterraneous places, where the poor conquered Peruvians had endeavoured to convey it out of sight; which was such that to this day, they say, those treasures are not exhausted, but that in digging upon occasion under ground, they still chop upon some good quantities of concealed Metals. The City at present is thought to contain some thirteen or fourteten thousand Inhabitants, whereof the third part only Spaniards, the rest Natives. 7. St. Francisco de la vittoria, a Colony of Spaniards situate at the foot of the Andes, twenty leagues distant from Cusco. 8. St. Juan del oro, another Colony in the Valley of Caravaya, neighboured with rich Mines of the purest Gold of Peru. Beyond which places, more towards the Andes, there are said to lie certain Countries as yet undiscovered, much famed for gold Mines, but of such unpassable difficulty, that hitherto the Spaniards, though divers times attempting it, have not been able to effect any thing answerable to their desires. 8. Collao lieth Southward of those Countries, which go under the general name of the Province of Cusco, having on the West Lima, on the South Charcas; but Eastward and to the North-east, it is shut up by a ridge of Mountains, running in one body or continued Tract from the confines of Collao, as far as the City of Cusco, where they divide. The Country generally plain, commodiously watered in all parts with fresh Rivers, and consequently affording rich pasturage and good herds of Cattles. It is thought to be the most populous Country of all Peru; what through the soundness and good temperature of the air, what through the richness and fertility of the Soil. The chief Towns and places of note in it, being 1. Chuquinga, a great Town, and held to be naturally almost impregnable, as being environed round about, either with deep unfordable Waters, or with Mountains unpassable, and having one only Causeway leading to it, reported to be for two or three leagues together no broader than to permit one single person to march convenienly upon it. 2. Ayavire, by the Spaniards called Las Sepulturas, being a place especially ennobled by the stately Monuments of the Peruvian Nobility, which were found there. 3. Hatuncolla, the Metropolis or chief Town of this Province, seated upon the banks of the River Caravaya, whose sands are very much famed for Gold. 4. Chinquita, a Colony of Spaniards upon the banks of Titicaca, one of the greatest Lakes that belong to America said to be fourscore leagues in compass, having many small Islands in it of a good and fruitful soil, abounding in fish and variety of Seafowl. It is supposed to be fourscore leagues distant likewise from the South Sea, having only one Estuary or Mouth, which is something strait, but of such a deep water and violent stream, that, as Acosta testifieth of it, it is not possible to build a Bridge of stone, or timber over it. But the Natives instead thereof have laid a Bridge of straw upon it, which serves as well; viz. so many great bundles of straw sedge or such like matter, well and surely made up, and fastened together, as will reach from one side or bank of the Estuary to another; at which likewise having made them sure, they cast some good quantity of more straw and sedge upon them, and have a Bridge very convenient, upon which they do both securely pass themselves, and also drive Cattles and do other necessary business. The Town is a place of extraordinary Wealth and Trading, and so considerable, that the Governor thereof is always named by the King of Spain himself, and his place estimated at fifty thousand ducats per annum. 5. Tiaguanaco at the Estuary or Mouth of the Lake, memorable only for the ruins of certain great and stupendious buildings, which anciently, it seems, have stood there, the stone's whereof (some of them) are said to have been of thirty foot length a piece, fifteen foot broad, and six or seven foot thick. There were likewise found the Statues of certain men excellently carved and wrought, of a Gigantine Stature or bigness, and likewise vested in foreign and strange habits, not at all used, nor ever known to have been used by the Peruvians themselves, or by any other of the present Nations of America. 6. Nuestra Sennora de la Paz, or our Lady of Peace. It is but a small Town, yet pleasantly seated upon the banks of a River in a fair and fruitful Plain, having Mountains on either side. It lieth almost in the middle of the Province, fourscore leagues distant from Cusco, and as many from Potozi: the Country round about it not a little famous for the best sort of Mines. There are also, 7. Chilane. 8. Acos. 9 Pomata, and some others; all of them good Towns, but not so considerable as those other. 7. Los Charcas is the furthest Country Southward of the Province of Peru, reaching up as far as Ch le, with which on the South it is bordered, having on the North Lima and Collao; on the West Mare del Zur, and on the East some Countries not yet well discovered, which lie betwixt it and the Province of Paraguay, or de la Plata. The Country is said to be in length about one hundred and fifty leagues, measuring it directly, or in a right line from North to South; but measuring it about along the Sea Coast much above two hundred. Not very rich either in Corn or , although in some parts it wanteth not good Pasturage: but of unparallelled wealth, in respect of the Mines both of Gold, and Silver which are here digged; the principal whereof are those of Potozi, and Porco above mentioned. The Towns and places of chiefest importance are, 1. la Plata, or the Silver-Town, so called from the rich Mines of Silver thereabouts, namely those of Porco, which is a Hill near adjoining to the Town. It had been anciently a Mine of the Incas, or Kings of Peru, yet held out and continued so rich, even to its last discovery by the Spaniards, that 'tis thought, Pizarro if reason could have ruled him, might here only have raised himself a rent of two hundred thousand Ducats per annum. But his desire and hopes, first to find more at Potozi, and afterwards his ambition and greediness to have or command all, carried him to violent courses which proved his ruin, as hath been said. The Town is conveniently seated in a fruitful soil, honoured with the Residence of the Governor of the Province, and with a Bishop's Sea, said to be the richest of Peru, viz. of fourscore thousand Ducats rend per annum. 2. Oropesa, a place of good Metal, as a man may it perceive by the name; lieth in the rich and pleasant Valley of Cochabamba, twenty leagues distant from la Plata. 3. Potozi, before the discovery of the Mines a poor and sorry Village, now the richest and best peopled Town of the Province, inhabited by no less than four or five thousand Spaniards, and of the Natives many more, beside above thirty thousand poor Negro-Slaves and other people belonging unto and labouring in the Mines; whose dwellings are in divers little Villages thereabouts: a place hugely resorted unto, both by Merchants for profit, and by Gallants for their pleasure, and though lying in a cold and but barren soil outwardly, yet so well accommodated with all things, that nothing can be desired more: and we need not wonder it should be so; for where money is, there is always the best Market. The place lieth in one and twenty degrees and some Minutes of Southern latitude, eighteen leagues distant from La Plata, and about one hundred and sixty from Cusco; and may be found both from the North and South Sea. From the South by the way of Arica, which is a Port or Haven upon Mare del Zur, seventy leagues or thereabouts distant from it, whither all, or most part of the Silver of Potozi, Porco, and other Mines of this province, is carried yearly upon the backs of the Pacos, or Sheep of Peru above mentioned, to be shipped there, for Panama, or Lima, and so for Spain. From the North it may be found by the River de la Plata, which falleth into the Atlantic Ocean thirty four degrees and some minutes Southward of the Line, and hath many good Towns of Spaniards seated either upon, or near unto it, as namely Buenos Ayres, St. Fe, Corduba, St. Jago de Eteco, and others, by which through a plain, and for the most part plentiful Country, the March to Potozi is so fair and open, that it may seem rather tedious than difficult. For they lay it indeed commonly at a distance of three hundred leagues or more from Buenos Airs, which is the farthest Town from it toward the Sea; but perhaps upon trial, it would not be found so much; it being otherwise certainly reported, that the Spaniards of Petozi and parts thereabouts, do frequently come down and trade with those of Buenos Ayres, for divers sorts of European Merchandise, and others, and would do much more, if the King of Spain would give leave, which if the distance were so great betwixt them, perhaps were not so probable. 4. Misque. 5. Lagunilla. 6. Tarixa, smaller Towns, but such as furnish Potozi with all sorts of good Wine, Wheat, Maiz, Sugar and the choicest fruits. 8. Arica the most known and frequented Port of this Country, upon Mare del Zur, of which we spoke in the description of Potozi. It was taken and sacked by Sir Francis Drake, in the year 1577, who found good booty both in the Town and in the ships; but is since, they say, better fortified both with Bulwarks and Ordinance, as doubtless the great importance of the place requireth. CHAP. XIIII. Of the Province of Chile. 1. FOllowing the coast of Mare deal Zur, or the South Sea, the next Province pertaining formerly to the Kingdom of Peru, is that of Chile. This is the most Southerly Province of the whole Country of America, reaching up as far as Magallanes Streits, with which to the Southward it is bounded: Northward it hath a Desert, and undiscovered Country, lying betwixt it and the confines of Peru called Atacama: on the West it hath Mare del Zur, and on the East up to Rio de la Plata, the Atlantic or North Sea, with some Country's undiscovered, which interpose betwixt it and Paraguay to the North-East. It lieth all of it beyond the Tropic of Capricorn, in a temperate Zone, and extendeth itself in length from the borders of Peru, to the mouth of the Streits five hundred leagues or more; but the breadth of it neither equal nor certain. They say 'tis called Chile from the word I'll, which signifies cold; it seems in their language as well as ours, it being generally a cold and bleak Country, the air in many parts of it so extremely sharp and piercing, that both Horse and Rider sometimes in travelling are frozen to death, as the Spaniards found by experience in their first search and discovery of the Country, under the Conduct of Diego Almagro, who is said to have left the greatest part of his men dead behind him in this manner. But this is chief towards the Andes, and on the Sea coast; the more inland parts of it, though mountainous also in some parts, yet are more temperate, and being also well watered with Rivers, are much more fruitful than the other, affording both Wheat, and Maiz, and likewise other grain, excellent Pasturage in many places and great store of , Wine, Honey, not without many & rich Mines both of Gold and Silver. The Natives of this Country were found the most stout and warlike of all the Americans, the Spaniards had hitherto met withal, fight with them and oftentimes defeating them in the open field surprising and sacking their Towns, and last of all taking their Captain and Commander in chief Prisoner. This was Pedro Baldivia, one of those good men that consented to the death of Atabalipa the last King of Peru, after a greater ransom accepted and paid, than perhaps the King of Spain could well raise on a sudden, if he had occasion to use it for himself. The Araucans' (for so are the People called that had him prisoner) are said to have entertained him for a while gallantly, making him a feast; but for his last draught give him a cup of melted gold, which the poor man was forced to take down, and so died. The whole Province generally is divided first into Chile, specially so called; and secondly Magellanica, or that part which lieth more Southward down to the Streits of Magellan. 2. Chile, properly so called, is bordered Northward with the Desert and barren Country of Atacama above mentioned; on the South with Magellanica; on the West with Mare del Zur; Eastward and to the North-East with some parts of Paraguay, or rather with some undiscovered Countries, lying betwixt them both. The length of it from North to South is reckoned to be little less than three hundred leagues, and generally of a fruitful Soil, affording beside abundance of gold and silver, both Corn, , Vineyards, and divers sorts of Fruits, equal both for kind and plenty to Spain itself, and sundry other parts of Europe. The Air likewise for the most part temperate, and the People, in their manners and conditions approaching much nearer to the Civility and likewise subtlety of Europeans, than other Americans did: which doubtless may be attributed to the conformity of the Climates under which they lie, agreeable to those of Europe; though otherwise in respect of the sphere and seasons of the year, there be Diametrical difference betwixt us, as for example, their Spring beginning in September, which is our Autumn; and their Autumn in March, which is our Spring: their longest day being that of St. Lucy on the eleventh of December, which is our shortest; and their shortest being St. Barnabies, viz. the eleventh of June which is our longest, etc. The Towns of chiefest note and importance in this Province are first Gopiapo, an old Town in the most Northerly parts of this Province, towards the Sea, where it hath a very commodious Haven belonging to it. 2. La Serena, a Town situate on the banks of Coquimbo, a pleasant River a little above its influx into the Sea, built by Baldivia, in the year 1544: The Country about it very rich in Mines of Gold; and the Town itself so well garrisoned for fear of the Natives, that when the English, under Sir Francis Drake, about four-score years since, attempted the gaining of the place, they found hot service of it, being stoutly resisted and beaten back again to their ships, by a sally of no less than three hundred good Horse and two hundred Foot. 3. St. Jago, the principal Town of the Province, a Bishop's Sea, and the ordinary residence of the Governor, lying on the banks of the River Tapocalma, in the thirty fourth degree of Southern latitude, fifteen leagues distant from the South-Sea, at which it hath a very commodious and much frequented Haven, which they call Valparayso, and where the English met with better fortune, as hath been said already in the report of Sir Francis Drakes voyage. 4. La Conception, a strong Town, seated on the Bay called Penco, threescore or seventy leagues distant from St. Jago towards the South, a place not a little fortified both by Nature and Art, having the Bay and a certain ridge of high Mountains begirting it almost round about; and where it is otherwise accessible, a Castle and certain Bulwarks with Ordinance, besides a Garrison of five hundred Soldiers at least continually in it: and all little enough to defend it against the Araucanes, their deadly Enemies, who live thereabouts, and are ever and anon making incursions almost up to the walls of it. Over against the place, in Mare del Zur, but very near the shore, there lieth a certain Island called St. Maries, exceedingly plentiful in Swine and all sorts of Poultry, which the Garrison of La Conception make good use of. 5. Los Confines: this is a Frontier Town, built by the aforesaid Baldivia, for defence of the rich Mines of gold at Ongol, a place near adjoining. 6. La Imperiale, another strong Garrison of this place on the banks of the River Cauten, near to which that great battle was fought, where Baldivia, with divers other Spaniards, was taken prisoner, who were not otherwise overcome, but by being overwearied with killing of their Enemies, and by that means not able to make their retreat. 7. Villa rica, another Colony of the Spaniards in these parts, sixteen leagues distant from Imperiale, and twenty five from the Sea. 8. Baldivia, so named from the Commander himself Pedro Baldivia, who built it in the Valley of Guadallanquen, two or three leagues distant from the Sea, where it hath a good and capacious Port; but nearer to it the best Mines of Peru, so rich, that 'tis said, they yielded Baldivia every day, so long as he could enjoy them, twenty five thousand Crowns for every man that wrought in them. 9 Osorno, a Town lying on the Bay of Chilve in a barren Soil outwardly, but otherwise neither less rich, nor less populous than Baldivia itself. These three towns, viz. Baldivia, Imperiale, and Osorno were in the years 1596, 1599, 1604, surprised by the Araucanes, and other savages confederate with them, sacked and burnt; and though the Spaniards be said to have recovered and garrisond some of them with fresh Soldiers, yet how long they were able to hold them, or whether they be Masters of them at this day I cannot say. There is likewise 10 Castro the most Southerly Town of the whole Province; built in a certain Island within the Bay of Chilve; and lastly towards Paraguay and Rio de la Plata there are the Towns Mendoza, and St. Juan de la Frontera; but they lie on the other side of the Andes, forty leagues distant from any of these we speak of, and perhaps more, and not above one hundred from Buenos Ayres, and the Atlantic Ocean. 3. Magellanica, the other part of this Province is bounded Northward with Chile abovesaid, and some parts of the Countries de la Plata; on the South with the narrow-Sea called Magellans' Streits, having Mare deal Zur on the West; and on the East the Atlantic Ocean. It contains in length, from the borders of Chile to the mouth of the Streits, about one hundred leagues; and in breadth, viz. from the North to the South Sea, somewhat more, viz. towards Chile and the Northwest parts of it; for towards the South and South-west it streightens still more and more; insomuch, that they which resemble the Southern part of America to the form of a Pyramid reversed, makes this part of the Country to be the spire or top of the Pyramid. It beareth the name of Ferdinand Magellan, a Portughese, who first discovered that narrow Sea, so famously known by the name of Magellans' Streits, upon which it lieth. It is a large Country and supposed not to be altogether barren of Metals; but as yet no great discovery hath been made of it: partly by reason of the excessive cold to which 'tis thought to be subject: and partly perhaps by reason of the difficulty of the enterprise, it being so far remote, and very hardly passable in many places, by reason of the huge mountains the Andes, which bar it, as it were, against all adventurers: but chief by reason of the stoutness and untameableness of the Araucanes and other Natives of Chile, through whose Country the march lieth, and who must first be conquered. So that very little can be said more of this Country, than only to name the Ports and places upon the Sea coasts, at which the Spaniards, and likewise some other Nations at several times have touched: the chief whereof upon the South-Sea are first Cabo de las Islas, a Promontory or Foreland twenty six leagues distant from that of St. Felix on the confines of Chile. 2. Puerto de San. Stephano, fifty leagues from that, towards the South. 3. La Valle de Nuestra Sennora, or our Lady's Dale, a large and secure Bay, eighteen leagues Southward of St. Stephens. 4. La Punta Delgada 5. Puerto de los Reyes. 6. Ancona Sin Salida: All of them Southward towards the Streits. Then is there almost at the opening of the Streits Cabo de la Vittoria, Cabo Desseado, and some others. Upon the North-Sea, and up towards Rio de la Plata, the chief places observed are first Rio de la Crux, and the Cape which they call de las Rameras, about thirty leagues distant from the Streits mouth. 2. The Bay of St. Julian, forty leagues Northward of that. 3. El Puerto Desseado. 4. Puerto de los Leones. 5. The Bay of Anegada: All of them good and capacious Havens for the security of shipping upon these coasts, and lying at a distance of thirty or forty leagues one from another, up towards Rio de la Plata, and the Country of Paraguay, of which we are next to speak. As for the Streits themselves, so much spoken of, and likewise so necessary to be known by those who frequent these parts of the World, they are a narrow Sea or Frith, by which the Atlantic Ocean, or rather some parts of it, doth fall into Mare deal Zur, or the South Sea. The passage is long, running, as 'tis commonly supposed, will nigh one hundred leagues together, almost in a parallel line, or in the same degree of latitude from one end to the other: and likewise extremely difficult, by reason of the many wind and turn of the Sea, which force them to be ever and anon altering of their course; and a Mountainous high Country on both sides of it, from whence it is almost continually beaten with storms, both dangerous and terrible, They were first discovered by Ferdinand Magellan, by Nation a Portughese, but in the service of the King of Spain; and by him named Magellanes Streits: who, although himself lived not to return into Spain, being slain in the conquest of the Moluccae Islands, yet his companions did, in the ship called Vittoria; from whence the Cape de la Vittoria abovesaid took its name. They lie at the mouth or entrance of them by the Atlantic Ocean, in the fifty two degrees of Southern latitude, and have not above fifty three and some minutes at their Exit, or opening into the South-Sea. There is likewise since this, and of but late times, viz. about the year 1615 another Strait discovered, by the Dutch, and called from the Discoverer Fretum, or the Streits of le More, four or five degrees more to the Southward than those of Magellan, and supposed to be a much easier and safer passage. The intention was, by the discovery of these straits, to have found a shorter way to the East-Indies, and the Kingdoms of Cathay and China, than that which was then only used, viz. by the Cape de Buena Speranza, and the Coast of afric: and so they do; but by reason of the great difficulty and uncertainty of the passage, I suppose neither the one nor the other is much frequented: the Spaniards for the most part serving themselves of their American Ports upon the South-Sea, from whence they make their voyages and returns to and from the other Indies, and from thence home to Spain; and the English with other Nations of Europe, trading still by the Coast of afric and Cape of Good Hope, or else by the way of Alexandria and the Persian Gulf, as heretofore. CHAP. XV. Of Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata. 1. We have seen in Magellanica the furthest, that is, the most Southerly part of the New-World, and before it in order all the Western Coasts of America that lie either upon or towards Mare deal Zur, viz. from Panama, the first Province of this Southern part down as far as the Streits. We are now to return and take a view of the Eastern Coasts, and those Countries which lie upon the Atlantic Ocean, steering our course henceforth Northward, not directly, but as the Coast leads us for a while Eastward and by North: for as much as the Land of America from the Streits of Magellan up as far as Brasil, and almost to the Equator, runneth out with a long Easterly point, little less than three thousand leagues together. The first Province we meet with on this side, next to Magellanica, is the Country of Paraguay, oftentimes called Rio de la Plata, from the name of an huge River, which runneth for the most part, through the midst of it. It is bordered, as we said, to the South and towards the Streits with Magellanica; on the East with the Atlantic Ocean; more Northward, or to the North-East, it hath Brasil; and on the West those undiscovered Countries of the Province of Chile, of which we spoke. The Country on both sides the River is reported to be a very lusty and fruitful Soil, bearing besides those which are proper and Native, all sorts of European Fruits and Grain in great abundance, with Sugarcanes, as many, great, and good, as any other Province of the New-World. Nor is it excelled by any other Country for good pasturage and great herds of , Sheep, Swine: In particular Horses are said to have so multiplied here, that of thirty Mares, and about six or seven Stallions, which the Spaniards left there, in the space of forty years the whole Country thereabouts towards the South, was filled with the Breed of them, running wild in great companies together, through all the Woods and Forests of the Country, and of excellent mettle and service if they could be tamed. It affordeth likewise great store of wild Deer and Stags, some Lions, Tigers, etc. nor is it without good Mines, some both of Gold and Silver; but chiefly, as to what is yet discovered, of Brass, and Iron; and the People altogether Savage. The River de la Plata, which, as we said divides the Country, is one of the largest of the whole World, rising, as 'tis supposed, out of the Lake called de los Xarayes, three hundred leagues or more within land, and falling into the Atlantic, or North Sea, in thirty four degrees of Southern latitude, with an Estuary or Mouth of thirty, or two and thirty leagues over. The whole Country is usually subdivided into three inferior Provinces, which are. 1. Rio de la Plata properly so called. 2. Tucuman. 3. La Crux de Sierra. 2. Rio de la Plata, properly so called, is that part of the Country, which extendeth itself on both sides of the River, in length many leagues together, but not answerable in breadth; and containeth these Towns of chiefest note and importance, viz. 1. Buenos Airs, by some called La Trinidad, on the Southern banks of the River de la Plata, sixty four leagues, they say, from the Mouth of it. It is seated commodiously at the foot of a little Mountain, and fortified with a Mudwall, a little Castle, and some pieces of Ordinance. 2. Sta. Fe, in English St, Faiths, fifty leagues above Buenos Ayres, upon the same River and a richer place, chief by reason of their cloth, of which there is here one of the greatest Manufactures of all these parts of Peru. 3. Nuestra Sennora de la Assumption, commonly called Assumption only, lying yet higher up the River almost one hundred leagues, a well built, and well frequented Town, said to be inhabited by two hundred Families at least of natural Spaniards, besides Mestizos, as they call them, which are the breed of Spaniards by the American People, men or women; and Mulattos, which are likewise their Race, but begotten upon Negroes: of both which there are reckoned to be here some Thousands. 4. La Ciudad Real, or more commonly called Ontiveros, fourscore leagues Northward from Assumption, seated on the banks of the River Parana in a fruitful Soil, as the Country generally is about all these places, but the Air here not so healthful. 5. St. Anne, upon the same River. 6. St. Salvador. 3. Westward of la Plata, lieth the Country of Tucuman, extending itself as far as the borders of Chile; a Country not yet well discovered either to the North or the South. That part of it which lieth toward Chile is well manured and husbanded, and likewise very fruitful: But that towards Magellanicae neither the one nor the other, remaining altogether untitled and barren. The chief Towns and places of note are, 1. St. Jago de Esteco, the principal Town of the Province and a Bishop's Sea, seated upon the River Esteco, one hundred and fourscore leagues distant from Buenos Ayres. 2. St Michael de Tucuman, seated at the foot of an huge rocky Mountain, but otherwise in a Soil the fruitfullest and best, both for Corn and Pasturage, of all this Country, twenty eight leagues distant from St. Jago. 3. Talavera, or Nuestra Sennora de Talavera, as the Spaniards call it, situate upon the banks of Salado, in a good Soil, and inhabited by an industrious People, grown exceeding rich and wealthy, chiefly by their Manufactures of cotton-wool, whereof they have great plenty, and by which they drive a Trade as fare as the Mines at Potozi, and other parts of Peru. 3. Corduba another rich Town of this Province and of great trade, as lying at an equal distance, viz. of fifty leagues, both from Sta. Fe, as they call it, or St. Faiths, in the Province of La Plata abovesaid, & from St. Juan de la Frontera in the Country of Chile; and almost in the road way from Potozi and those parts of Peru to Buenos Ayres and the North Sea. There are likewise the Towns 5. Chocinoca. 6. Sococha. 7. Calebinda. 8. Morata and others; but belonging for the most part to the reduced Natives. 4. Sta. Crux de Sierra is a little Territory (at least in comparison to some others (lying towards Peru, and reckoned by some for part of the Province of Peru. It lieth betwixt the two great Rivers of Paraguay and Guapay, one hundred leagues distant, as 'tis said, from Charcas, to which yet, in some causes it is subordinate. The Soil of the Country abundantly fertile in all sorts of American Fruits, besides good plenty both of Wheat and Maiz, scarcity of nothing useful for man's life, unless it be fresh water in some places. The chief Towns of it are, 1. Sta. Crux, situate at the foot of a great Mountain or Hill, but opening upon a large Plain, whose thirsty drieness is well refreshed by a certain Brook or Torrent, which issueth out of a neighbouring Mountain, & a few leagues distant from the Town maketh a pretty Lake which supplieth the Country thereabouts, both with fresh water and fish good plenty 2. Barranea, a Town supposed to be not above threesore leagues distant from Potozi. 3. Nova-Rioia, once a Colony of Spaniards, but sacked and spoiled by the Savages of these parts, about the year 1548, and the first Discoverer of the Country, namely Nunno de Chaves treacherously murdered by a Native; since which time, 'tis said to have been deserted. CHAP. XVI. Of Brasil. 1. NOrthward of Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata, lieth the Country of Brasil, a large Province of this Easterly part of America, and bounded to the East with Mare del Nort, or the Atlantic Ocean; on the West with the Andes. On the North it hath the great River Maragnon, which divides it from Guiana, and on the South Paraguay. It contains in length measuring by the Sea coast from North to South, two hundred leagues and more, but in breadth, that is from the Andes to the Sea, scarce half so much: of which likewise but a small portion is yet discovered, and less possessed; The Portugheses, who are Masters of the Country, holding only some few places towards the Sea, with so much of the uplands as the Inhabitants thereabouts can use, leaving all the rest to the Natives, or such as will adventure further for it. The Country is in some parts mountainous, and well set with Forests and huge Woods, yet generally of a Champaign and low ground, commodiously distinguished and watered with good Rivers. The Air for the most part sound and healthful, being said to be very much cleared by certain fresh winds from the Southward, which they have almost continually all along upon the coasts. The Soil would be admirably fruitful, were it not for overmuch rain; to which, especially in some parts the Country is subject. Nevertheless it is wonderfully plenteous, and aboundeth with sugarcanes, more than any other part of America beside; the Portugheses here having their Ingenios', as they call them, or sugar-Mills, up and down in all parts of the Country, with many thousands of Slaves working in them, which are brought them yearly out of Guiny, Congo, and other parts of afric. And 'tis a merchandise doubtless of huge profit to them; the Portugheses being supposed to transport one year with another only out of Brasil a hundred and fifty thousand Arrobes of fine sugar, every Arrobe containing twenty five Bushels, as some say, of English measure. There is likewise great quantity of that red wood, which they commonly call Brasil-wood, so much used both in England and other parts for dying of Cloth. The Trees of this wood are said to be of such incredible bigness, that whole Families of the Natives live upon or within an Arm of them, and they are a principal Stowage and refuge for them, when the Land is overflowed with waters, as at some times of the year it happens to be, and that unexpectedly on the sudden. This Country is another Africa, abounding with variety of many strange and prodigious creatures, more than any other part of the New-World, as may be seen in Authors, especially Laet lib. 15. cap. 5. etc. and the Natives generally no less savage and barbarous, going for the most part naked, eating Mans-fl●sh; the men cruel to extremity, and the women as wanton and immodest: both of them, especially more towards the Andes, hairy all over like bruit beasts, from whom they seem but little to differ, save only in shape. The Country is not as yet divided into Provinces or such national districts, as the other parts of America generally are, although there be found among them as many several sorts of People, and of different languages, as in any other Country, but into certain Prefectures or lesser Governments, which the Portugheses have erected and settled, only for the command and better securing of those parts which themselves hold in the Country. They lie all of them towards the Sea coast, and are reckoned to be about thirteen in number viz. 2. The Prefecture of St. Vincent, bordering on Rio de la Plata, and inhabited by the most civil People of Brasil, where the Portugheses have these Towns of note, viz. Los Santos, at the bottom of a Bay, or huge Arm of the Sea, with an Haven belonging to it capable of ships of good burden. It lieth two or three leagues distant from the main Ocean, and was taken and held by the English under Sir Thomas Cavendish, some two months together, in the year 1521, but is now better fortified with a Wall, two strong Castles, and some pieces of Ordinance. 2. St. Vincent, not above four miles distant from Los Santos, and better built, only it hath not the benefit of such a good Haven. 3. Itange. 4. Cananea; all of them southward of St. Vincent, at some leagues distance. 5. St. Paul, situate upon the top of a Mountain or little Hill, having a very curious prospect into the open fields, both towards the East, North and South; westward it overlooketh a little Wood or Forest, and is neighboured, they say, with very rich Mines of Gold in the Mountains Pernapiacaba, six or seven leagues distant. 6. St. Philip's on the banks of Iniambis, a fair River of this Country. The Prefecture of Rio de Janeiro, a district of this Country once held by the French, but taken from them by the Portugheses in the year 1558, and all the French put to the Sword. It hath these Towns, 1. Colignia, so named from that famous Huguenot Gaspar Coligni Admiral of France, by whose assistance and encouragement chief it had been peopled by the French; being seated on a Bay of the River Janeiro. 2. St. Sebastian's, a Town built by the Portugheses at the Mouth of the said Bay, and fortified with four strong Bulworks. 3. Angra de los Reyes, twelve leagues distant from St. Sebastian's westward, beside some Burroughs of the Natives very populous, but neither strong nor fortified. The Prefecture del Spirito Santo, one of the most fertile Prefectships of all Brasil, plentifully stored with cotton-wool, watered with excellent Rivers, especially that which they call Parayba, of a large stream, and full of good fish. The Prefecture itself is not very large, as having one only Town of note in it, inhabited by the Portugheses, called likewise Spirito Santo; but it hath two hundred Families at least in it, and a very safe and commodious Haven belonging to it three or four leagues distant from the Sea. The Prefecture of Puerto Seguro, fifty leagues more to the North of Spirito Santo, having these Towms, viz. 1. Puerto Seguro itself, seated, as it were, upon a Rock or Cliff towards the Sea side, where it commands the Haven, and contains in it about two hundred Families of Portugheses. 2. Sta. Crux, three leagues distant from Puerto Seguro. 3. Amaro, or St. Omars in America, once a rich Town, and well Traded by reason of the abundance of sugarcanes which the Country affordeth, but since deserted, as some say, by the Portugheses, not able to maintain the place and their trading against the Savages thereabouts, who having killed & likewise eaten most of the slaves at their sugar-Farms in the Country, seemed to threaten no less to themselves. The Prefecture Does Ilheos, as the Portugheses call it, either from certain Islands which lie before it, or from the principal Town called Ilheos seated upon a convenient Bay or Arm of the Sea, about thirty leagues distant from Puerto Seguro to the North. There are said to be one hundred or one hundred and fifty Families of Portugheses in it; and a few leagues from it more within land, a Lake of ten or twelve leagues in compass, well stored with good Fish, especially those called Manati, a dainty Fish for meat, as hath been said, and so big, that, as Laet reporteth, some of them here are found of a thousand or eleven hundred pound weight, and sometimes more. The Portugheses hereabouts would quickly grow rich by the abundance of sugarcanes and good which the Country breeds, but for the Guaymuris, as they call them, which are a sort of Savages of Gigantine size and stature, as they say, much more fierce and cruel than others, and which do very much infest their quarters. The Prefecture of Todos los Santos, in english All Saints, lying upon a goodly and spacious Bay called likewise the Bay of All Saints, thirty leagues distant from Does Ilheos' abovesaid, and is a very convenient and safe Harbour for shipping in those Seas, which are sometimes not a little stormy and tempestuous. It's a place very well fortified, and especially memorable for a brave exploit performed there by Peter Heynes a Dutch man, and Admiral of a squadron of States ships in the year 1627., who, as 'tis said, only with his own ship (the rest of his company not being able to follow him) thrust into a Fleet of Spaniards, of no less than twenty six sail, that lay at Anchor in the Bay, and having sunk their Admiral, took all the rest at Mercy, and carried them out with him in spite of some other ships that lay there, and the Castle, and above forty pieces of Ordinance planted on the shore. Their chief Towns are St. Salvador, built on a little hill on the North side of the Bay. It is a walled Town, and fortified with no less than three strong Castles, yet surprised by the Dutch in the year 1624., but lost again the next year following, as they would make us believe, by the treachery of some of their own company. The Prefecture of Fernambuck, held to be one of the richest and best of the Country, both for Tobacco, Sugar, and great quantity of Brasil wood, which is yearly brought from thence. Their chief Towns are first Olinda, the biggest Town and best Peopled of all Brasil, containing by estimation above two thousand persons Portugheses, not reckoning ecclesiastics and Religious men into the number; of which yet there are many. It lieth toward the Sea side, but upon such an uneven ground that it is not apt to be fortified otherwise then it is by Nature; neither is the Haven so great as a Town of such Trading would require; yet is it fortified with a Castle and some pieces of Ordinance. The Castle and a great part of the suburbs along the Coast, were surprised by the English under Captain Lancaster in the year 1595, and a rich prize of the chief Commodities of Brasil and India brought from thence; and in the year 1630 the Town itself, Castle and all taken by the Dutch, who thereupon became Masters of this whole Prefecture, which they held for many years together against the Spaniards, but have since lost it wholly again to the Portughese. 2. Garasa, five leagues distant from Olinda, a small Town but holding likewise some little Commerce with the Sea, by the benefit of a River upon which it standeth. 3. Amatta de Brasil. 4. San. Lorenzo, and some other Villages. The Prefecture of Tamaraca; so called from a little Island lying before it, and part of its Precinct. It is counted the first, that is, the most ancient Prefectship of Brasil, having otherwise nothing in it that is very considerable, save only a good Haven or Port, with a Castle, for the security and command of it, held to be impregnable. The Prefecture of Parayba, so called from the chief Town of the Province, upon the banks of the River S. Domingo, and at the bottom of a Bay or Arm of the Sea, by which ships of good burden come up even close to the Town. It's inhabited by above five hundred Portugheses, a walled Town and likewise fortified with a Castle upon Cape Delo, near adjoining to it. The Prefecture of Rio Grande, or the great River, a small Precinct on the Southside of Rio Grande, where it falls into the Sea. It was once possessed by the French about the year 1597, who were outed by the Portugheses, and the place fortified both against them and the Savages, with a Castle, which the Dutch in the year 1631 found an impregnable piece, and too hard for them: and besides this there is not much in the whole Prefectship that seems memorable. The Prefecture of Siara, in which they seem to have as little, that is, no Towns of note, only a Castle and some few houses for those that attend the gathering of cotton-wool, some Crystal, and other precious stones, which the Country is said to afford. The Prefecture of Maragnon: This is an Island lying at the mouth of the great River Maragnon in the furthest parts of Brasil Northward. The soil exceedingly fruitful if there were any body to manure and husband it, affording plenty of Maiz naturally, and a certain other root which the Savages call Mariot, and use likewise for Bread: great store of cotton-wool, sugarcanes, Saffron, with the best sort of Tobacco; not without some Balm and Amber, watered with many fresh Rivers and springs, well wooded both for Timber and Fuel; and the Air so exceedingly temperate and agreeable, that no People in the World are generally longer lived than those of this Island; being otherwise very strong and able of body, healthful of constitution, never bald, and the Women so fruitful and lusty, that they are said to bear Children (many of them) at seventy or eighty years of age. The Men very curious in the Feather works of America, and not a little industrious in the Manufactures of cotton-wool. It lieth some few degrees Southward of the Equator, and containeth not in the compass of the whole Island above fifty or threescore leagues at most. The French were once Masters of it, viz. about the year 1612, when they built the strong Fort called St. Lewis, upon the principal Bay or Port belonging to the Island, and planted twenty two good pieces of Ordinance upon it, and by the pains of some Religious men among them, began to do much good upon the Natives, by reducing them to Civility and good Manners, and instructing them in the true knowledge of God and of Christian Religion: But were soon after, viz. in the year 1614, driven out by the Portughese, under the command of Hierom de Albuquerque, who, for the security of the Island against them, and the Natives that took their part, built those other two Forts which are called St. Maries and St. Francis, and likewise two Towns more within the Island, which he founded and Peopled, naming the one of them St. Andrew, which lies towards the North; and the other St. James, towards the South. And lastly the Prefecture of Para. This is the most Northerly part of Brasil, bordering upon Guiana, so called from the River Para, which runneth through the midst of it, upon which, in a convenient place, and upon raised ground, the Portugheses have built a very strong Castle, well walled on all sides, save only towards the River, where it is planted with Ordinance. It is built in a Quadrangular form, and hath at least 300 persons of the Portughese Nation (beside the Garrison Soldiers) belonging to it, who have all employment enough about the cotton-wool, sugarcanes, and Tobacco, which the Country is said to afford in good plenty. CHAP. XVII. Of the Country of Guiana. 1. NExt to Brasil, towards the North, lieth the pleasant and fruitful Country of Guiana, supposed, not improbably, to be so called from the River Wia, one of the principal Rivers of the Province; which yet is said to have more and fairer than any other part of America beside. It is bounded on the East with the Atlantic Ocean, or Mare deal Nordt; on the West with the Andes, or rather some undiscovered Mountainous Countries which lie between the one and the other: On the North it hath the great River Orenoque; and on the South that of the Amazons, of Orellana. The Country lieth on both sides of the Equator, extended from the fourth degree of Southern latitude, to the eighth degree of Northern: yet enjoyeth a temperate and good Air, not oppressed with any excessive heat; which is chief attributed to the Brise's or Easterly winds, almost perpetually every day about noon blowing upon it. Towards the Sea side it is for the most part a flat and level Country; in the more Inland parts Mountainous and swelled with Hills; but in all generally of such a rich and fertile Soil, that for Fruits, or any outward Commodities of the Earth, it yields not to any other Province of the New-World, but rather fare excelleth the most; having, as it were a continual Summer, without Winter or Autumn, the Trees never unclothed or made bare, Fruits always ripe, or growing to maturity, the Meadows and Pastures always Verdant and green: and, as we said so excellently well watered with Rivers, that no Country in the World seems comparable to it in this respect: And by the principal of them it is divided into four inferior or lesser Provinces, which are, 1. Rio de las amazons. 2. Wiapoco, or Guiana, properly so called. 3. Orenoque: And 4. the Islands of Guiana. 2. Rio de las amazons, or the Country of Amazons, containeth all that part of Guiana which lieth on both sides of the River Orellana, of a rich and good Soil generally, abounding with all sorts of Fruits, and especially with those which the Americans call Totock, and love extremely, out of an opinion, they say, that it excites them to Venery, whereunto they are of themselves but too much inclined; and of another which they call Pita, of a taste f●●re more delicious and pleasing, and not so hurtful as the other. The Country was first discovered by Francisco Orellana a Spaniard from Quito, but it was only by the River Orellana: and though he be credibly reported to have sailed no less than eighteen hundred leagues down the stream, and to have discovered a rich and fair Country on both sides the River, well peopled with Natives, and giving in divers places no small arguments of greater wealth and riches more within Land; yet such was the bad success of his second endeavours, and likewise of those that followed him, that, as yet, there seems no further report to be given▪ at lest not of any thing special, concerning this part of the Country. 3. Wiapoco, or Guiana, properly so called, taketh up the middle part of this Province, being divided, as the other, almost into two equal parts, by the River Wiapoco, which runs through the midst of it. The Country on both sides of the River very rich and fertile, and so naturally apt, both for sugarcanes, cotton-wool, and Tobacco, that they are said to grow here (all of them very good) without planting or any Art of Husbandry. In this Country is likewise the famous D●rada, as the Spaniards call it, or City of Gold (if it could be found) with the reports and hopes whereof some of our own Nation seem to have been not a little possessed, as well as the Spaniards. Nor can I much blame them; for if the stories of it had proved true, it must have been one of the goodliest and fairest Cities of the World (not to speak of the wealth.) Diego de Ordas, the Spaniard who first brought news of it to his Countrymen, being said to have traveled one whole day and half another in it, before he could arrive at the King's Palace; which yet must be supposed to have stood but in the midst of the City. But for aught appears, if the endeavours of future times effect nothing more in the discovery of it than former have done, it must pass for the Metropolis of Utopia still, as I think most men take it to be. Places of less Magnificence, but more Certainty are first Caripo: This was once a Colony of English settled there by Captain Robert Harcourt, in the year 1608, upon the banks of Wiapoco, and not fare from the mouth of it; being a place, by advantage of a Rock, which it hath on the one side of it, of good strength and very difficult access, the Air about it sound, and said to be very agreeable to English bodies. 2. Gomaribo, a Colony formerly of the Dutch, on the Northwest side of the Bay of Wiapoco, but since deserted by them. 3. Moyemon. 4. Crewinay, both of them Towns of the Natives, not fare distant from the other. 4. Orenoque, or the third division of this Province, comprehendeth the most Northerly parts of Guiana, lying upon or towards the banks of this famous River. A Country likewise reported to be very rich, and comparable to Peru itself for hidden Treasure; which, they say, is not yet discovered, only for want of diligent and industrious searching. The places in it already known are only 1. Coniolaba, as they call it, which seems to be some Town of the Natives, lying a few leagues distant from the Orenoque towards the South. 2. Movequito, a known Port or Haven Town upon a branch of the Orenoque, much frequented and of great use to the English, when they discovered those coasts. 3. Wenicapora: And lastly St. Thome, the only Town which the Spaniards hold upon this part of the Continent, situate upon the principal Channel of the O●enoque, and consisting of two hundred Families or thereabouts. It is now a fortified place; and was taken by Sir Walter Raleigh in that unfortunate Action of 1617., for which the year following (though by virtue of an old attainder, as some say) he lost his head. 5. The Islands that belong, and are commonly reckoned as parts of Guiana, are either such as lie scattered about the shore of the Province, or such as are found at the mouth, and sometimes fare within the Channel of those great Rivers which empty themselves at several parts out of this Country into the Sea, viz. Orenoque, Wiapoco, Rio de las amazons, etc. There are many of them, but of any great name or esteem only two, viz. Trinidado and Tabag●. Trinidado lieth at the mouth of the River Orenoque, over against the Country of Paria, from which it is separated by a Fryth or narrow Sea, which Columbus at his first discovery of it, and from the difficulty of the passage, (by reason of some lesser Islands scattered up and down in the Channel, and through which the Sea breaks with a great deal of force) called Boca del Dragro, or the Dragon's mouth. It lieth betwixt the ninth and tenth degrees of Northern latitude, accounted to be in length about 24. or twenty five leagues, and about eighteen in breadth, of a cloudy and less pleasant air, yet the Soil good, and abundantly well stored with all Commodities of the natural growth of America, viz. Maiz, sugarcanes, cotton-wool, and the best sort of Tobacco, good quantity of Fruits also, and of ; some veins of gold, and of a kind of Pitch, which they dig out of a Mine, such plenty, that as many ships as could come, might lad themselves with it; and is said to be good in all other respects, except only that it will not endure the Sun. The chief Town of this Island is called St. joseph's, situate on the banks of a little River, which they call Carone, on the South side of the Island; which was likewise taken by Sir Walter Raleigh, in the year abovesaid and in it the Governor Antonio Berreo, who, to procure his liberty or fair treating at Sir Welter's hands, is thought to have furnished him with some relations concerning Guiana more liberally than otherwise he needed. Tabago lieth Eastward of Trinidado, and divided from it by a little Sea of eight miles over, said to have, for the bigness of it, as many safe Harbours belonging to it, as any Island of America. The Dutch of late years have named it Niew-Walacheren; and are said to frequent it; but for what special Commodities or reason, doth not appear. CHAP. XVIII. Of Paria, or New-Andalusia. 1. THe last, but not the least Province of the Southern America, is the Country of Paria, by some called Nova-Andalusia, but for what reason or resemblance with Andalusia of Old-Spain they do not tell us. This Country lying as it doth, brings us back again by the Eastern Coast to the Isthmus or Streit, which, as we have often said, joins the two parts of the Continent of America together; at least to those Countries that lie next upon it to the South, viz. the new Kingdom of Granada, etc. It hath on the East Guiana, and those Islands which lie about the mouth of Orenoque; on the West the Gulf or Bay of Venezuela, with some part of the New Kingdom abovesaid; on the North it is washed with the Atlantic Ocean, and hath on the South some Countries not yet discovered, toward the Andes. The whole consisteth partly of Continent and partly of Islands, near adjoining to it; and is commonly divided into five several Precincts or parts, which are 1. Cumana. 2. Venezuela. 3. Margarita. 4. Cubagna: And 5. some lesser Islands. 2. Cumana is bounded Eastward with the Gulf of Paria, and the River Orenoque; on the West with Venezuela: Northward it hath the Atlantic Ocean; and on the South those undiscovered Countries above mentioned: containing in length two hundred leagues or more, as some say, and not much less than one hundred in breadth; but for aught appears, little of it planted or used, save only upon the Sea side, where the Coast hath formerly been much famed for the rich Trade of Pearls and Pearl-Fishing; which failing, its principal esteem now is for an excellent vein of Salt, which they dig here as out of a Mine, and gather it naturally made ready to their hands, not half a mile from the Sea side, on the backside of the Promontory or Cape, called by some Punto de Araya, and by others for this reason Cape de Salinas. Places of chiefest consideration here are, 1. Cumana itself, a Colony of Spaniards seated on the banks of a little River two miles distant from the Sea, where it hath a good Harbour. 2. St. Jago, a very strong fortress, which the Spaniards of late years have built, for the defence and security of the Saltworks against the Dutch, who began to trade much that way, and in the year 1622, had a design to have made themselves Masters of the Place. 3. St. Michael de Neveri, another Fortress of theirs upon a River so called. 4. Guaniba, a Town of the Natives. 3. Venezuela, the prineipall part of this Province, is bordered on the East with Cumana; on the West with a great Gulf, or Bay, commonly called the Bay of Venezuela, with the L●ke Maracabo, and some part of New-Granada; Nothward it hath the Ocean, or Atlantic Sea; southward some undiscovered Countries, which, as we said, lie betwixt the Andes and it. It stretches out in length from East to West one hundred and thirty leagues or thereabouts, but in breadth little more than half so much; being named Venezuela, or Little Venice, by Alonso de Oyeda a Spaniard, who at his first discovery of the Country fell upon a Town of the Natives, which stood like another Venice, all upon the waters, and having no passage to it, but only by Boats. It's a Country extraordinary rich in all sorts of Commodities, affords good Pasture for , and abundance of fair herds of them, Oxen, Sheep, Swine, etc. plenty of Corn and other Grain, great store of Venison likewise in the Woods, of Fish in the Rivers, Gold in the Mines; and therefore not likely but to be well peopled and inhabited, especially by the Spaniards, whose Towns and places of chief importance are these, viz. 1. Venezuela, at the most westerly Confines of the Country, built upon the Sea, with the advantage of a double Haven, in a temperate and good Air, and Soil round about it, the richest and best of the whole Province. It is now a Bishop's Sea, who is Suffragan to the Archbishop of St. Domingo in Hispaniola, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor. 2. Caravalleda, called by the Spaniards Nuestra Sennora de Caravalleda, fourscore leagues distant from Venezuela toward the East, upon the Sea, likewise. 3. St. Jago de Leon in the Country of Caracas four or five leagues southward of Caravalleda, and six or seven distant from the Sea. 4. New-Valentia, twenty five leagues distant from St. Jago. 5. New-Xeres, a Town but lately built fifteen leagues southward of New Valentia. 6. New-Segovia, but one league distant from Xeres. 7. Tucuyo a place well known and frequented, for the abundance of Sugar which is made there, and in the Country round about it. 8. Truxillo, or our Lady de la Paz, eighteen leagues southward of the Lake Maracaybo, a place of great resort, and much frequented for trade both by Spaniards and Natives. 9 Laguna, a Town lying more towards the bottom of the Lake, said to be much haunted with Tigers; and more than this, not much is said of it. 4. Margarita is an Island lying right over against the Salinas, or Cape de Araya afore mentioned, seven or eight leagues distant from the Main-land, and taking its name from the abundance of Pearls found about it, when time was. It contains not above fifteen or sixteen leagues in length, and about six in breath, having these only places of importance in it, viz. Mon Pater, which is a good Fort of the Spaniards built at the East Angle of the Island, to secure their Pearl-fishing when that Trade held, and to defend their ships, which commonly road there at Anchor. 2. the Valley of Sta. Lucia, two leagues distant from the Sea, where the Spaniards have a Colony. 3. Makanao, a Town of the Natives. This whole Island was surprised by the English under Captain Parker in the year 1601, who in stead of Prisoners carried away good store of the Spaniards Pearl, which he forced them to pay for their ransom. 5. Cubagna, another Island pertaining to this Province of Paria, lieth almost in the middle way betwixt the Island Margarita and the Continent; from which last it is not counted to be above a league distant, and five or six from the other; being itself in the compass of the whole, not much above three or four: of a Soil wholly barren and destitute of all kind of necessaries for the life and sustenance of man, without Corn, without Pasturage, without Fruit, without water; yet only for the richness of the Pearl-fishing round about it, for many years together, there was no place more frequented than it. Nor is it at present wholly deserted: for though the Trade of Pearls be said to have failed for some years, yet have they a Colony still remaining there, called New-Cadiz; and on the East part of the Islands a certain Fountain, not far from the Sea side, which yields a kind of Bituminous substance like Oil, of such a medicinable virtue for many diseases, that it sufficiently recompenseth the want of the Pearls by a more real utility and benefit, & is found in good plenty floating for the most part upon the Sea thereabout. 5. The lesser Islands (as they are called) part of this Provincial Prefecture of Paria, lie all along upon the coasts of Venezuela from East to West; in number many, but the principal of them are 1. Tortuga, a little Island said to be not above four or five miles in length, and in breadth hardly one, but well know for the abundance of good Salt that is made, and transported thence every year; it lieth five or six leagues westward of Margarita; hath a good Harbour, and abundance of that wood called Guaiacum, of which we spoke before. 2. Bonayre an Island of five or six leagues in compass, well stored with small Cattles, especially Sheep and Goats. It lieth right over against the Bay called Golfo Triste, or the Unfortunate B●y, and was the place whether the Spaniards transplanted the poor Natives of Hispaniola, when they grew weary of killing them. 3. Curacaos three or four leagues westward of Bonayre, and containing about so many in compass, of a soil exceedingly fertile and good for Pasturage, having likewise on the north side of the Island a very good and safe Harbour for shipping. 4. Aruba, three or four leagues distant from Curacaos to the North-east, about five miles in compass, being for the most part a level and flat Country, inhabited, but not much, either by Spaniards or Natives. 5. Los Monges, or the Monks, as the Spaniards named them: These are three or four lesser Island lying eastward of the Cape Coquibocoa of great use and direction at Sea, to those that sail for Carthagena, but for any thing else scarcely memorable. CHAP. XIX. Of the American Islands. 1. WE have spoken hitherto only of the Continent of America, and those Islands, which lie so near the Continent, that they are commonly reckoned as part of it, and appertaining to the respective Provinces against which they lie. It remains now, (not to leave any thing considerable untouched at least) that we take a view of some other Islands viz. that lie further off and seem not to have any other relation to America, but only that of obedience and subjection to the Spaniards government, who are Lords of America, and have reduced at least the principal and chief of those Islands, long since under their power. They lie either in the South or the North Sea. Those in the South, or Mare deal Zur are chief two, viz. Los Ladrones, and the Islands Fernandinae. Los Ladrones, in English, the Islands of Thiefs, lie as it were in the middle way betwixt the Main-land of America and the Philippine Islands, but some hundred of leagues distant from either, in the fourth degree of Northern latitude. So named by Ferdinand Magellan, from the pilfering disposition he observed in the Natives, when he sailed that way for the Moluccae Islands. They were a nimble and active sort of People, yet light-fingerd, it should seem, and going for the most part naked, tall of stature, excellent Swimmers and Divers, and have not much more to be spoken in their Commendation. The Fernandinae are only two Islands of no great bigness lying over against the coast of Chile, in the three and thirtieth degree of Southern latitude, and about one hundred leagues, or three hundred English miles from the Continent: yet well stored with some lesser sort of , as Goats, etc. good plenty likewise of Venison in the Woods, and of Fish upon the Coasts: for which reason, though lying at some distance, yet are they not a little frequented by the Spaniards of Peru; who find many good Harbours and roads for shipping belonging to, and about these Islands. But the chief, viz. of the American Islands abovesaid, are those which lie in the Atlantic or North-Sea, on the East side, and as it were in the way to the Continent of America; which are as follow, viz. 1. The Caribes. 2. Port-rico. 3. Hispaniola. 4. Cuba, and 5. Jamaica. Of the Caribee Islands. 1. THe Caribee-Islands (as the English commonly call them) are a row or ridge, as it were of lesser Islands, which extend themselves, almost in fashion of a Bow, from the Coast of Paria, as far as St. John de Port-rico: The name signifies as much as the Islands of Cannibals, or Man-Eaters; and so the Natives generally were, before they were either destroyed or reduced to better manners by the Spaniards. There are many of them, but the principal and those which seem most worthy of notice are, 1. Granada: This lieth in form of a Croissant or halfmoon, upon the Continent of Paria, viz. that part of it which is called Cuniana; having a reasonable good Haven, and a Soil not altogether unfruitful, but much over-shaded with Woods, and hitherto but little inhabited. 2. St. Vincent, six or seven leagues Northward of Granada, but from any part of the Continent ten at least: a very fruitful Island, yielding abundance of Sugarcanes that grow naturally without any Art or help of Husbandry; well watered with Rivers, and affording many convenient Bays and safe roads for shipping. It lieth in a circular form, and is thought to contain about eight or ten leagues in compass; Inhabited by a People not over much industrious, nor solicitous for aught but what concerns the belly. 3. Dominica, an Island of twelve leagues in length, very fruitful of a good sort of Tobacco, which the Europeans have of the Natives chief in exchange of Knives, some Hatchets, and other Instruments of Iron, which they value much. It hath on the West side of it a convenient Harbour for ships; but the People being said to continue Cannibals, and exceedingly barbarous, even to this present, no Nations as yet, have attempted to inhabit among them. 4. La Desseada, a small Island, but of great use to the Spaniards, who always touch at it both coming and going. 5. Guadalupe, another small Island, which they likewise take in their way continually to and from America: it serves them chief for fresh water, and lieth eight or ten leagues Westward of Desseada. 6. Antego, as the English corruptly call it, rather Antiqua, is an Island of about seven leagues in length, and almost as much in breadth, lying to the North-East of Guadalupe, where the English of late years are said to have planted a Colony, but wherein their Trade lieth, doth not so well appear. 7. St. Christopher's: This lieth on the Northwest of Guadalupe; where the English and French (both of them) having planted their several Colonies, were, not many years since, outed by the Spainyards, yet permitted quietly to pass to their other Plantations. The chief Commodity which the Country yields is Tobacco; and in the Easterly parts of it some Salt. 8. Barbados: This is an Island at the North-East of St. Vincent, of an oval form, and of the same bigness or extent with that of St. Vincent, that is, containing in the compass of the whole a matter of eighteen or twenty miles. It lieth the most Easterly of all the rest of these Islands; of a Soil very lusty and good, especially for such Commodities as are proper for it. On the East side it hath many Angles and Points shooting out into the Sea, which consequently make many Bays upon the Coast of it; but, by reason of certain quicksands which lie before them, not much used or frequented by ships. On the South side it hath a large and convenient Harbour, capable of the tallest ships, and well frequented. It is counted now one of the best Colonies of the English, but said to have been heretofore not a little at the mercy of the Spaniard Their chief Trade is Tobacco, and a kind of course Sugar, which we call Barbados-Sugar, and will not keep long; not that the Country is unapt for better, but, as 'tis rather supposed, because the Planters want either skill, or stock, to improve things to the best. The Country is somewhat hot, and it behoves an English man to be very temperate and wary, when he goes first thither. 9 Sta. Crux, called by the Natives anciently Ayay, fifteen leagues distant from Port-rico to the Southeast, woody and Mountainous, having on the West side of it a convenient Harbour for shipping. They speak of a certain Fruit of this Country not unlike to a green Apple; which if a Man eat, it causeth such an inflammation and swelling of his tongue, that for twenty four hours space at least, he looseth the use of it quite; but afterwards it assuageth of itself without further hurt: And also of certain Fen-waters, with which, if a Man chance to wash his face before noon, it likewise swells so much presently, that his eyes will be closed up; but in the afternoon no such matter; which I mention, because they say there is a Colony of English settled there of late years. There be many other of these Caribee Islands beside, as namely Anguilla, Barbada, St. Bartholmews, Las Nieves, St. Lucy's, St. martin's, Montserrat, etc. but of so little consideration, especially to our Nation, that it would seem but tedious to mention them further. Of Port-rico and Monico. 1. POrt-rico is an Island fifteen leagues distant from Sta. Crux, as hath been said, to the Northwest, and about as many from Hispaniola to the Southeast; but from the Continent or main Land of Paria (which seems to be the nearest) one hundred and thirty, or one hundred and thirty six, as some reckon. It lieth almost in a Quadrangular form, being supposed to contain about thirty leagues in length, and not less than twenty in breadth, in eighteen and nineteen degrees of Northernlatitude. The Air reasonably temperate and agreeable, not scorched with any excessive heats in Summer, nor beaten with those continual rains, to which some parts of America are subject, in Winter: its greatest annoyance being from those sudden and violent tempests, which they call Hurricanoes, which infest it very much, especially in the months of August and September. The Soil fruitful enough, affording abundance of Sugarcanes, Ginger, Cassia, Hides, and divers other rich Commodities. As concerning the Mines both of gold and silver, which were once certainly known to be there, some say they are exhausted and spent long since; others think that's but a pretence of the Spaniards, to keep strangers from looking into the Country, while they themselves are more busied within Land. It is divided almost in the midst from East to West with a ridge of Mountains which the Spaniards call Sierra del Loquillo, and hath these Towns of chief note and importance, viz. first Port-rico itself, commonly called St. John de Port-rico, a strong and neat Town well built in a little Island by itself, but joined to the other by certain huge piles of Timber-work, of vast labour and expense, done by command of Philip the second, King of Spain. It was attempted by Sir Francis Drake in the year 1595 without success, but a few years after taken by the Earl of Cumberland, as hath been said. 2. St. Germane in the West parts of the Island, three or four leagues distant from the Sea, a place, as 'tis said to be, neither fortified nor much frequented. 3. Luysay on the East side, a good and well frequented Port, some leagues distant from Port-rico. 2. Eastward of Port-rico, and betwixt it and Hispaniola there lieth a little, but fruitful Island called Mona; and Westward of that another called Monico, or Monetta, which last the English, when time was, found so admirably stored with a sort of wild Fowl, that the huge flights of them seemed to darken the Air over their heads, and upon their landing found such plenty of their eggs upon the shore and ground thereabouts, that they presently laded two of their boats with them. But how Peopled or possessed not so well known. Of Hispaniola. 1. HIspaniola (or little Spain, as Columbus named it) is if not the largest, yet at least the fairest and goodliest of all the American Islands, called by the Natives anciently Hayti. It lieth, as we said, fifteen leagues Westward of Port-rico, and distant from the main Land of America about one hundred and twenty; of a Triangular form; the sharpest point whereof is that towards Port-rico, which they call Cabo de Enganno. That towards the West inclines to a semicircle, containing a good and convenient Bay betwixt the two points, viz. St. Nicholas to the North, and Cabo de Donna Maria towards the South. It's not thought to be less than one hundred and fifty leagues in length, in breadth from threescore to thirty, and to contain in the compass of the whole four hundred leagues at least; lying betwixt eighteen and twenty degrees of Northern latitude, having an Air somewhat infested with the morning heats, but well cooled again in the afternoon, by a constant wind from the Sea, which they call there Virason. It is, for the fertility of the Soil, the richest and most flourishing Country (one of them) in the World; the T●ees and all things else there, continually clad, as it were, in their Summer livery, the Meadows and Pastures always green, and of such an excellent Herbage, that both breed and thrive there almost beyond belief; both great and small, as Kine, Sheep, Hogs, etc. brought thither out of Spain, having multiplied to such numbers, that they live wild now in Herds, as hath been said, and are both hunted and killed, like Stags or other Venison only for their Hides, which they send yearly into Spain and other parts of Europe, as a great Merchandise and Commodity of huge profit to them. So plentiful of Sugarcanes, that 'tis thought no less than one thousand Chests of refined Sugar are sent out of this only Island one year with another. Nor was it formerly without good Mines, both of gold and silver; which whether they be now wasted and wholly exhausted, or only neglected for want of Miners to work in them, time may show. Of Brass and Iron they have many good Mines at present, of no small profit and advantage to them. The whole Island is said to be naturally divided, as it were, into four several quarters, by four several Rivers, arising out of one and the same Mountain almost in the midst of the Island, that is to say, 1. Jache. which runneth Northward. 2. Nubila, towards the South. 3. Yunna, or Junna, to the East: And 4. Hatebonico, to the West: but others (it must be confessed) mention the same Rivers without any such special observation. The chief Towns and places of this Island inhabited by Spaniards are first St. Domingo, on the South side of the Island, built first by Bartholomew Columbus, in the year 1594, on the banks of Ozama one of the fairest Rivers of the Country, towards the Sea side; where it hath l kewise a good Haven or Port, and on the West side of it a strong Castle. It's a place of great honour and dignity at present, being an Archbishop's Sea, and the ordinary Residence of the Governor and supreme Courts for these parts of America, but flourished more formerly with resort and multitudes of people, than now it doth; which is attributed to the later discoveries of Mexico and Peru; by occasion whereof abundance of the Inhabitants, and not a little of the trade likewise hath been drawn from it. 2. Salvaleon twenty eight leagues distant from St. Domingo towards the East. 3. Juguana, or Sta. Maria del Puerto, in the more western parts of the Island, a small Town not above a league distant from the Sea, where it hath a good Haven, but supposed not to be much fortified. 4. Cotuy, once a rich Town in the North parts of the Island, and well frequented: now said to be in a manner deserted. 5. Conception de la Vega, built by Columbus himself, and from whence he had his Title Duke de la Vega: it lieth twenty or thirty leagues northward of St. Domingo. 6. Puerto de la Plata, or the Silver-Haven, forty leagues distant from St. Domingo likewise towards the North, it is the second Town for wealth and trade in the whole Island, commodiously seated on a Bay, or Arm of the Sea, and fortified with a Castle. 7. Azua, or New-Compostella, twenty four miles, or eight leagues westward of St. Domingo and a place much frequented by reason of the good sugarcanes, which the Country thereabouts yields. There is likewise 8. St. Jago de los Cavalleros, ten leagues northward of La Vega. 9 Monte Christo, fourteen leagues westward of Plata, and lastly 10. Zeybo on the Southside of the Island, twenty leagues distant from St. Domingo; all of them pleasant and handsome Towns, and well seated, but destitute of Inhabitants very much: as likewise the whole Island generally is; the Natives being all destroyed, or Transplanted long since, and the Spaniards themselves, by the following discoveries and conquests upon the Continent, invited to better quarters. Of Cuba and Jamaica. 1. Westward, or rather to the Northweast of Hispaniola lieth Cuba, parted from the other by a Frith, or narrow Channel, which runneth betwixt the Capes of St. Nicholas, belonging to Hispaniola, and that called Mayzi belonging to Cuba. On the North it hath a Fry of little Islands, called, as above said, the Leucayae Islands, so many and so thick scattered, that they serve for no small security and defence of the Island on that side; beside a part of the Peninsula of Florida which coasteth it likewise Northward; on the west it hath the Country of Jucatan, which is part of the Continent, but at a distance of forty or fifty leagues; and on the South Jamaica. It is reckoned to be in length from Cape Mayzi, which looks towards Hispaniola, to the Cape of St. Anthony which is upon the Bay of Mexico, two hundred and thirty leagues; but in breadth neither proportionable nor certain; being in some places not above fifteen or sixteen leagues over; & in none above forty. But for fertility of soil contending with Hispaniola itself, and for temperature & healthiness of air much exceeding it: nor less rich formerly in good Mines both of gold and silver, plentifully stored at present, not only with Sugarcanes of the best growth, but likewise with abundance of Ginger-roots, Cassia Fistula, Mastic, Aloes, Cinnamon, Long-Pepper of America, as they call it, and divers sorts of spices. The Pastures no less abounding with Cattles of all sorts, especially of European breed; the Rivers and coasts of the Sea with good Fish: no scarcity of Fowl whether wild or tame; good Mines of Brass and Iron still found, with some Gold in the Rivers, especially those which fall into the Bay Pagua or the southside of the Island. The Woods, where the Country is mountainous and rocky as in some parts it is, well replenished with Timber, and many odoriferous trees beside, from which they gather a certain Rosin, or Gum, not less precious and useful than the Storax, or sweet Gum so called, of which the Herborists speak so much. In a word the only inconvenience which the Spaniards found in it, was from Serpents, which the Natives out of an old superstition among them, had preserved so long, they came to be grieviously annoyed by them at last; and when they would have destroyed them, could not; what remedy the Spaniards have since provided against them, appears not. The River Caute, which is one of the chiefest Rivers of the Island, is still said to be much haunted with Crocodiles; that are very dangerous to strangers unacquainted with the Country, and to any that rest or sleep near the banks of the River. 2. The Towns and places of chief importance belonging to this Island are, 1. St. Jago, seated at the bottom of a large and capacious Bay on the Southside of the Island, two or three leagues distant from the Sea, and counted the chiefest Port on that side. It is a Bishop's sea, and once a very populous and rich place of trade, but at present not a little decayed, only for want of Inhabitants, who are advanced more up into the Continent, having left the Islands behind them more than half empty. Near unto this place, viz. about three or four leagues distance, are those famous Mountains, which the Spaniards call Sierras de Cobre, or the Brass Mountains, from the abundance of that Metal which the Mines in them do still afford, 2. Baracao, thirty leagues Eastward of St. Jago toward the Sea. 3. Bayamo, or St. Salvador, seated more within land in a rich and pleasant part of the Island, but not so commodious for trade. 4. Puerto del Principe on the North side of the Island forty leagues distant from St. Jago, near to which, saith Laet, there is a Fountain, which sendeth forth a liquor of a Bituminous substance, and black as Pitch, very good and much used in those parts for the calking of Ships, and gathered in great abundance upon the Sea, into which it falleth, and is sometimes digged also, as out of a Mine. 6. La Trinidad nine or ten leagues Eastward of the Bay of Xagua. Lastly 6. Havana, the most known and best traded Port absolutely of all these parts, and and perhaps of the whole Continent, lying at the most northerly point of the Island towards Cape Florida; a place naturally strong, and so well fortified by Art, that it is held impregnable. The entrance whereof is defended on each side with a strong Castle, and a stronger than either built right opposite to the Mouth of the Haven; and all of them so commodiously and advantageously situated for the defence and assistance of each other, (as 'tis said) nothing can be devised better. Close to one of them there is erected a watch-Tower, of such height, that from the top of it, they easily descry whatsoever Ships move upon those Seas, and give notice of them to the Guards; being thereby a very great assurance not only to the Inhabitants of this place and Island, but also to the whole Bay of Mexico. And is therefore the ordinary Seat of the Governor, and the general Rendezvous of the Spanish Ships, when they go home for Spain, meeting here from all parts of the Gulf, and tarrying one for another till all be come in, and from thence setting sail for Spain, through the Sreits of Bahama, and by some of the Leucayae Islands above mentioned. It is likewise a very strong Garrison; it being said, that the King of Spain allows pay for no less number than 1000 Soldiers only for this place. Jamaica is somewhat a lesser Island, lying Southward of Cuba, and to the West of Hispaniola, almost at an equal distance, viz twenty leagues from them both. They reckon it to be in length about fifty leagues or more in breadth twenty, and to contain in the whole about one hundred and fifty, of a rich and fertile Soil, and in nothing less provided for the necessities of man's life, than either Hispaniola or Cuba; well stocked with , and as plentifully stored with Fruits of all sorts, yielding abundance of cotton-wool, more than either of the other Islands: only it wanteth the conveniency of some good Havens and Ports, which it hath but few; and the Sea round about it so shelvy, and full of Rocks and broken Islands, that the coast of it is held to be not a little dangerous: and therefore as little frequented by Merchants or others. There being at present three only small Towns inhabited in the whole Island, viz. 1. Sevilla, or New-Sevill, in the North parts of the Island. 2. Melilla ten leagues distant from Sevill towards the East. And lastly Oristan, 14. leagues distant from it towards the South. FINIS. Errata. PAg. 4. for their read there, p. 26. for degrees r. leagues, p. 37. for abstenious r. abstemious, p. 43. for de bios r. de Dios, p. 48. for Philirpine. r. Philippine, p. 106. for rending r. trending, p. 154. for clearer r. clear, p. 166. for times r. time, p. 171. for dusty r. dusky, p. 176. for Ovil r. Oval, p. 192. for in line r. in a line. p. 208. for unparalled r. unparallelled, p. 217. for more r. no more, p. 234. for Catha r. Cathay, for Dutch r. Dutch. p. 235. for there, and some r. there are some, p. 239. for inquire of r. inquire, p. 242. for though r. thought, p. 243. for George's bay r. St. George's bay, p. 344. for Role r. Rose, p. 369. for these r. those, p. 419. for thirty thousand r. three thousand, p. 437. for Dragro r. Drago. Books printed, and to be sold by Edward Dod, at the Gun in Ivy-lane. AN entire commentary on the old Testament in four Volumes, wherein the divers translations and expositions literal and mystical, of all the most famous Commentators; both ancient and modern are propounded, examined and Judged off, for the more full satisfaction of the Studious in all things, which compleateth the Author's Comment on the whole Bible, the like never yet published in english by any; written by John Mayer, D. D. in folio. Nature's Paradox, an excellent Romance, in quarto, translated by Major Wright. Lucasta Epodes, Odes, Sonnets, Songs, by R. Lovelace Esquire, in Octavo. The Life and death of Mr. Carter, with a funeral Sermon, in Octavo. The Jovial Crew of Merry Beggars, by R. Brome, in quarto. The Deputation of Angels, or the Angel Guardian, proved by the dim sight of Nature, by Robert Dingly, in Octavo. The Reign of King Charles, faithfully & impartially delivered and disposed into Annals, by H. L. Esquire. royal blazon or coat of arms